JP2020000766A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine allowing a manager or the like of a game parlor to suitably recognize a specific situation occurring in the game machine.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine in a state in which hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed in main processing of a main control board 920 and setting correspondence information is not stored in a RAM of the main control board 920 in restoration from a power failure state, for example, when power is turned on, various kinds of devices connected to the main control board 920 are operated by turning on power, thus allowing a manager of a game parlor to recognize a specific situation in which a game cannot be controlled normally through operation of the various kinds of devices.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

  As a conventional gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of the gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In this special gaming state, the posture of the movable member is changed to increase the probability of the game balls entering the winning opening, so that a large number of gaming balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1). 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, such as a situation where the setting of the gaming machine is not properly performed, in the case of a specific situation where there is a possibility that the game control may not proceed properly as a gaming machine, the situation, There is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a configuration that can be recognized by a game arcade manager or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately recognizing a specific situation occurring in the gaming machine by a game arcade manager or the like. Is what you do.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has been developed in order to solve the above problems.
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery,
A storage unit capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the lottery probability of the lottery by the lottery means,
Input means capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting one of the setting information, among a plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability by the lottery means,
When the operation information is input by the input unit, the storage control stores the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information in the storage unit as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery unit. Means,
An entrance where game balls can enter,
Detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detecting means,
A movable member operable to be switchable between an entry permitting state in which the game ball enters the entrance and an entry regulation state in which the game ball enters the entrance;
When a predetermined state notification condition at which normal control including at least the predetermined lottery control is not performed is satisfied, an operation check unit for operating the movable member is provided.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably recognizing a specific situation occurring in the gaming machine by a game arcade manager or the like.

Front side perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in an open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view of pachinko machine with front block removed Front view of gaming board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Flowchart showing an example of nail state related processing Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control main processing in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control interrupt processing in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing (A) is a front view showing a right portion of the gaming board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, (B) is a partially enlarged view of the right starting winning device, and (C) is an A- of FIG. 20 (B). Sectional view of the right start winning device on line A Flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment Explanatory drawing comparing the specifications of the game in each game state Explanatory drawing according to the specification of the game in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment Explanatory drawing according to the specification of the game in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment Explanatory drawing according to the specification of the game in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment Screen diagram showing an example of display contents of a decorative symbol display device in a gaming state in which a high probability state and a time saving state occurred after a special gaming state. Flow chart showing progress of a gaming state in a pachinko machine of a fifth embodiment. The schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the remaining period display part and the game state display part after a transition displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. The schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the remaining period display part and the game state display part after a transition displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. The schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the remaining period display part and the game state display part after a transition displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. Screen diagram for explaining the features of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment Block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of nail state-related processing in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing in the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment. Explanatory drawing concerning an example of the anti-sinking function provided in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment Schematic front view of the winning device unit Schematic exploded perspective view of the winning device unit viewed from the front side (A) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 38, (B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 38, and (C) is 38 is a simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit taken along line X3-X3 in FIG. FIG. 40B is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the movable member viewed from the front right side, and (B) is a perspective view of the movable member viewed from the rear left side. A cross-section viewed from the front when a cross-section is taken along a plane passing through a rotation axis that rotates a movable member of the entry control mechanism that takes an entry-prohibited posture, and an upstream passage portion and a downstream passage portion with respect to the movable member. Figure (A) is a top view of the movable member when the entry control mechanism takes an entry prohibition position, and (B) is a top view of the movable member when the entry control mechanism takes an entry permission position. Top view of the movable member for explaining the behavior of the game ball in contact with the two walls formed on the movable member Enlarged front view near the entry control mechanism in the winning device unit A schematic diagram showing an example of the behavior of two game balls that continuously enter the entrance of the special winning device from the passage when the entry control mechanism is in the entry allowable posture. Schematic diagram for explaining the possibility of ball biting in a large winning device having an entry control mechanism Schematic front view of a winning device unit showing an example of a state in which game balls are vertically stacked in a passage portion FIG. 38 is a simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit taken along line YY in FIG. 38. Schematic diagram showing an example of the behavior of a game ball discharged forward from an opening formed in the front of a passage portion. Timing chart showing timing of detection of a game ball by a start switch and transition to an entry allowable posture in an entry control mechanism of a right start winning device. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment. Timing chart for setting change by rear setting switch and initialization switch Timing chart for setting change by rear setting switch and initialization switch Flow chart showing main processing of a main control board in a pachinko machine of a fourteenth embodiment. Schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the back of the pachinko machine of the fifteenth embodiment. Block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a fifteenth embodiment. 15 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board in the pachinko machine of the fifteenth embodiment.

  With respect to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described, and then a modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, the configuration of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Is shown. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state where the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as main body supporting means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrangular frame body in which a top plate 111, a bottom plate 112, a left plate 113, and a right plate 114 are assembled. And is firmly fixed by fixtures (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or a main body portion having the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 and corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 is provided. The support mechanism for supporting and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body may be provided in the island facility.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101 as shown in FIG. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft hole provided in the shaft support is provided. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation. The main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. It is detachably attached to it. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a predetermined amount. You. Thus, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be detached from the outer frame 101.

  On the front side of the intermediate block 103, the front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side when viewed from the front. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is disposed on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side when viewed from the front. It is connected. The rear block supporting mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block supporting mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detachment operation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism for restricting opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism for restricting opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operating mechanism operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through an opening of the front block 102.

  When a right rotation operation using an operation key (not shown) is performed as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided on the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 and the movable portion 143 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable part 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism for restricting opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing are prohibited (opening / closing prohibited state) and a state where opening and closing are allowed (opening / closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation. It has been.

  The rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism includes, for example, two opening / closing restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. . The three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change their engagement state with the opening portions arranged to be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation. And an openable / closeable posture corresponding to the openable / closeable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the opening / closing allowance posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is allowed to open / close with respect to the intermediate block 103. Note that the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close permissible posture may be switched between the open / close prohibition state and the open / close permissible state by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to a change in posture when a component member in each device shifts between a plurality of postures.

  Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to some of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibition state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C corresponding to the remaining portion, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the openable / closable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been raised.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulating mechanism for regulating the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. The game ball movement restricting mechanism is configured by, for example, a combination of a flow-down restricting piece 161 provided on the intermediate block 103 and a restriction changing unit 162 provided on the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) to the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down regulating piece 161 is in a movement-permissible state in which a game ball is allowed to flow down. The change unit 162 presses and pushes the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guiding path (not shown) for guiding a game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (an open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow-down regulating piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the flow-down regulating piece 161 is set in a movement-prohibited state in which it projects toward the front block 102. The downflow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the downflow of the game ball to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, for example, at the lower end of the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and at the tip end of rotation (left side in rear view). An opening / closing detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the operation is performed is provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at a lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

  Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 mainly includes a base frame 201 made of a synthetic resin, and has a plurality of functional components attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front side of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central part of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in a front-rear direction over a wide area excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by a player to fire the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 surrounding the periphery of the opening 210 </ b> A, and a front protruding portion below the opening 210 </ b> A. An upper protruding portion 217, a lower protruding portion 218 that is located below the upper protruding portion 217 and protrudes forward, and an upper protruding portion 217 and a lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219 formed of a substantially flat region located on the back side of the 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is arranged is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 includes, for example, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light-transmitting light fitted into the front side of the panel frame 221 as shown in FIGS. And a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 behind the panel frame 221 with a predetermined gap therebetween. I have.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls obtained according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inlet 231A for allowing game balls to flow from inside the pachinko machine 100 to the storage unit 231 and an outlet (not shown) for allowing game balls to flow from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is released from the storage section 231 to the player without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removing mechanism has a function of switching the destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  The game balls obtained in accordance with the progress of the game and the game balls lent in response to a lending operation performed on a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. The storage section 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted or game balls lent out at the game hall are supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation is being performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes a storage part 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and a discharge port 241B. And a ball-pulling operation member 242 that operates the ball-pulling mechanism 243. The game balls or the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A when the storage section 231 is full. In addition, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage part 231 to the storage part 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage part 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Note that, when the release port 241B is completely opened by the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 242, the release port 241B is kept open until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) on the ball removal operation member 242 is performed. Will be maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided behind the inflow port 241A.

  The firing operation device 250 includes, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, a pedestal 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, A firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for invalidating the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, game balls are ejected from the firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Note that when the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or when the firing operation is disabled by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is being rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the firing device 330.

  Further, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, a left upper edge portion 211B and an upper right edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper central edge portion 211A, and a left upper edge portion. It has a left edge portion 211D located below the upper edge portion 211B and a right edge portion 211E located below the upper right edge portion 211C as light emitting portions. Devices 271 to 275 are provided.

  The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. It comprises a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 integrates and electrically connects a light emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and the like. And a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral portion 211 thereof. An upper left audio device 281 and an upper right audio device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right audio output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, a game ball lending device 290 is provided, for example, on the upper right side of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of bills, cards, and the like inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged alongside the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending. A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the game, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted into the card unit. When a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which numerical values corresponding to the amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent of the game balls. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the card in which the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the balance are recorded is returned from the card unit in accordance with the return operation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation different from the firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 that can perform a pressing operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up, down, left, and right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing an effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player-related operation It is possible to execute an effect setting operation or the like for inputting information and executing an effect of the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the previous game, and these operations can be executed by a player or a manager of a game arcade as needed. It has been. Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player contacts the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by an input operation unit driving unit such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and either before or after the input operation or during the input operation or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanying the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104 to integrate the main body of the pachinko machine 100 into an integrated state. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including a game board 400 to a base frame 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism for rotatably and detachably supporting the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism for fixing the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. A firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) for emitting, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress comprehensively, and based on commands from the main control device 370. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notification.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding game balls discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are formed by various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, the upper left sound device 281 and the upper right sound device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rear block 104. Including the wiring, the signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having a through hole through which game balls such as an outlet 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball preventing mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. And a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball fired from a firing device 330 described later into a game area. The return ball preventing mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch path 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing in parallel to return to the launch path 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock absorbing property to prevent a large rebound of a game ball, such that a game ball directed to the right over the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left via the upper center again. For example, it is formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in a lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the firing device 330 in the direction of the firing path 401B, and the firing is performed from the firing device 330 but not beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) through the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (falls down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which an area having a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is mostly used. The outer periphery of the game area is generally defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. Is divided into Note that various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a firing position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (see FIG. 10). ), A firing mechanism 333 that ejects a game ball arranged at a firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10), and a halved board case 371 for housing the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace.

  Further, main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thus, not only the rear side (front side) of the main controller 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main controller 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main controller 370 is attached to the gaming board 400. It can be easily checked with the camera attached. Main controller 370 may be connected to attachment portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the state of removal of main controller 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and a board case 391 having a two-part structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is, for example, similar to the main control board 920, in a state in which the sub-control board 940 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, various structures arranged in the game area in the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the downflow direction or downflow speed of the game ball, and a center disposed at a substantially center of the base 401. A structure 420, a starting device (specifically, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) according to a first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420, A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) related to a second special symbol arranged on the lower right side with respect to the structure 420, and a big winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, a lower winning device 433 and an upper winning device 434), a starting device 436 related to a normal symbol disposed above (upstream) the right starting winning device 432, and a game board 400. Upper right and upper and lower Winning device that the winning combination communicating actuating device 435 which is arranged above (upstream side) with respect to 433, regular winning device 439A arranged on both left and right sides of the lower side middle starting winning device 431 B, and a 439B.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the above-described upper middle starting winning device 431A and the like, and corresponds to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side starting start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 for detecting a game ball entering the right starting winning device 432, lower large winning switch 443 for detecting a game ball entering the lower large winning device 433, upper winning device. An upper winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the 434, a combination operation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, a start switch 446 that detects a game ball that has entered the starting device 436, and a lower position. A non-specific passage switch 447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the special winning device 433; A specific path switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the special winning device 433, a general prize switch 449A for detecting a game ball that has entered a general prize device 439A or 439B, 449B and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  Further, the gaming board 400 is provided with various sensors for preventing fraud (see FIG. 10), and can detect an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, the upper large winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A and 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. . Further, the game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area.

  A shooting ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 10) is provided in the collection and discharge passage. The fired ball detection switch 451 is configured by, for example, a pass-type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls fired in the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is transmitted to an external terminal board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. 580 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The game ball whose passage is detected by the launching ball detection switch 451 in the collection / discharge passage is passed from the pachinko machine 100 to the game ball circulation device provided in the game hall via a discharge port provided on the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 100. (Not shown). When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  Each prize device may be configured separately from other prize devices, or a device in which two or more prize devices (for example, an upper middle start prize device 431A and a lower middle start prize device 431B) are integrated. The starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. It may be an entrance for the ball to be released again into the game area without the ball being paid out.

  Each of the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B according to the first special symbol does not change the probability of a game ball entering them, and enters. The game ball thus guided is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. The mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device according to the second special symbol. Instead, or in addition, the starting device according to the first special symbol, the general winning device. Any of or a plurality of 439A and 439B may be provided. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  The right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 for changing a probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a right entry restriction device. 452 (see FIG. 10). The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462. When the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition position, the two movable pieces are connected to the entrance (winning opening). ) Is restricted (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right starting prize device 432, but when the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the two movable pieces have their leading ends. By arranging such that the interval between the sets is enlarged, the game ball can enter the right starting winning device 432. The right entry restriction mechanism 452, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”), enters the right entry In accordance with the drive by the regulating solenoid 462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower large winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entry permitted position and a restricted entry position, and a lower entry restriction device. The lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance attitude and the guidance attitude cause the game ball that has entered the lower big prize winning device 433 to enter the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distributing mechanism (not shown) for distributing, and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the orientation of the distributing mechanism to switch the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry prohibited position, the lower entry restriction mechanism 433 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower entry device 433. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture projecting forward, and is in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed rearward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, a game state advantageous as a privilege is given to the player. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance permitted position and the entry prohibited position by a transition between the entry permitted position and the entry prohibited position. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry-prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening). Is in the entry allowable posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the upper-prize winning device 434.

  In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside such as the right entry control mechanism 452, the winning opening (or entrance opening) of each device is constituted by each mechanism. In response to a change in the posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I just want it. Also, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball, such as the right entry control mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and to allow the game ball to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower big prize winning device 433 and the upper big prize winning device 434 when a lottery of a big hit is won. Specifically, a game ball that has entered the upper middle starting winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. Is determined by the right start prize switch 442 when a lottery based on the game is won (hereinafter, also referred to as a “first special symbol lottery”), or a game ball that has entered the right start prize device 432 according to the second special symbol is detected. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”), at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is operated. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 to the entry allowable posture, and further switches after a predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. When the solenoid 465 stops, it returns to the non-guidance posture.

  The winning combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operating, on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a big hit is won, the player can start the special game state at a timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to adopt a configuration in which either the lower large winning device 433 or the upper large winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball passes through the combination operating device 435, and instead or instead of this. In addition, a configuration may be employed in which either the lower winning device 433 or the upper winning device 434 starts operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, display devices 471 to 473 for displaying a symbol change display and a lottery result, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times a game is held are integrated on the game board 400. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided at a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

  Specifically, on the gaming board 400, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed along with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 471 relating to the special symbol, and a second symbol for changing and displaying the second special symbol in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or displaying the second special symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 displaying the number of unit games held according to the first special symbol, and a special symbol hold displaying the number of held unit games related to the second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are each held up to four times. Here, the unit game is a single game executed based on one start winning, and is determined based on whether the lottery is executed based on one start winning or not, and the lottery based on the winning / decision determined. This refers to a series of games including the start and end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle start winning switch. Even if detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 is detected by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). Also, the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emitting pattern (a combination of light emitting states (light off, light on, blink) including light emitting colors) of the plurality of light emitting units. The special symbol hold display device 476 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 relating to the second special symbol determine the number of times of holding by the combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

  Also, the game board 400 includes a normal symbol display device 473 that fluctuates and displays a normal symbol in accordance with a normal symbol lottery, or displays a normal symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to four times. In the case where the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the unit game right relating to the ordinary symbol is not added even if the game ball which has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The ordinary symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, a symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of hold times by a combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

  In addition, on the game board 400, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the finalized display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the finalized display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol always start changing at a completely coincident timing or stop display as the fixed display. There is no need to set the timing so that the fluctuation is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference between the timings, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, on the game board 400, a position where a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 10) constituted by a 7-segment display becomes visible in a state where the front block 102 is opened to the intermediate block 103 ( For example, it is provided at the upper left corner of the game board 400). The nail state level display device 474 is configured to be invisible or invisible to a player, and to be invisible to the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, , A position that overlaps the back side of the front block 102 and deviates from the light-transmitting viewing portion of the central panel 220).

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board light emitting device 490 is provided along with the progress of the game based on control by the sub-control board 940. Various types of light emission effects and state notification by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal gaming state") is in a state in which the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol have a long variable display time (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). Corresponding.

  When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state shifted based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state shifts after the special game state. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the variable symbol display time of the normal symbol are shorter than the non-hour reduction state (hereinafter, the "time reduction state"). "), And the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as" low probability state ") ( In the following, the state shifts to “time reduction gaming state”). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is reduced, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. A transition is made to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a “high-probability state”) (hereinafter also referred to as a “probable changing gaming state”).

  The time-saving gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter returns to the normal gaming state. In addition, the probable change game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and thereafter returns to the normal game state.

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a gaming state different from each of the above-described gaming states, or a configuration in which a transition between gaming states is performed under a condition different from the above-described conditions.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and a variety of variation pattern random numbers relating to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated. In the case where the game ball that has entered one of the start winning devices 431A and 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by one of the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol starts to win. It becomes. At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is the unit game related to the first special symbol. If no rights are reserved, it will start immediately after storing these random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning is completed. When each random number is acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all the holdings before the current winning winning after the special gaming state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  Further, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol is started after all the unit games related to the second special symbol have been completed. That is, when each random number is obtained based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the current start winning, the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Note that the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are arranged in the order of the starting winning. May be executed, or the two special symbols may be changed simultaneously instead of being selected.

  In the case of winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning winning of the first special symbol, a stop symbol (corresponding to the big hit winning of the first special symbol lottery based on the obtained big hit symbol random number) The type of big hit symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the big hit, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, A plurality of types of big hits are set in accordance with the type of game state such as a game state to be shifted to after the special game state (whether or not to shift to the probable change game state), and a big hit symbol is set for each type. If a big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is determined based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved. The change display time of the symbol is determined, and the change pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 (fluctuation effect) are started. The variable display according to the fixed pattern is continued over the display time, and in the decorative design, the variable display according to the variable pattern is continued over the variable display time. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol relating to the first special symbol is definitely displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is finally displayed as a decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper large winning device 434 are in the entry permissible attitude a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443 and 444 or in a predetermined maximum during the respective permissible postures of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper entry control mechanism 454. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Only one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is configured to take an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in (). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture of the last round and after a predetermined standby time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the second special symbol is started. The control of the unit game based on the winning start of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the ordinary symbol, the unit game according to the acquired ordinary symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the ordinary symbol is being performed, the unit game related to the acquired ordinary symbol is started after the unit game based on the acquired unit game right related to the ordinary symbol is completed.

  In a unit game related to a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not a winning has been made based on the value of a winning random number. If the winning has been won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when no winning is made in the ordinary symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stopped symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation display in a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined fluctuation display time, and in the time reduction state. The variable display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With a lapse of a predetermined time according to the game state, a stop symbol related to a normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restricting mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowed posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the winning is performed in the non-time saving state (the normal gaming state and the special gaming state), the right starting winning device 432 allows the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) is longer in the case of winning in the time saving state (the time saving game state and the probability change game state). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right starting winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, the player must first win in the normal symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right-start prize device 432 in a state where the right-start prize device 432 is allowed to enter based on the winning. Must. The winning probability for a normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry-permitted state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely shorter than the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, so that the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is much smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probable game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly greater than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays a game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 at the center of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) that mainly causes the game ball to flow from the left side of the central structure 420 ) And a game technique (right-handed game technique) in which a game ball flows down from the right side of the central structure 420. In the normal game state, the player plays a game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, performs the game by the right-handed game method. In addition, since the lower large winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, even in the special gaming state, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method.

  By changing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, the player can selectively perform the left-handed game technique and the right-handed game technique. That is, the player can perform the left-handed game technique by operating the firing handle 252 with a rotation operation amount such that the game ball does not mainly flow down the right side of the central structure 420. On the other hand, the player operates the firing handle 252 with a rotation operation amount such that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the central structure 420, that is, a rotation operation amount stronger than when playing a game by the left-handed game technique. By doing so, a right-handed game technique can be performed.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching another member or device to the base 501. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

  The rear block 104 is a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game balls, and rectifies the game balls downstream (for example, in one row) continuously from the game ball tank 510 and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball aligning portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of game balls on a downstream side of the case rail 530, A payout device 540 for renting out game balls, and guidance as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing out of the payout device 540 downstream of the payout device 540 to a guidance passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls payout of game balls by the payout device 540 and lending of game balls, and an external power source. A function as a power supply unit that converts the power into a predetermined voltage required by the type of device and outputs the same and controls the ejection of game balls based on a firing operation on the firing operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged beside the pachinko machine 100 A relay device 950 that relays a signal between the pachinko machine 100 and an external terminal plate 580 that is a board that outputs a signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 100 to a management device (not shown).

  The base 501 is integrally formed of a resin (for example, an ABS resin), and includes a base 502 corresponding to a front side portion and a protective cover 503 located behind the base 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as an attached portion to be attached.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the rear surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected or confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is provided on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window for exposing to the window. A large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of the heat generated by the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container opened upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island equipment are sequentially replenished at one end in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed in one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and a height gradually increasing as an upper surface of a passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 for rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage having a top surface portion whose height is lowered from a vertically overlapped height to a one-stage height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed vertically long so as to be continuous below the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. In the case rail 530, the game ball is curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously and continues downward. Further, a ball break detector 539 for detecting a ball break is provided at an intermediate portion of the ball path in the case rail 530. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built in the ball out detection unit 539, and the stored ball switch 591 causes a ball to be clogged on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof, and a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball conditions that have not been properly replenished.

  The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving unit for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout count switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passing of the released game balls through the ball path is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of paid out game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / firing control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Have been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

  The dispensing control device 560 includes a dispensing control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the dispensing control board 930. The dispensing control board 930, like the main control board 920, leaves no trace of opening. It is housed inside a substrate case sealed so as not to be opened.

  The power supply / emission control device 570 includes a power supply / emission control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power supply / emission control board 900. The power supply / emission control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. Is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

  The external terminal plate 580 is provided at the upper right end of the rear block 104 as viewed from the rear, as shown in FIGS. The external terminal plate 580 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal during a special game state, an output terminal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451, and the like.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device in response to operation of the launch operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 that controls the driving of the 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various powers from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of a driving voltage (for example, 12 VDC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. For example, power of a control voltage (for example, 5 VDC), power of a backup voltage for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various types of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power of the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. The power of the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with power of a driving voltage and a control voltage. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with power of the driving voltage and the control voltage. The power of the driving voltage and the power of the control voltage are supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, taking in of external power is stopped. Note that the pachinko machine is turned off by turning off the power switch 909 or by removing a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 through the power switch 909 from an external power supply outlet (not shown). The state in which the supply of power to the inside of the device 100 is stopped or the state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped are collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after shifting to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state so as to return to the current control state and end the control.

  The launch control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The operation of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping firing is provided. On condition that no operation is performed, the firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let it. As a result, game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252).

  When the initialization switch 907 is pressed, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 initializes the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the initialization signal in the ON state. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The configuration may be such that the initialization switch 907 is accommodated in the board case 371, so that an unauthorized signal input aimed at a section where a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal outputs the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. (Payout speed of the game balls from the device 540). The main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

  The power supply monitoring board 910 monitors a power supply state from the power supply / emission control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in accordance with the transition to the power failure state, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. If the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power failure signal in an ON state is output to main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the shift to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

  The main control board 920 generally controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various kinds of data temporarily when executing the control programs. And the like (not shown) for storing the same. The main control board 920 further includes various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown). I have. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by power supply of a backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after transition to the power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls a payout operation of game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with an instruction from the main control board 920 and a rental operation of game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with an operation of the game ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is provided with an input / output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with another device, and for example, bidirectional information input / output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Are connected to the open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the stored ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is connected. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function to maintain internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920 Unlike this, a configuration in which internal data is not maintained in a power failure state may be adopted.

  The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control substrate 920. The sub-control board 940 is provided with an input / output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with another device. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are connected so that information can be communicated in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing started upon recovery from a power failure state and a main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, interrupted by 2 ms (milliseconds)) and executed. Timer interrupt processing.

  First, a main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

  In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initialization processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol, and the normal symbol The random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the area of the RAM), and first to fourth variation type counters for determining the variation time, the variation pattern, and the like. Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the counter (partial area of the RAM) and interrupt permission processing S for permitting an interrupt 023 and is repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permitting process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permitting process S1023.

  In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) for controlling execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A start-up standby process S1003 for waiting for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up is executed.

  After the start-up standby process S1003, a process S1004 for determining the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900, a process S1005 for determining the value of the power failure information (a partial area of the RAM), and saving. An information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the storage information in the RAM is to be deleted based on the determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and The value of the counter related to the unit game in the middle, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) along with the current checksum value and the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Determine whether the exclusive-OR of the checksum value calculated in step 2) with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement, is “0” (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power outage information is not a predetermined power outage value indicating that the storage information has been saved and ended when shifting to the power outage state (S1005: N), or stored. If the information is not normally stored (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the information stored in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, the hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A ware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is performed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the held information and a return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 returns to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the held information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. Is performed (initialization command output processing S1014).

  Note that in the RAM return setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as a fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if the error has occurred, all of those error states are released. Also, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also performed in each of.

  After the initialization of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014), if the condition device was activated at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation processing S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and processing corresponding to the state of the game at the time of the power outage state is executed on the sub control board 940. You.

  After the special game state return preparation processing S1015, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state flag is set to determine whether the state is the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state (determination processing S1016). In this case (S1016: Y), a time-saving command is output (time-saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), a non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting processing S1019).

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than the timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, a power failure monitoring process S1202 and a nail state related process S1222 related to substantial control such as progress control of the game of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress has been stopped based on the detection of various injustices (S1207: Y), the control signal output processing S1208 to the nail state related processing S1222 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1223 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be individually described.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a partial area of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected all three times, it is determined that the power failure is present. If it is not determined in this determination that a power failure has occurred, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. In addition, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and a two's complement of the checksum value is set as a RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantial control such as progress of the game and monitoring of various sensors is not performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. You. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

  In the random number updating process S1203, the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from a prescribed maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter according to the above is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, if the value after the change is the same value as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. , And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the ordinary symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter for the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and a plurality of counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter for the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The winning random number counter for the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the normal symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value updating process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from a prescribed maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special value is changed. If the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter for special symbols and the random number initial value counter for ordinary symbols, the random number initial value counter for special symbols is the same except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

  In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation time and the variation pattern are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second to fourth variation type counters are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  In addition, each winning random number counter, big hit symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter relating to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol need not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter is another configuration. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a predetermined initial value is updated without using an initial value counter, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the information is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination processing S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. Note that the fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when various frauds are detected in the fraud detection process S1211. In the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped based on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, and the normal symbol display device 472 A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol design display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approaching solenoid 462, a downward approaching solenoid 463, an upward approaching solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower big winning switch 443, the upper winning switch 444, the combination operating switch 445, the start switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal state from each of the passage switch 448, the general winning switches 449A and 449B, and the shooting ball detection switch 451 is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read twice into the input buffer (part of the RAM) at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. In each case, the signal state read first (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and the signal state read second (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), a change in the detection state of various switches is detected. For each switch, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, the first signal state is the ON state, and when the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that the transition to the ON state is made. Then, a detection flag (part of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power outage monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, since each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, immediately after the power supply is stopped, the various switches are turned on. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer updating process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of the RAM) used for displaying special symbols and ordinary symbols in a fluctuating manner, controlling each game state, and monitoring impropriety are updated.

  In the fraud detection process S1211, a fraudulent act of forcibly causing a game ball to enter various prize apparatuses or forcibly operating various prize apparatuses is detected. More specifically, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly moved to a permissible approaching posture, and a game ball is guided to a specific passage of the lower winning device 433 by vibrating. The right start winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly induced by radio waves, the game balls are guided to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, the upper middle winning device 431A, In a situation where there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 at abnormal timing has been performed. Detect occurrence.

  In the winning detection response processing S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). , The middle start winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the first payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated. If the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Also, when the lower large winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower large winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper large winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper winning switch detection flag is set based on this, the big winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is closed or not.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. Note that the sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output processing S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. Note that the first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated in accordance with the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by one each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by one each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number (for example, three) of game balls corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 receives the prize. In a situation where a ball command is requested and payout of prize balls continues, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter to the payout control board. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game according to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In the ordinary symbol-related processing S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol, the operation control of the ordinary symbol display device 473 relating to the ordinary symbol is executed, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right starting winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 for the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, and Based on various kinds of information updated to control the operation of the special symbol reservation display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Nail state related processing S1222>
Next, the nail state related processing S1222 executed in the main control interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the nail state related processing S1222.

  The nail state-related processing S1222 is processing for detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B, and displaying and outputting a result based on the detection. Specifically, the nail state-related processing S1222 includes first half processings S1401 to S1405 related to the detection of the state of the nail 411, and second half processings S1501 to S1504 related to the display of the result based on the detection.

  In the nail state-related process S1222, first, as shown in FIG. 13, the number of game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B (hereinafter, also referred to as “general prize numbers”), and the game balls fired in the game area. It is determined whether or not a period for counting the number (hereinafter, also referred to as “the number of fired balls”) (hereinafter, referred to as a “counting period”) is in progress (S1401). In this way, by counting the number of general winnings and the number of shot balls only during the counting period, the ratio of the number of general winnings to the number of shooting balls (that is, the game to the general winning devices 439A and 439B with respect to the number of shooting balls). When calculating the ball entry ratio), the calculation result is less likely to be adversely affected by irregularities or averaging of numerical values.

  Note that the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined counting validity period in the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901; The period may be a period excluding a predetermined count invalidation period from the entire period.

  The “counting valid period” may be, for example, a period during which a game ball is fired from the firing device 330. Whether or not a game ball is being fired from the firing device 330 is determined by, for example, a variable resistor 253 that detects a rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 or a contact that detects that a player is touching the firing handle 252. The determination may be made based on the presence or absence of a predetermined firing operation based on the detection state of the sensor 254. For example, when it is detected by the variable resistor 253 that a rotation operation is performed on the firing handle 252, it may be determined that the game ball is being fired from the firing device 330, or the contact sensor 254 may be determined. When the contact with the firing handle 252 is detected by, the game ball may be determined to be fired from the firing device 330.

  In addition, the “counting valid period” may be a case where a predetermined launch operation is being performed or a gaming ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 within a flow-down elapsed time after the execution is completed. The elapsed time after the execution of the predetermined firing operation is the maximum time (for example, 15 seconds) that passes through the route that takes the longest time among the times detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is fired. ) Is preferably set, and the elapsed flow time is preferably set to the maximum time actually measured and a sufficient time in consideration of the variation in design. In addition, a certain time after the predetermined firing operation is started is not set as a counting validity period, for example, a path having the shortest time among the times detected by the fired ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is fired. The counting validity period may be set to a time excluding the shortest time (for example, 5 seconds) passing through.

  The “count invalid period” may be, for example, during a special game state. Whether or not the game is in the special game state can be determined, for example, based on the output state of a signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, the period from when the signal indicating that the special game state is being started to output from the external terminal board 580 to when the output of the signal ends is determined to be during the special game state.

  In addition, the “count invalid period” may be, for example, a period in which the previous block 102 is in an open state (that is, the previous block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103). Whether or not the front block 102 is open can be determined based on the output state of a signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10).

  When the front block 102 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B is not a game ball that has flowed down the game area and entered properly, but has been inspected by a factory inspector at the factory, and has been cheating while playing the game. (Hereinafter, referred to as a cheating person) or a person involved in the game arcade (eg, an employee of the game arcade) may put the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. By excluding the period in which the previous block 102 is in the open state from the counting period, the game balls thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be excluded from the counting target.

  Alternatively, for example, when it is detected that game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, a predetermined period thereafter may be set as the count invalidation period. Thus, after the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be excluded from the counting target by the further continuous injection.

  It should be noted that whether or not game balls are continuously thrown into the general prize devices 439A and 439B is determined by, for example, the number of game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B within a predetermined time, and the general prize devices 439A and 439B. The detection may be performed based on the entry interval of the game balls that enter.

  For example, when a game ball enters each of the general winning devices 439A and 439B in a predetermined number (for example, 10) within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the game balls continuously enter the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It may be detected that it has been inserted. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more game balls enter the general prize devices 439A and 439B at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 second interval), the game is transmitted to the general prize devices 439A and 439B. It may be detected that the balls have been continuously thrown.

  On the other hand, the “predetermined period”, which is a counting invalid period after the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, may be, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), or thereafter. May be a period in which game balls are inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. The “period during which game balls are thrown into the general prize devices 439A and 439B successively thereafter” is, for example, after continuous throwing is detected, subsequent to the continuous throwing, continuous throwing is detected under the same conditions as the detection. Period. Alternatively, in consideration of the fact that continuous dosing is performed intermittently, continuous dosing is performed for several tens seconds to several minutes (for example, about 30 seconds or about one minute) under the same conditions as the detection of continuous dosing. The detected period may be referred to as a “period during which game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B”.

  An invalid period (for example, 3 seconds) after a game ball is detected with respect to each of the general prize devices 439A and 439B is a count invalid period in which the count for the entry of the game ball is invalidated. , The first predetermined invalid number (for example, one ball or two balls) may be counted, and the entry of a certain number of subsequent game balls may be invalidated. The entry of all the game balls continuously inserted including the predetermined invalid number may be excluded from the counting target and invalidated. This invalid period may be set in consideration of the probability that a game ball enters the general winning devices 439A and 439B. For example, a launch operation with the highest game ball entry probability (for example, a left-handed game method or In any one of the right-handed game techniques), the invalid period may be set shorter as the probability increases, and the invalid period may be set longer when the probability is low, in accordance with the probability that the game ball continuously enters in any one of the right-handed game techniques. Further, the time may be set to a time corresponding to the number (payout number) to be paid out when a game ball enters the general prize devices 439A and 439B. , A short invalid period (for example, approximately 1.2 seconds) is set, and a long invalid period (for example, approximately 2.4) is set for a winning device having a large number of payouts (for example, 15 balls). Second). In addition, as the counting invalid period, a time corresponding to the firing time interval of game balls (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be set. For example, the invalid period (approximately twice or more the firing time interval of game balls). 1.2 seconds or more), or a four-fold or more invalid period (about 2.4 seconds or more) may be set. Further, it is preferable that the predetermined invalid number is set to be larger as the probability of entering the game ball is higher, and is set to be smaller when the probability of entering the game ball is lower. Then, a plurality of winning devices (for example, the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B) are provided with a general winning number counter and a firing ball number counter, respectively, so that the nail state level can be output separately. In this case, in each of the winning devices in which the counting is performed, at least one of the high and low of the probability of entry of the game ball and the number of payouts is set differently, and corresponding to the setting, the length of the invalid period or the predetermined invalid number is set. It is preferable that at least one of the settings is different.

  When the previous block 102 is in the open state and continuous throwing of game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B is detected, a combination of a plurality of conditions, such as setting a subsequent predetermined period as a count invalidation period, is used. May be generated when the condition is satisfied. As a result, the game balls continuously input to the general prize devices 439A and 439B by the players on the game arcade can be appropriately excluded from the counting target.

  Alternatively, the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among all periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. The “predetermined counting start condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting start time (for example, 11:00 am or 3:00 pm), or every predetermined period (for example, every two hours). May be the timing to start counting. Further, the “predetermined counting start condition” is, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the winning random number counter related to the first or second special symbol becomes a predetermined value predetermined as the counting start condition). Or a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a counting start condition). Note that the counting start time, the interval between the counting start times, and the predetermined timing are not necessarily required to be the same every day or every time, and any one of a plurality of different types of preset settings is selected. The selection order may be selected in a predetermined order (for example, different settings for each day of the week), or may be determined by lottery. You may make it change at random. Further, the counting start condition may be satisfied a plurality of times a day.

  Further, the “predetermined period”, which is a counting period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, may be, for example, a period until the predetermined counting end condition is satisfied. The “predetermined counting end condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting end time (for example, 1:00 pm or 6:00 pm), or may be a predetermined timing. The timing predetermined as the counting end condition may be, for example, a timing at which a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed as a counting period, or a winning random number counter according to the first special symbol may be a counting end condition. The timing may be a timing determined in advance as a timing, or may be a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a counting end condition.

  Note that the counting start condition and the counting end condition may be appropriately combined with the above-described conditions. For example, a predetermined counting start time may be set as a counting start condition, and a predetermined counting end time may be set as a counting end condition, and the winning random number counter according to the first special symbol is determined as a counting start condition. The timing may be set as a counting start condition, and the timing at which a predetermined period (eg, 30 minutes) has elapsed as a counting period may be set as a counting end condition.

  Alternatively, after the power supply from the power supply unit 901 to the pachinko machine 100 is started, a winning random number counter related to the special symbol (a winning random number counter related to the first special symbol or a winning random number counter related to the second special symbol) is displayed. The timing at which the value is obtained a predetermined N-th time (N is an integer of 1 or more) may be used as the counting start condition. In such a case, the period as the counting end condition may be determined based on the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired at the Nth time. That is, the counting period may be different based on the value of the winning random number counter acquired at the predetermined N-th time. At this time, the count start condition may be satisfied each time the value of the winning random number counter acquired at the predetermined Nth time is acquired.

  Note that the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 is a predetermined counting valid period or a predetermined counting invalid period among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 described above. It is not necessary that the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among the excluded period or the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. May be adopted.

  In addition, when a predetermined period after a predetermined count start condition is satisfied among all periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 is used as a “counting period” serving as a determination reference in S1401. The predetermined period after a single type of counting start condition is satisfied does not need to be the “predetermined period”, and different types of counting start conditions (for example, a predetermined counting start time and a predetermined counting start time, Each of the predetermined periods after each of the counting start timings) is established may be the “counting period”, or the predetermined period after the counting start condition in which different types of counting start conditions are combined is established as the “counting period”. It may be configured to be a “counting period”.

  In S1222, when it is determined that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), the process returns to the main control interrupt process without executing each process of S1401 to S1405, S1501 to S1504 described later. If it is determined that it is not during the counting period (S1401: N), the control may be started from the process of S1501, and the processes of S1501 to S1504 may be executed before returning to the main control interrupt process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1222 that the counting period is being performed (S1401: Y), it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected (S1402). Specifically, based on detection of a game ball by the general winning switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10), a general winning switch detection flag (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to each of the switches 449A and 449B. Is set, it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B has been detected.

  When it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B has been detected (S1402: Y), the general winning number counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1403), and the determination process S1404 is performed. Execute On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B has not been detected (S1402: N), the determination process S1404 is executed without executing the process of S1403.

  Specifically, in S1403, if either the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449A or the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449B is set, the general winning number is determined. "1" is added to the counter. On the other hand, when both the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449A and the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449B are set, “2” is added to the general winning number counter. I do.

  Since the RAM provided with the general winning number counter is supplied with the backup voltage from the power supply unit 901, even if the supply of the driving voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped, the general voltage is not applied. The stored contents of the winning number counter are retained. That is, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the general winning number counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state.

  In S1404, it is determined whether a launch sphere has been detected. Specifically, based on the detection of a game ball by the shooting ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 10), a shooting ball detection switch detection flag (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to the shooting ball detection switch 451 is set. If it is set, it is determined that a shooting sphere has been detected.

  If it is determined that a shooting ball has been detected (S1404: Y), the number of shooting balls counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1405), and a determination process S1501 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shooting ball has not been detected (S1404: N), the determination process S1501 is executed without executing the process of S1405.

  Specifically, in S1405, if the fired ball detection switch detection flag is set, “1” is added to the fired ball count counter. Since the number-of-launched-balls counter is provided in the RAM to which the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901, similarly to the above-mentioned general winning number counter, a predetermined switch (not shown) is operated to operate the RAM. Unless the stored information is erased, the stored contents of the number-of-fired-balls counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power outage state.

  In S1501, it is determined whether the previous block 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the front block 102 is not closed with respect to the intermediate block 103, It is determined that 102 is open.

  When it is determined that the previous block 102 is in the open state (S1501: Y), a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter) Is calculated (S1502). The value calculated in S1502 reflects the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

  In other words, the closer the value calculated in S1502 is to the reference value predetermined as a value when the winning of the game ball to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is as designed, the more the nail 411 (the more the value). In detail, it is highly likely that the nails 411) provided at the entrances of the winning ports of the general winning apparatuses 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof are in an appropriate state according to the settings at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. In the following description of the present embodiment, the “reference value” is the above-mentioned “reference value that is predetermined as a value when the winning of the game ball to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is equal to the design value”. Suppose there is.

  On the other hand, as the value calculated in S1502 is more distant from the reference value, the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof is set from the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. It is highly likely that the state has deviated. That is, the greater the difference is, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is greatly deviated from an appropriate state.

  The nail state level is calculated based on the value calculated in S1502 (S1503). The “nail state level” indicates that the state of the nail 411 (more specifically, the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof) is set when the pachinko machine 100 is manufactured. Information that is appropriate or inappropriate at a gradual level. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within the first range including the reference value (for example, a range having both ends of the reference value × ± 5%), the nail state level is determined to be appropriate for the state of the nail 411. Is set to “1” indicating that

  On the other hand, when the value calculated in S1502 is outside the first range (that is, on the side farther from the reference value), the nail state level is set to a value larger than “1”, whereby the nail 411 is set to an appropriate value. Indicates a possible out of state condition. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within a second range set outside the first range (for example, a range in which the end farther from the reference value is the reference value × ± 10%), The nail state level is set to “2”, and when the nail state level is outside the second range (that is, on the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to “3”. In other words, the more the nail 411 deviates from the appropriate state, the greater the value of the nail state level.

  Next, a process of outputting the nail state level calculated in S1503 is executed (S1504), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the present embodiment, in S1505, a numerical value indicating the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 10) composed of a seven-segment display. For example, when the nail state level is “1”, “1” is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. If it is determined in S1501 that the previous block 102 is not in the open state (S1501: N), the process returns to the main control interrupt process without executing the processes in S1502 to S1504.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, in the nail state-related process S1222, the update of the general winning number counter (that is, the counting of the general winning number) is performed only during a predetermined counting period, so that the counting is performed by the general winning number counter. For the number of general prizes received and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general prizes thus counted, the general prize devices 439A and 439B are improperly consecutively inserted, improperly consecutively inserted, and averaged. And the adverse effects of the above. This makes it possible to appropriately reflect the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof at the nail state level.

  For example, when performing a pre-shipment inspection on the pachinko machine 100 at the factory, the front block 102 is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, and the main control is performed on the insertion. When it is checked whether the device 370 or the like operates properly, it is confirmed that the general prize devices 439A and 439B continuously receive game balls with a very high probability than the probability that the game balls enter when the player plays the game. Become. If the continuous entry of the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is used as a value for judging whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed, the pachinko machine 100 can be appropriately replaced. Performance may not be able to be determined.

  Further, for example, a cheating person who visits a game hall (hall) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed and plays a game illegally opens the front block 102 and continuously throws game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. May be lost. In this case, although the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed, the winning of the game ball to the general prize devices 439A and 439B becomes higher than the designed value, and it can be determined that the designed value is not met. There is. Here, the special prize devices 433, 434, etc., which are not opened unless a specific gaming state such as winning a jackpot, is detected by the control of the pachinko machine 100 to detect the entry of the game ball at an improper timing. It is easy to perform the control corresponding to the game, but a winning port where the game ball can always enter regardless of the game state, or the payout of a certain number of game balls without receiving a lottery when the game ball enters It is sometimes difficult to determine whether such an abnormal state has occurred or is due to a normal game, for a winning port (general winning port) to which a certain game value is given. There is a possibility that fraudulent cheating will take place.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, it is possible to reduce the adverse effect due to the continuous input to the general prize devices 439A and 439B. Even if it is performed, the actual state of the nail 411 can be suitably reflected on the nail state level. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be appropriately evaluated based on the nail state level.

  In addition, since the nail state level appropriately reflects the illegality of the game arcade on the nail state level, an outsider (for example, a member of the inspection machine of the gaming machine) can judge the illegality of the game arcade based on the nail state level. Can be suitably detected.

  For example, when a person involved in the game hall modifies the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the state in the vicinity thereof is illegally changed (a game ball is inserted into the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B). In some cases, the nails 411 are modified to such an extent that they cannot enter at all, thereby making the performance of the pachinko machine 100 unsuitable.) In such a game arcade, such illegality is detected by an outsider. In order to prevent such a situation, after the game hall is closed, a person related to the game hall or the like illegally throws game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B, and the performance of the general prize devices 439A and 439B follows the design value. There is a possibility that the balance on the numerical value may be adjusted to achieve performance. In this way, when the numerical values are aligned, the nail 411 is in an appropriate state despite the inappropriate state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B. Is highly likely to be calculated.

  On the other hand, of the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the period in which the front block 102 is in the open state, or the period in which game balls may be continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439 A and 439 B. By excluding (ie, a predetermined period after the illegal continuous insertion of gaming balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B) from the “counting period” of the determination criterion in S1401, the worker of the factory, Even if a related person at the game hall or the like continuously throws game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B for matching the books, the continuously thrown game balls can be excluded from counting by the general winning number counter. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls inserted in the inspection before the factory shipment or the game balls incorrectly inserted for matching the bottom of the book from being reflected on the nail state level, so that the general prize devices 439A and 439B win. The actual state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the mouth or in the vicinity thereof can be suitably reflected on the nail state level.

  In other words, when a person involved in the game hall illegally inserts a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, there is a possibility that the game ball is continuously inserted in order to perform the illegal work efficiently. By excluding a predetermined period of time after detection of illegal continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B from the “counting period” of the determination criterion in S1401, the general winning device 439A is generated by such illegal continuous insertion. , 439B can be suitably excluded from counting by the general winning counter.

  Further, as another example, a person related to the game arcade may adjust the entry ratio of game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B (easy entry of game balls) on the day before opening the store. In some cases, the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B may be incorrectly changed. In this case, on one day, the entry ratio is adjusted to be higher than the design value, and on another day, the entry ratio is adjusted to be lower than the design value. By averaging over several days, the state of the nails 411 is appropriate even though the state of the nails 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is inappropriate. May be calculated.

  On the other hand, during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, only the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to average the numerical values by accumulation, Thereby, the actual state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof can be appropriately reflected on the nail state level.

  The nail state level is calculated from a value obtained by dividing the number of general winnings by the number of firing winnings (ie, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of shot balls counter). The member of the institution) can appropriately grasp the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof from the nail state level.

  In particular, the counting of the number of shot balls used for calculating the nail state level (that is, updating of the number of shot balls counter in S1405) is the counting of the general winning number used for calculating the nail state level (update of the general winning number counter in S1403). ) Is performed only during the predetermined counting period, so that the value calculated in S1502 (the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the shooting ball number counter) is calculated based on the entrance of the winning port of the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It can be obtained as a value that appropriately reflects the actual state of the nail 411 provided in the vicinity thereof (more specifically, the state of the nail 411 in a predetermined period in which the number of general winnings is counted).

  In addition, the calculated nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 on condition that the front block 102 is in the open state, so that the nail state level is changed to the nail state when the player is not playing a game. It can be displayed on the level display device 474. Therefore, the player does not recognize that information irrelevant to the game, such as the nail state level, is displayed, and the information irrelevant to the game is displayed, and the player is distrusted with the game. Can be suitably suppressed.

  The nail state level displayed on the nail state level display device 474 is obtained by dividing the value calculated in S1502 (ie, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of shot balls counter) into three levels. An outsider (for example, a member of a gaming machine inspection organization) determines whether the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the vicinity thereof is appropriate or not. It is easy to determine from the display contents of the level display device 474.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is provided with a setting change function for setting the throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 14 is a front view of a game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The game board 400X is provided with a flow-down changing member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412, a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base 401, and the like in the same manner as the game board 400. The middle starting winning device 2431 which is a starting device according to the first special symbol arranged on the lower side, and the right which is a starting winning device according to the second special symbol which is arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420. A start winning device 2432, a lower large winning device 2434 disposed below the middle starting winning device 2431, an upper large winning device 2433 disposed below the right starting winning device 2432, General prize devices 2439A and 2439B arranged on both left and right sides of the prize device 2434 are provided.

  The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball corresponding to the above-described middle starting winning device 2431 or the like (see FIG. 16), and goes to a predetermined area corresponding to each switch. Of the game ball can be detected. For example, a middle-start winning switch 2441 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle-start winning device 2431, a right-start winning switch 2442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 2432, and a gaming ball that has entered the upper winning device 2433. , A lower winning switch 2444 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower winning device 2434, a combination operating switch 445, a start switch 446, and a non-forming device formed inside the upper winning device 2433. A non-specific path switch 2447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown), and a specific path switch for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433. 2448, general prize switches 449A and 449 for detecting game balls that have entered general prize devices 2439A and 2439B, respectively. B, etc. are installed on the game board 400X.

  The entrance portions of the game balls of the respective winning devices, specifically, the middle starting winning device 2431, the right starting winning device 2432, the upper winning device 2433, the lower winning device 2434, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B constitute a winning opening. The game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. Further, the game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area.

  A launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 16) is provided in the collection and discharge passage. The fired ball detection switch 451 is configured by, for example, a pass-type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls fired in the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is transmitted to an external terminal board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. 580 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The game ball whose passage is detected by the launching ball detection switch 451 in the collection / discharge passage is passed from the pachinko machine 100 to the game ball circulation device provided in the game hall via a discharge port provided on the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 100. (Not shown). When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  The right start winning device 2432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 2452 that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a right entry restriction device. And a right entry restriction solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 16) for driving the motor 2452. The right entry restriction mechanism 2452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 2462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening). Although the game ball cannot enter the right starting winning device 2432 by taking the arrangement, when the right approach regulation mechanism 2452 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece is arranged to guide the game ball into the entrance, thereby playing the game. The ball can enter the right starting prize device 2432. The right entry restriction mechanism 2452 is used when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as a “normal symbol lottery”), and the right entry is performed. In accordance with the driving by the regulating solenoid 2462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the upper winning prize device 2433 has an upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the interior by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and an upper entry restriction. The upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 (see FIG. 16) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 2453 and the transition between the non-guidance attitude and the guidance attitude allow the game ball that has entered the upper-level winning device 2433 to enter the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distributing mechanism (not shown) for distributing, and a switching solenoid 2465 (see FIG. 16) for changing the orientation of the distributing mechanism to switch the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 is in the entry-prohibited position, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the upper entry prize apparatus 2433. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 is in the entry permissible posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the upper large winning device 2433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the upper winning award device 2433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided position that projects forward, and is in a guided position in which the distribution mechanism is immersed backward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, a game state (for example, a certain (Game state).

  As shown in FIG. 14, the lower large prize winning device 2434 has a lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the interior by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a lower entry restriction. A lower entry control solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 16) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 2454 is provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 is in the entry prohibition position, the game ball cannot enter the lower large prize winning device 2434 by closing the entrance (winning opening) by the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454, but the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454. Is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower big winning device 2434.

  A game ball can enter the upper winning prize device 2433 and the lower winning prize device 2434 when a jackpot lottery is won. Specifically, a lottery based on the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol detected by the middle start winning switch 2441 (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”) is won. In this case, the lottery based on detection of the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol by the right starting winning switch 2442 (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won. In this case, at least one of the upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 and the lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 is operated. By this operation, at least one of the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the upper entry control mechanism 2453 to the entry allowable posture, and further switches after a predetermined time from the transition to the guiding posture. When the solenoid 2465 stops, it returns to the non-guidance posture.

  Further, on the gaming board 400X, a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 16) constituted by a 7-segment display can be visually recognized in a state where the front block 102 is opened to the intermediate block 103 ( For example, it is provided at the upper left corner of the game board 400). The nail state level display device 474 is configured to be invisible or invisible to a player, and to be invisible to the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, , A position that overlaps the back side of the front block 102 and deviates from the light-transmitting viewing portion of the central panel 220).

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, a game ball enters a specific passage (an internal passage of the upper winning prize device 2433) during a special game state shifted based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state shifts after the special game state. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game state is shifted to a time-saving game state (that is, a game state in which the player is in a time-saving state and has a low probability). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to the certain-variable game state (that is, the game state where the time is reduced and the probability is high).

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a gaming state different from each of the above-described gaming states, or a configuration in which a transition between gaming states is performed under a condition different from the above-described conditions.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400X will be described generally in chronological order. In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the middle-start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the middle-start winning switch 2441 (see FIG. 16), the first special symbol starts to win. At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol is started in the gaming board 400 in the same manner as the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol.

  When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning, a case where a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning on the gaming board 400. Similarly, the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) corresponding to the big hit winning of the first special symbol lottery is determined based on the obtained big hit symbol random numbers.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected as in the case of the gaming board 400. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable effect) on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started in the same manner as in the gaming board 400, The symbols are continued, and the stop symbols relating to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed as the variable display time elapses.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 of the upper large winning device 2433 become the entry permissible posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 2443 and 2444, or a predetermined maximum during the allowable entry positions of the upper entry control mechanism 2453 and the lower entry control mechanism 2454, respectively. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the upper entry control mechanism 2453 or the lower entry control mechanism 2454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 or the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Only one of the upper entry control mechanism 2453 and the lower entry control mechanism 2454 takes an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in (). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture of the last round and after a predetermined standby time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432 relating to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the second special symbol is a start winning. The control of the unit game based on the winning start of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game related to the normal symbol is performed in the same manner as in the case of the game board 400. If the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restriction of the right starting winning device 2432 after the fixed symbol is displayed. The mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once. Specifically, in a case of winning in a non-time-saving state (a normal game state and a special game state), the right starting winning device 2432 allows the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 2432 is in the non-time-saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time is longer (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the case of winning in the time-saving state (the time-saving game state and the probable change game state). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right approach restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach prohibited attitude without waiting for the maximum allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to first win in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start prize device 2432 in a state where the right starting prize device 2432 is allowed to enter based on the winning. Must. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time of the entry permitted state of the right start winning device 2432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely shorter than the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, so that the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is much smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probable game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly greater than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays a game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends. Therefore, in the normal game state, the player plays a game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the sure-change game state, performs the game by the right-handed game method. Further, since the upper winning award device 2433 and the lower winning award device 434 are disposed on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed game technique even in the special game state.

  FIG. 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15, a back setting switch 905 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The back setting switch 905 is a setting valid for validating a setting operation for setting the throwing rate of the pachinko machine 100 to any one of a plurality of predetermined steps (for example, 6 steps or 9 steps). Device.

  A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the back setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial position), thereby changing the setting of the throwing rate. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the change in the throwing rate is enabled in this way, the setting change in the throwing rate is effectively performed.

  When the setting change of the throwing rate is performed effectively, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, it can be said that the change in the setting of the throwing rate by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change in the game mode.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the initial hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is set in accordance with each step set by the change of the throwing rate (that is, the change of the setting of the game mode). Winning probability), the probability of continuation of probability change (in the present embodiment, the probability of entering from the normal game state to the game state of probability variation (probability of entry), and the special game state via the second special symbol lottery in the game state of probability variation. (Including the probability of transitioning to the probable game state after the special game state when the game mode transitions to the special game state), it is possible to select any of the nine types of game modes different from each other. Therefore, when the setting change of the throwing rate (change of setting of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are performed so that the initial hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage are obtained. By changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability), the pitching rate is adjusted.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the top type in which the probability of initial hit is significantly low but the probability of continuation is significantly high, and the middle type in which the probability of initial hit is medium and the probability of continuation is medium You can select the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly higher initial hit probability but a significantly lower probability of continuation. Furthermore, in each of these types, a three-stage probability state (hereinafter, also referred to as a probability setting state) in which the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided into smaller widths than the width of the initial hit probability between the types, that is, A first-stage probability having the lowest initial hit probability among the three stages, a second-stage probability having the second lowest initial hit probability, and a third-stage probability having the highest initial hit probability can be selected.

  In the top type, the number of prize balls accompanying the prize to the middle start prize device 2431 and the right start prize device 2432 is smaller than that of the other types, but the prize ball according to the prize to the upper large prize device 2433 and the lower large prize device 2434. The number is higher than other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls accompanying the prize to the middle start prize device 2431 and the right start prize device 2432 is larger than that of other types, but it is accompanied by the prize to the upper large prize device 2433 and the lower large prize device 2434. The number of prize balls is smaller than other types.

  Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same number in any of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type based on the number of prize balls, and the gaming ability for estimating the setting of either type is extended for a long time. Can be added.

  In addition, the profit rate for the player changes according to the stage of the probability setting state for any of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for any type, The profit rate for the player is set substantially the same. For this reason, even if the setting of the probability is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall can be easily predicted, and the management of the game hall can be facilitated.

  It should be noted that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the throwing rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the initial hit probability and the probability change continuation rate as described above. Any of the continuation rates may be used. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the initial hit probability and the probability of change probability, such as the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery , The probability of the small hit being selected, the probability of intrusion rate (in this embodiment, the rate of entry into the probability of change game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability of change game state shifted after the special game state (For example, the probability that the end of the probable game state is selected in the drop lottery performed every time the symbol is changed during the probable game state), and the like. May be a combination of two or more.

  Above the back setting switch 905, a setting display device 906 is provided. When the change of the throwing rate (change of the setting of the game mode) is effectively performed by operating the back setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. . The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabet character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type is represented by an alphabetic character of “T”, “M”, and “B”, respectively. In each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by “1”, the second-stage probability is represented by “2”, and the third-stage probability is represented by “3”.

  Therefore, for example, when the game mode is the top-type first-stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “T1”, and when the middle-type third-stage probability game mode is set. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “M3”, and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom-type second-stage probability game mode is “B2”.

  FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 16, the back setting switch 905 and the setting display device 906 are connected to a signal relay unit 903.

  The signal relay unit 903 relays an ON-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated clockwise by approximately 90 ° by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows the game mode to be changed in response to receiving the ON-state setting signal from the back setting switch 905. The signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

  Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 17) in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

  The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started upon returning from the power failure state, like the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, portions different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, after the start-up standby processing S1003, the output state of the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 of the power supply / emission control board 900 Is determined in step S2001.

  Specifically, when the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in an ON state indicating that the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), information on substantially the entire area of the RAM is stored. Is performed, a RAM clear process S2002 for erasing is performed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is deleted.

  The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined (9 types in the present embodiment) game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM. ing. Therefore, by the RAM clear processing S2002, the information of substantially all areas except the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM of the main control board 920 is erased, and the setting change is permitted.

  When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal for identifying a game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

  Next, a setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is performed until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off when the back setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

  The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives the initialization signal based on the depression of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, an order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example,... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Are determined in advance, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

  Each time the change is performed, a value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM as setting correspondence information. Each time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is displayed on the setting display device. 906 is displayed.

  Accordingly, a setting changer such as a manager of a game arcade operates the initialization switch 907 until the game mode desired to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After the pressing is repeated, the game starting ball is won by the middle starting winning device 2431, whereby the selection of the game mode can be completed. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when a game ball is won in the middle-start winning device 2431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

  When the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), the RAM is changed to newly initialize various types of information in the RAM except for information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information). The setting process S2005 is executed. Thereby, the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is determined that the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

  After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 of outputting a set command indicating completion of RAM setting to the payout control board 930 is executed. Upon receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to a normal game process, and recognizes in which game mode it operates. it can.

  After the set command output processing S2006, processing after the special game state return preparation processing S1015 is executed. After the start-up standby process S1003, if the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), the processes after the determination process S1004 are executed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is periodically performed (this embodiment is similar to the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment). In this case, the main processing is interrupted and executed (in a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)).

  Hereinafter, portions different from the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, one of the processes executed when the game progress is not stopped (S1207: N). The setting suggestion information related processing S2021 described below with reference to FIG. 19 is executed after the nail state related processing S1222.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion information related processing S2021. The setting suggestion information related process S2021 is a process of outputting setting suggestion information when a condition set as an output condition of setting suggestion information is satisfied.

  Here, the “setting suggestion information” includes a plurality of stages (a setting corresponding information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) which are set in advance so as to be settable. In the present embodiment, it is information that indicates which of the nine types of game modes, and may be information that can completely identify which of the nine types of the setting correspondence information. Only a part of the correspondence information (for example, only the type) may be identifiable information, and the selection rate may be set to be different depending on which of the nine types of the correspondence information is set. May be information that allows the player to guess the setting, for example, different information is set according to the type of the setting corresponding information. Selected with high probability In the case of the middle type, the middle value of “5” is most selected, and the number that is larger or smaller than the middle value of “5” is harder to be selected. Although it is not clear which type it is, the number as setting suggestion information may correspond to the setting correspondence information.

  In the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, a determination processing S1601 for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the processing of S1503 of the nail state related processing S1222 (see FIG. 13). Do. Specifically, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or more. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the general winning number counter counts the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B.

  If it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level (S1601: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the process of S1606, specifically, control data for displaying setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode on a predetermined display unit is set. Note that the predetermined display unit may be a symbol display device such as the decorative symbol display device 479 or a dedicated display unit for displaying setting suggestion information.

  For example, if the configuration suggestion information is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, control data (command) for displaying the setting suggestion information on the decorative symbol display device 479 is set in the process of S1606. The command set here is output to the sub-control board 940 in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub-control board 940 displays the setting suggestion information corresponding to the received command at a predetermined position (for example, the right corner) of the decorative symbol display device 479 in response to the reception of the command.

  The setting suggestion information displayed and output in the process of S1606 may be a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state, similar to the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906, It may be a character indicating each game mode, a numerical value, a symbol, a figure, a color, a text, or the like indicating each game mode, or a sensuous expression such as "maybe a high probability setting!" It may be a text that shows, or a figure that makes each game mode identifiable in a bar graph or the like.

  In addition, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is not limited to information that can completely identify which of the nine types of setting corresponding information, and which of the nine types of setting corresponding information is available. Information that can be guessed by the player, for example, information that can be guessed by the player by setting at least a part of the selection rate to be different depending on which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is set. There may be. For example, if the color set in 10 levels is the top type, the darker the color is, the higher the probability is selected. If the color is the middle type, the intermediate color is selected the most, and the color is darker or lighter than the intermediate color. The color is harder to select, and if it is the bottom type, the lighter the color, the higher the probability that it will be selected, and although it is not clear which type it is, it will be possible to guess by checking the color as setting suggestion information For example, information indicating at least one of the type and the probability setting state may be used.In this case, the character is not limited to the color, and may be a plurality of types of characters having different selection rates for each type or each character. The type of the character may correspond to the type, and the size of the character may change according to the probability setting state.

  In addition, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured by a part of the variable display performed by the special symbol lottery, or may be displayed by the type of the symbol in the variable display. For example, for example, a probability setting that is advantageous to the player as the probability setting state makes it easier to select a specific symbol (for example, a symbol including the number “7”) or includes a number from “1” to “9”. You may make it easy to select the pattern containing a large number among the patterns. Here, the number of times that the setting suggestion information is output is not limited to one time, and the process of S1606 is repeated a plurality of times depending on the establishment of the output condition of one setting suggestion information so that a plurality of setting suggestion information is output. Alternatively, for example, a plurality of (eg, two) information outputs determined each time the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied may be performed, or the number of times of information output by the lottery may be different. Alternatively, the number of times may be varied according to the state of the game at the stage when the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of times that the setting suggestion information is displayed increases as the player continues firing without stopping the firing, for example, the execution of the variable display is suspended. As the number of times increases, the number of times that setting suggestion information is output may be increased, or the number of times a start winning prize is generated in a situation where the execution of the variable display is suspended up to the upper limit is counted, and the number of times corresponding to the number is counted. The setting suggestion information may be displayed more times as the number of times increases.

  Note that the output of the setting suggestion information executed by the process of S1606 does not necessarily need to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, and may be a specific audio output from the audio devices 281 and 282 (for example, output in other situations). (E.g., a high sound of "quen"), the emission of specific light by the panel light-emitting device 490 or the frame light-emitting devices 271 to 275 (e.g., iridescent light that does not emit in other situations), or at least a portion in other situations. For example, the light emitting portion that constantly emits light may be turned off for a predetermined time or more. In such a case, using the light emission or extinguishing of light by the board surface light emitting device 490, the board of the gaming board 400X is turned off for a few seconds (for example, about 1 second) at the timing when the game ball is fired by the firing device 330, and then emits light again. By doing so, a so-called “delay effect” may be performed.

  Note that the output of the setting suggestion information executed in the process of S1606 does not necessarily need to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, but may be a sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282, a panel light emitting device 490, a frame light emitting device, or the like. Light emission by 271 to 275 may be used. Further, in the process of S1606, the establishment of other conditions, such as determining whether or not to output the setting suggestion information by lottery, may be set as the condition for outputting the setting suggestion information, and the predetermined probability when the process of S1606 is executed may be determined. The setting suggestion information may be output (for example, with a probability of about 1/10).

  In the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, a determination processing S1602 is performed to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. Specifically, in the determination processing S1602, the setting suggestion is made when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) among the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. It is determined that the information output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied regarding the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (S1602: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

  In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1603 is performed to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the occurrence interval of the start winning (starting condition). Specifically, in the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period (for example, during a firing operation in which a game ball is fired from the firing device 330 in the normal game state), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is used. Start prize (i.e., the winning of the game ball to the middle start prize device 2431 or the right start prize device 2432), a new predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, and a new start prize has elapsed. When a situation where the starting condition of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is not satisfied occurs, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the occurrence interval of the start winning (S1603: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

  The start winning prize generation interval (that is, the elapsed time since the last start winning prize) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940, and transmits a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol. The interval of the reception timing of (for example, a hold command) is measured as the interval of occurrence of the start winning. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the last start winning prize, and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub control board 940.

  In the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period, a new special symbol (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) is established even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) occur within a predetermined monitoring period (for example, within one hour after the first occurrence of the situation), the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not satisfied. May be determined to hold. Alternatively, during the predetermined game period, after the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, a new special symbol starting condition is not satisfied even after the predetermined period elapses, at least once within the predetermined monitoring period. The setting suggestion is made when the total period of occurrence and occurrence of the special symbol starting condition not satisfying the new special symbol starting condition reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10 minutes) within the monitoring period. It may be determined that the information output condition is satisfied. In addition, the number of times the start condition of a new special symbol is satisfied until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied. When a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) occur, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied many times in a short period, such as determining that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. Then, it may be determined.

  As described above, in the determination processing S1601 to S1603 of the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, a predetermined prize device (for example, a general prize device 2439A, 2439B, medium prize device) provided in the gaming board 400X is set as an output condition of the setting suggestion information. With respect to various predetermined conditions relating to the entry of the game ball into the start winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432), it is determined whether or not the conditions are satisfied. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the processing of S1606.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19, in the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, when the game is in the special game state (S1604: Y), it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied. Step S1605 is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1605, during a special game state, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249, the setting suggestion information is displayed. It is determined that the output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied (S1602: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

  Here, in the special game state, in order for game balls to be excessively stored in the storage unit 241 from the ball overflow switch 249, the ball release operation member 242 is not subjected to the ball release operation (for example, pressing operation), and the discharge port 241B is not provided. Must be continued for a certain period of time or longer, and it is possible to select whether or not to execute this ball-pulling operation according to the player's intention. For this reason, in a situation where the discharge port 241B is always opened, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not satisfied, and the game that knows that the output of the ball overflow signal is the output condition of the setting suggestion information is performed. It is possible to easily establish the output condition of the setting suggestion information only for the user. As a result, it is possible to add new playability such as giving an indirect privilege that cannot directly obtain a value to some players, and to perform an operation other than the firing operation. By using the section, it is possible to add a new game property in which the player obtains the setting suggestion information.

  In the determination process S1605, during the special game state, the speed at which the game ball enters the upper winning device 2433 or the lower winning device 2434 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 8 times in 8 seconds in at least one predetermined round). When the number of game balls enters the special winning device 2433, 2434), or when the number of times the certain-variable game state continues during the special game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the setting suggestion information is output. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied. Further, as an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute according to a player's intention, a special game state in which a firing operation is stopped so that a game ball does not enter the special winning devices 2433 and 2434 in a predetermined round at all. In a new game in which a player obtains setting suggestion information by performing a launch operation that loses the opportunity to acquire some prize balls, such as generating a start winning of the middle starting winning device 2431 by performing a left-handed game method in Sex may be added.

  Therefore, in the setting suggestion information related processing S2021 described above, when various predetermined setting suggestion information output conditions are satisfied, the output of setting suggestion information is executed by the processing of S1606.

  The nail state level is information that indicates whether the state of the nail 411 is appropriate or inappropriate for the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100 at a stepwise level. Is greater than or equal to, the nail 411 may be out of the proper state, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player.

  Similarly, even if a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the start winning of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, a new special symbol starting condition. When a situation occurs in which is not established, there is an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol starting prize (that is, a game ball prize winning in the middle starting prize device 2431 or the right starting prize device 2432) such as the state of the nail 411. This may cause disadvantage to the player.

  In response to this, it is determined in the determination process S1601 or the determination process S1603 whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the nail state level or the occurrence interval of the start winning, and the setting suggestion information is determined on the condition that it is determined to be satisfied. Is output, it is possible to indicate to the player that the ball pitching rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of the game balls in the pachinko machine 100 is in a low state. By increasing the material for determining whether to continue, the player can be appropriately determined.

  In addition, the general prize device 2439B includes a game that does not enter the right start prize device 2432 or the upper prize prize device 2433 when a game is performed by a right-handed game method in a special game state, a time-saving game state, or a probable change game state. The ball enters. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general prize device 2439B, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1602, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the determination is made. In this case, the player can enjoy the game ball entering the general prize device 2439B even if the game ball does not enter the target right starting prize device 2432 or the upper winning prize device 2433.

  Receiving the ball overflow signal during the special game state indicates that a certain number or more of game balls have been acquired during the special game state. Therefore, when the ball overflow signal is received during the special game state, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination processing S1605, and the setting suggestion information is output on condition that the condition is satisfied. Setting suggestion information can be given to a player as a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the special symbol related processing S1217, the variable display time (variable time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special). ) Is configured to be selectable in accordance with the currently set game mode.

  Specifically, a game mode predetermined to be settable is pre-assigned to a plurality of types of variable display times that can be selected, and the lottery is selected to determine whether to change the variable display time in accordance with the game mode. In this case, a variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode is selected. Variation patterns of various variation display times that can be selected for a game mode that is settable in advance are stored as a table in the ROM of the main control board 920 in advance.

  It should be noted that the assignment of the variable display time to the game mode that is settable in advance may be configured such that the same variable display time is allocated to two or more game modes, such as for each type of game mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different variable display times are assigned to each of the game modes of each stage that are predetermined as possible.

  Further, the selection of the variation pattern based on the currently set game mode is performed only when the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is a winning. Or a configuration that is performed only when the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is not a winning.

  In the special symbol-related processing S1217, by selecting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display time assigned to the currently set game mode, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display time according to the currently set game mode is performed. Be executed. Thereby, the player can estimate (recognize) the type of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  It should be noted that the assignment of the variable display time to the settable game modes is determined based on the most advantageous game mode among the settable game modes (for example, the third stage probability of each type). Game mode), a long variable display time may be easily selected from various variable display times that can be selected for a game mode that is settable in advance. By increasing the variable display time for the advantageous game mode, the player plays the game while paying attention to the length of the variable display time of the decorative symbol, and the most advantageous game mode is set. Can be expected.

  In addition, a configuration may be such that a longer variable display time is allocated as the advantage of a game mode that is settable in advance is higher. Thereby, the player can estimate the advantage of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed and output. It is possible to suitably recognize the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100, that is, the pitching rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of gaming balls.

  In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display time according to the currently set game mode is selected, the player preferably selects the type of the set game mode according to the length of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Can be recognized.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the arrangement position of some devices in the downflow path on the right side of the game area and a part of specifications in each game state are different from those of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. ing.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment has a setting change function for setting a game mode such as a big hit probability and a probability of continuation of a probability change, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The maximum permissible entry time of the right big winning device 1434 to be opened is configured to be different depending on the game mode changed by the change of the setting of the throwing rate. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 (A) is a front view showing a right portion of the game board 400A in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 20 (B) is a partially enlarged view of the right starting winning device 1432. FIG. 20C is a cross-sectional view of the right starting winning device 1432 taken along the line AA of FIG. 20B.

  FIG. 20 (A) shows a schematic outer shape of a main structure provided in the game area. In FIG. 20 (A) and FIG. 20 (B), the right starting winning device 1432 and the right big winning device 1434 are both shown as schematic cross-sectional views in which a front plate portion is cut off, and the cross-sectional views are shown. , The hatching of the cross section is omitted. In FIG. 20B, a projection 1538 provided on the front wall surface of the spherical passage portion 1611 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 20A, the projections 1537 and 1538 are shown. Omitted.

  Also, in FIG. 20A, the state in which both the entry control mechanism 1452 and the entry control mechanism 1454 are in the entry prohibition position is illustrated by a solid line, while in FIG. 20B, the entry control mechanism 1452 is used. The state of the allowable posture is shown by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 20 (A) and FIG. 20 (B), for reference, a part of a game ball flowing down the game board 400A is illustrated, and a part of a flow path of the game ball is indicated by an arrow. . In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 20C, hatching of the cross section is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (A), the gaming board 400 </ b> A has a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment, in which a right starting winning device 1432 disposed below the starting device 436 and a left starting winning device 1432 are disposed on the left side relative to the right starting winning device 1432. And a right large winning device 1434 arranged.

  The right starting winning device 1432 is a winning device similar to the right starting winning device 2432 and functions as a starting winning device according to the second special symbol. The right starting winning device 1432 is provided at a position where a game ball passing through the starting device 436 can reach. I have. The right starting winning device 1432 is configured to change the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside thereof by transitioning between the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibited posture, and a right entry restriction that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452. An entry control solenoid (not shown), which is the same solenoid as the solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 16), is provided. Hereinafter, the entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1452 will be described as an “entry control solenoid 1462” for convenience.

  The entry control mechanism 1452 includes a movable piece driven by the entry control solenoid 1462. When the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibited position, the movable piece is arranged to protrude forward so as to close the entrance (winning opening) of the right starting winning device 1432, and the entry control mechanism 1452 is set in the entry permission position. In the case of, the movable piece is arranged to be immersed backward so as to open the entrance (winning opening) of the right starting winning device 1432.

  As a result, when the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 1432, but when the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowed position, the game ball is set to the right start entry. The device 1432 can be entered. The entry control mechanism 1452 is provided with a predetermined number of times according to the drive by the entry control solenoid 1462 when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a normal symbol lottery based on detection by the start switch 446. Then, it shifts to the approach allowable posture only for a predetermined time. In addition, when the entry control mechanism 1452 shifts to the entry permission position based on winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, a specified number (for example, 10) allowed for one entry permission position in the entry control mechanism 1452. When the game ball is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum permissible time, and the number of transitions to the entry permissible posture is Even if the predetermined number of times has not been reached, the operation of the right starting winning device 2432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  When the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper surface of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 constitutes a downwardly sloping downward slope as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, it is preferable that the inclination of the descending inclined surface descending to the left is set to a gentle inclination angle of about 10 degrees or less with respect to a horizontal plane, and is set to, for example, 5 degrees.

  The right start winning device 1432 opens upward with respect to the upstream portion of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 that is in the entry prohibited position, and enters from the entrance of the right start winning device 1432. 1532A through which the dropped game ball can pass, and the upper part of the descending inclined surface, which is open to the downstream side of the first descending passage 1532A, enters from the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432. And a second downflow passage portion 1532B through which a game ball can pass.

  The first downstream passage portion 1532A is configured as a passage having a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one. A right start winning switch 1442A, similar to the right start winning switch 2442, is provided downstream of the first downstream passage portion 1532A as a detection unit that can detect a game ball passing through the first downstream passage portion 1532A. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the right start winning switch 1442A is, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 20 (B), substantially at the center of the passage of the game ball in the right start winning switch 1442B, and the starting device 436. Are arranged so that the substantially center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the above-described manner substantially coincides with the top view.

  In addition, the right start winning switch 1442A is positioned at the intersection with the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A on a straight line extending in the vertical direction through substantially the center of the path through which the game ball passes in the right start winning switch 1442B, and the entry prohibited posture. A distance L1 (see FIG. 20 (B)) between the lower surface and the intersection with the lower surface of the downwardly inclined surface formed by the movable piece of a certain entry restriction mechanism 1452 is disposed at a position where the length is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball. Is done. In other words, the first descending passage portion 1532A is in contact with the lower surface of the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452, which is in the entry-prohibited position, on a straight line extending in the vertical direction through substantially the center of the passage of the game ball in the right start winning switch 1442B. A distance L1 between the intersection and the intersection with the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A is set to a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

  Note that the right start winning switch 1442B is a game ball whose center is arranged on a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the approximate center of the path through which the game ball passes, and the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 which is in the entry prohibited posture. The distance from the contact point between the game ball in contact with the lower surface (that is, the game ball P) and the lower surface of the movable piece to the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A may be the distance L1.

  Alternatively, a right start winning switch 1442A is obtained from a contact point between the game ball in contact with both the passage wall of the first downflow passage portion 1532A and the lower surface of the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the entry-prohibited position, and the lower surface of the movable piece. The longest distance among the distances to the upper end may be the distance L1.

  The “distance from the upper end of the right-start winning switch 1442A to the upper end of the right-start winning switch 1442A from the lower surface of the descending slope formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the entry-prohibited position” is the right-start winning. The distance from the upper end of the device constituting the switch 1442A to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 may be used. The distance to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of 1452 may be used.

  The “length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball” does not necessarily need to match the diameter of the game ball, and may be one or more times the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable that the length is not more than twice as long as the diameter of the game ball is closer to the right starting winning device 1432 because the approach of the game ball can be quickly detected.

  Further, by disposing the right start winning switch 1442A at a position where the distance L1 is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first downstream passage portion 1532A is within the detection range of the right start winning switch 1442A. Even if the entry restriction mechanism 1452 shifts from the entry permission position to the entry prohibition position immediately after entering the game, contact of the game ball with the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is suppressed. Therefore, a change in the behavior of the game ball due to the contact with the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 can be suppressed, and the game ball already detected by the right start winning switch 1442A is erroneously detected again by the right start winning switch 1442A. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a problem such as occurrence of a problem.

  The position of the right-start winning switch 1442A is the longest distance L1 from the distance from the upper end of the right-start winning switch 1442A to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 that is in the entry-prohibited position. Is not limited to a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and may be a position shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Even in this case, the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning device 1432 can be detected quickly.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (B), the first downflow passage portion 1532A is gradually upstream of the right start winning switch 1442A so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as the passage width approaches the right start winning switch 1442A. It has a section that becomes smaller (hereinafter, this section is also referred to as a “gradual change section”). In the gradual change section, the passage width at the end position of the gradual change section is preferably equal to or greater than the passage width of the right start winning switch 1442A, and is substantially equal to the passage width of the right start winning switch 1442A. Is preferred. Further, the gradual change section may be provided in the entire area on the upstream side of the right start winning switch 1442A or almost in the entire area, or may be provided in a partial area on the upstream side of the right start winning switch 1442A.

  The second downstream passage portion 1532B has an opening serving as an inlet portion thereof wider than the opening portion serving as the inlet portion of the first downstream passage portion 1532A, and is configured to have a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time. The second downflow passage portion 1532B causes the game ball that has entered from the opening to be located downstream (on the left side in the front view of the gaming machine in the present embodiment) of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 on the upstream side. Collected and configured on the downstream side as passages through which game balls collected on the upstream side pass one by one.

  A right-start winning switch as a detecting means that can detect a game ball passing through the second downstream passage portion 1532B downstream of a passage portion in the second downstream passage portion 1532B through which game balls can pass one by one. A right start winning switch 1442B similar to 1442A is provided.

  Regardless of whether the game ball is detected by either the right start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B, a start winning of the second special symbol is generated. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1432 is turned on by the right starting winning switch 1442A or the right starting winning switch 1442B, depending on whether it passes through the first descending passage portion 1532A or the second descending passage portion 1532B. It is detected, and accordingly, the starting winning of the second special symbol occurs.

  The game balls that have entered the first downflow passage 1532A or the second downflow passage 1532B are discharged from the downflow passages 1532A and 1532B after being detected by the right start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B. It is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401.

  Since the opening serving as the entrance portion of the first downstream passage portion 1532A is provided on the upstream side of the opening serving as the entrance portion of the second downstream passage portion 1532B, the game balls passing through the starting device 436 are provided with the entrance restriction mechanism 1452. In the configuration that reaches the upstream side of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece, when the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry permitting posture, the game ball passing through the starting device 436 is mainly transferred to the first downflow passage portion 1532A. You can enter.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the opening serving as the inlet of the first downstream passage portion 1532A is provided almost directly below the starting device 436 as shown in FIG. When the regulation mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture, most of the game balls that have passed through the starting device 436 can enter the first downflow passage portion 1532A.

  When the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper side of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 moves the game ball along the downwardly inclined surface formed by the movable piece as shown in FIG. It functions as a ball passage 1611 that guides the game machine from right to left when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition position and the game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 reaches the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452, the game ball descends. The ball flows down the ball passage 1611 while rolling on the inclined surface. When the game ball flowing down the ball passage 1611 reaches the downstream end of the descending inclined surface, the game ball drops from the downstream end.

  On the other hand, when the entry control mechanism 1452 shifts to the entry permission position while the game ball passes through the ball passage section 1611, the entry control mechanism 1452 is located on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452. Depending on its position, the game ball enters the first downflow passage 1532A or the second downflow passage 1532B, or flows down on the guide portion 1531 extending leftward from the open end of the second downflow passage 1532B. . When the game ball flowing down on the guide section 1531 reaches the downstream end of the guide section 1531, it falls from the downstream end.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20B and 20C, the rear wall surface 1535 and the front wall surface 1536 of the spherical passage portion 1611 respectively have protruding portions 1537 that protrude inward and are continuous in the vertical direction. And a projection 1538 are provided. As shown in FIG. 20C, in the projections 1537 and 1538, when viewed from above, the projection 1538 is arranged between the adjacent projections 1537, and the projection 1537 is arranged between the adjacent projections 1538. Is done.

  Therefore, the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611 travels from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in FIG. 20C) while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the collision with the protrusions 1537 and 1538. . As a result, the traveling speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage 1611 decreases, so that the time during which the game ball stays in the ball passage 1611 (stay time) can be lengthened.

  Thereby, the opening width of the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432 on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the passing direction of the game ball is suppressed, and the right starting winning device 1432 is controlled. It is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball flowing down the descending inclined surface can enter the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432 at the timing when the entry regulating mechanism 1452 shifts to the next entry allowable posture, while being configured to be small. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, the projection 1537A located on the most upstream side of the projections 1537 and 1538 is provided at a position not overlapping with the opening of the first downstream passage portion 1532A in a top view. Therefore, the game ball passing through the starting device 436 and heading for the right starting winning device 1432 can enter the first downflow passage portion 1532A before the meandering by the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is started.

  In addition, the upper surface of the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes upward from the upper surface or a concave portion that is depressed downward in the same arrangement as the protruding portions 1537 and 1538, thereby passing the ball passage portion 1611. The configuration may be such that the game balls meander and the stay time is lengthened.

  The right large prize device 1434 is a prize device that functions as a large prize device similar to the lower large prize device 2434. The right large prize device 1434 is a descending inclined surface formed by a movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452, or each downstream end of the guiding portion 1531. It is provided at a position where a game ball dropped from the robot can be reached. The right large prize device 1434 includes an entry control mechanism 1454 that controls entry of a game ball into the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permission position and an entry prohibition position, and a lower entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1454. 2464 (see FIG. 16) and the same access control solenoid (not shown). Hereinafter, the entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1454 will be described as an “entry control solenoid 1464” for convenience.

  The entry control mechanism 1454 includes a movable piece driven by the entry control solenoid 1464. When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibited position, the movable piece is arranged to protrude forward so as to close the entrance (winning opening) of the right big winning device 1434, and the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable position. In the case of, the movable piece is arranged so as to be immersed rearward so as to open the entrance (winning opening) of the right large winning device 1434. As a result, when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the right large winning device 1434, but when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowed position, the game ball is placed in the right large prize. Device 1434 can be entered.

  The game ball can enter the right big prize device 1434 when the big hit lottery is won. Specifically, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, the state is shifted to the entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time in accordance with the drive of the entry restriction solenoid 1464. Note that, during each approach permitted posture in the right special winning device 1434, when a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls is detected by the special winning switch 1444, or when a predetermined maximum permitted time (for example, When 29.5 seconds have elapsed, the entry control mechanism 1454 shifts to the entry prohibited position. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined entry prohibition time, the entry control mechanism 1454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable attitude, the game ball that has entered the right special winning device 1434 passes through a ball passage formed in the right special winning device 1434, and is located downstream of the ball passage. It is detected by a large winning switch 1444 similar to the lower winning switch 2444 (see FIG. 16) disposed. The game ball that has entered the right special winning device 1434 is detected by the special winning switch 1444, and then guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401.

  When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition position, the upper surface of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1454 forms a downwardly sloping downward slope when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, it is preferable that the inclination of the descending inclined surface descending to the left has a gentle inclination angle of about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane, and is set to, for example, 5 degrees.

  When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper side of the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1454 pushes the game ball along the downwardly inclined surface formed by the movable piece as shown in FIG. It functions as a ball passage 1621 that guides the game machine from right to left when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the downwardly inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 or the game ball dropped from each downstream end of the guide portion 1531 is not included in the entry control mechanism 1454. When the game ball reaches the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball flows down the ball passage portion 1621 while rolling on the descending inclined surface. When the game ball flowing down the ball passage 1621 reaches the downstream end of the ball passage 1621 in the right large winning device 1434, the game ball drops from the end.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a small hit is set in addition to the above-mentioned big hit as a result of the lottery of the unit game according to the second special symbol. When a small hit is won, a different privilege (small hit privilege) from the case of a big hit is given to the player. Note that a special game state in which a privilege of the same size as that of the small hit win may be set as one of the types of special game states that occur when the big win is won.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment having a small hit function, the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting winning switch 1442A or the right starting winning switch 1442B. When a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery based on the entry, the entry control solenoid 1462 is configured to operate. When the value of the winning random number counter related to the second special symbol acquired based on the occurrence of the start winning of the second special symbol is a predetermined small winning value (hereinafter referred to as a small winning value). Will win a small hit. The small hit winning value is set to a value different from the big hit winning value, and is set such that the big hit and the small hit are not simultaneously established in one start winning. In the unit game that has won the small hit, a predetermined small hit symbol is displayed in the special symbol display device 471, 472 out of the symbols different from the big hit symbol (losing symbols displayed when the big hit is not won). Is set as a stop symbol in.

  When the small hit is won, the entry control solenoid 1464 is operated, the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable position, and the right big winning device 1434 is opened. The permissible entry posture of the entry control mechanism 1454 is determined such that a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls is detected by the special winning switch 1444 or a predetermined maximum permissible time (for example, 3 seconds), and is maintained (maintained) until a period of time elapses. After the period is over, the entry control mechanism 1454 returns to the entry prohibition posture. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum permissible entry time of the right large winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, is changed to a game mode in which the setting is changed by changing the throwing rate. It is configured to be different depending on.

  The period during which this approach allowable posture is maintained corresponds to a small hitting game state (small hitting game state). The small hitting game state is started when a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit winning is displayed, and is ended after the entry control solenoid 1464 returns to the entry prohibited position. In the small hitting game state, similarly to the special game state corresponding to the big hit, the execution of the variable display is awaited, and after the small hitting gaming state, the variable display for the next unit game is performed.

  The control of the small hitting game state is performed in the special symbol-related processing S1217 (see FIG. 12). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small hit has been won when the second special symbol has been started, and if the small hit has been won, the entry restricting solenoid 1464 is allowed to enter for the above-described period. Posture, the right big winning device 1434 is opened. Note that it is not always necessary to wait for the fluctuation display during the small hitting game state, and the fluctuation display of the next unit game may be started during the small hitting gaming state.

  The small hit differs from the big hit in that it does not serve as an opportunity to change the game state by one win compared to the big win. When the small hit is won, the game proceeds according to the game state determined in the previous lottery. For example, in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues after the small hitting gaming state, and in the probability changing gaming state, one unit game is executed by the end of the small hitting gaming state, and the remaining unit gaming state The number is reduced by one.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the playability due to the small hit, in the probable change states C to E, which are non-time saving states, a ball that the player can obtain by paying out the game ball. Since the number (hereinafter, also referred to as “the number of acquired balls”) gradually increases and the increase in the number of acquired balls is limited in the probable change states A and B, which are time saving states, the right start winning device 1432 The number of award balls for winning is set to be small. In other words, a large number of game balls will be awarded to the right start winning device 1432 in the probable change states A and B, and the number of award balls is often set to a small number so that the number of obtained balls gradually decreases even in this situation. The number is preferably two or less, for example, one.

  Next, a game in the probable change game state of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probable change game state is internally further classified into five types of internal game states. Hereinafter, each of these five types of internal gaming states is also referred to as “probable state A”, “probable state B”, “probable state C”, “probable state D”, and “probable state E”.

  Each of the probable change state A, the probable change state B, the probable change state C, the probable change state D, and the probable change state E has a higher probability in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) than in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Is common in that a large hit is selected by lottery, but the effect selection mode in the decorative symbol display device 479 is different.

  Specifically, in the probable variation state A, one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns as the variation pattern. In the probable change state B, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns as a fluctuation pattern. In the probability change state C, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns at a rate of 50%, and one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns at a rate of 50%.

  In the probable change state D, as in the probable change state A, a loss pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern, and a determination is made as to whether or not to shift to a specific mode display. In the probable change state E, as in the probable change state A, a loss pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern, and a process for terminating the probable change game state is executed.

  In a predetermined area of the ROM of the main control board 920, a plurality of (for example, 120) transition patterns of five types of internal game states (that is, probable states A to E) in the probable game state are prepared in advance. . Each transition pattern is associated with a value for identifying the individual transition pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pattern number”), and based on a value obtained from a jackpot symbol random number counter based on the occurrence of a start winning prize. The transition pattern is determined by selecting the pattern number.

  The selection of the pattern number is performed based on the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter. For example, when 120 kinds of transition patterns are prepared, when the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter is “240” to “359” when shifting from the special game state to the sure change game state, For each value, "1" to "120" are selected as pattern numbers, respectively, and the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "359". , "1" to "120" are respectively selected as pattern numbers. Thereby, various transition patterns can be evenly selected. In the time-saving game state (the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter is “0” to “239”), a transition pattern different from that in the case of the probable change game state is selected.

  Each of these plural types of transition patterns is set so that the timing at which the internal game state switches in the probable change game state is different. More specifically, each transition pattern has a different timing at which the probable state B and the probable state C among the probable states A to E occur, and the length of the probable state D following the probable state C (that is, the probable state). D occurrence times). When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the main control board 920 determines one transition pattern from a plurality of types of transition patterns prepared in advance, and advances the game according to the determined transition pattern.

  Further, each transition pattern includes a number of executions of a unit game in which a change in the reach loss pattern occurs deterministically (hereinafter, also referred to as a “fixed reach generation unit game”) and a unit game in which the change in the reach loss pattern occurs selectively ( In the following, the combination with the number of executions of “lottery reach generation unit game”) is configured to be different. That is, for each transition pattern, the number of remaining unit games for designating the confirmed reach generation unit game (hereinafter, also referred to as “the number of remaining reach generation unit games”) and the lottery reach generation unit game are designated. Of the remaining unit game numbers (also referred to as “lottery reach occurrence remaining unit game number” in the figure) are defined as different combinations.

  Note that, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the combination of the determined reach occurrence remaining unit game number and the lottery reach occurrence remaining unit game number in each transition pattern is the determined reach occurrence remaining unit game number and the lottery reach occurrence remaining unit game. The sum of the numbers is set so as to be a predetermined number (100 in the present embodiment) predetermined as the basic number of times of execution of the certain-variable game state.

  In the probable change game state, according to the determined transition pattern, the internal game state in the probable change game state is each unit game from the first unit game to the unit game immediately before the confirmed reach unit game. In, the main control board 920 executes control according to the certainty change state A, and at the time of executing the fixed reach occurrence unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the certainty change state B.

  Next, in each unit game from the unit game one round after the confirmed reach unit game to the unit game immediately before the lottery reach unit game, the main control board 920 again The main control board 920 executes the control according to the probability change state C at the time of executing the control according to the probability change state A and executing the lottery reach generation unit game.

  Next, from the unit game one time after the lottery reach generation unit game, the final round (the 100th round in the present embodiment) at a predetermined number of predetermined times as the basic number of times of execution of the certain-variable game state. In each unit game up to the unit game one time before the unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state D, and in the last unit game, the main control board 920 The control according to the state E is executed.

  Even if the last unit game is executed, if the jackpot is not won in the unit game jackpot lottery related to the special symbol, the lottery reach generating unit game is executed every time a start winning is generated. In the lottery reach generation unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state D.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured to switch between the time saving state and the non-time saving state according to the type of the probable change state (probable change states A to E) in the probable change game state. Specifically, the time saving state is set in the probable state A and the probable state B, and the non-time saving state is set in the probable state C, the probable state D, and the probable state B. Although the details will be described later, the configuration is switched between the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state according to the type of the probable change state. Is difficult to enter the right-large winning device 1434, and in the probability change states C to E, it is possible to generate a state in which a game ball can easily enter the right large-gain device 1434 by winning a small hit.

  Next, the specifications regarding the ordinary symbols in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is preferable to set the specifications relating to the ordinary symbols as follows. First, it is preferable that the time period of the normal symbol fluctuation display is set to a short time in both the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state, and is preferably set to approximately 1.0 second or less. It is preferable to set the time to 5 seconds or less. For example, the time is set to about 0.3 seconds in the non-time saving state and to about 0.2 seconds in the time saving state. The distance between the starting device 436 and the right starting winning device 1432 is determined according to the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  The time for opening the right starting prize device 1432 when the normal symbol lottery is won (that is, the time for the entry control mechanism 1454 to take the entry allowable position) is the firing time interval (approximately 0. 6 seconds), and is preferably set to open once in about 0.5 seconds, for example. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the time is set to be sufficiently longer than the firing time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) of the game ball, for example, three times in succession for approximately 1.8 seconds. It is set to open.

  When the right start winning device 1432 is opened a plurality of times in the time-saving state, the interval time provided between each opening (that is, the time during which the entry control mechanism 1454 takes the entry-prohibited position) is set at the time when the entry control mechanism 1454 takes the entry-prohibited position. The game ball that has reached the entrance portion of the right starting winning device 1432 at a certain timing does not flow downstream from the entrance portion while the entry prohibition position is maintained, and the entry restriction mechanism 1454 sets the next entry permission position. In such a case, it is configured to easily enter the right starting winning device 1432 when it becomes. As a result, in the right starting winning device 1432, in the time-saving state, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture such that an entry allowable time of approximately 5.4 seconds corresponding to three times 1.8 seconds is generated.

  The interval time is preferably set to a time sufficiently shorter than the firing time interval of the game balls, and is preferably set to substantially half or less, for example, may be set to approximately 0.2 seconds. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the posture is instantaneously switched to the no-entry posture in about 0.1 second or less. By setting the interval time to be sufficiently shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the game ball is moved to the right starting prize device 1432 during the period when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture (that is, during the interval time). It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the downstream side beyond the inlet portion.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in which the specifications relating to the ordinary symbols are configured as described above, the game balls that flow down on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 by being fired by the right-handed gaming technique when in the time saving state. Most can hardly flow down the downstream side of the right starting prize device 1432, and most can enter the right starting prize device 1432.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the downward slope of the downward slope formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452 is a gentle slope (for example, about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane). (Inclination angle), and the projections 1537 and 1538 are provided in the ball passage 1611 to reduce the advancing speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage 1611. It is possible to more suitably cause the game ball flowing down the right side with respect to the central structure 420 to enter the right starting winning device 1432.

  It should be noted that the specification of the ordinary symbols and the structure of the projections 1537 and 1538 are set so that approximately 90% or more of the game balls flowing down the right side with respect to the central structure 420 enter the right starting winning device 1432 in the time saving state. It is preferable that the probability of entry into the right starting winning device 1432 be approximately 95% or more.

  Here, details of the contents of the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100. In FIG. 21, illustration of the time reduction game state is omitted.

  When the game is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100, first, as shown in FIG. 21, the game is started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the start winning, and the game is executed in expectation of the jackpot.

  When the right of the unit game is generated by the start winning, the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed and fixed and stopped, and the big hit is won in the unit game jackpot lottery related to the special symbol. When the game is won, the game state shifts to the special game state. Whether or not a big hit is won in the big hit lottery is determined in a special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) for controlling a unit game relating to the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when a large hit is not won in the jackpot lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol but a small hit is won in the small hit lottery, the big winning device (specifically, the right big winning device 1434 and the lower big winning device 2434). ) Is operated a predetermined number of times (specifically, once) at a predetermined allowable time for entry. The determination as to whether or not a small hit has been won in the big hit lottery and the operation control of the big winning device are executed in a special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12).

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability is set to approximately 1/1 regardless of the gaming state, and is activated when the small hit is won. The allowable entry time of the special winning device is set to 3 seconds or 5 seconds according to the stage set by changing the throwing rate (changing the setting of the game mode) by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. ing.

  In the special game state, for example, the large prize device (specifically, the right large prize device 1434 and the lower large prize device 2434) is operated for a predetermined number of times (specifically, 6 or 16 times) for approximately 30 seconds. Be executed. When the type of the big hit selected in the normal game state or the probable change game state is the normal big hit, the game shifts to the normal game state via the time-saving game state. The determination of the type of the big hit is executed based on the big hit symbol random number acquired in the special symbol related processing S1217 (see FIG. 12) when the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the types of big hits, a normal big hit that shifts to a normal game state via a time-saving game state after the end of the special game state, and a positive change game state after the end of the special game state And a probable big hit that shifts to a normal game state via the game.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the probability that the normal big hit is selected and the probability that the probable big hit is selected when the big hit is won in the unit game big hit lottery related to the special symbol is determined by the back setting switch 905 and It is configured differently according to the stage set by changing the setting of the throwing rate by operating the initialization switch 907. For example, in the case of the middle type, when the big hit is won in the big hit lottery of the unit game relating to the special symbol Usually, the probability that a big hit is selected is set to approximately 、, and the probability that a probable variable hit is selected is also set to approximately ２.

  On the other hand, when the type of the big hit selected in the normal game state or the probable changing game state is the probable big hit, the remaining unit game number corresponding to the number of executions of the probable changing game state is set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a number (specifically, 100) predetermined as a basic number of times of execution of the certain-variable gaming state is set as the remaining unit number of games. Further, information corresponding to the probable change game state is stored in a game state storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) for storing the game state, and a lottery condition relating to a special symbol is set according to the information, and a normal symbol related process S1218 is performed. The conditions of the ordinary symbol lottery in (see FIG. 12) and the transition time of the right starting winning device 1432 to the entry allowable posture are also controlled in accordance with the information stored in the gaming state storage unit.

  In the probable change game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the start prize (mainly the start prize according to the second special symbol) and the game is executed. Specifically, when the right of the unit game is generated by the winning start, the special symbol (mainly, the second special symbol) is fluctuated and confirmed and stopped, and when the lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol is won, the special game is won. The gaming state shifts to the state.

  Each time the special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped, if the number of remaining unit games is “0” or more, the number of remaining unit games is decremented by one. When a big hit is won in the unit game big hit lottery relating to the special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the variable display of the special symbol is fixed and stopped. On the other hand, when a big hit is not won in the big hit lottery of the unit game relating to the special symbol, and the small hit is won in the small hit lottery, the big prize winning device (specific In this case, the right large prize device 1434 and the lower large prize device 2434 are operated a predetermined number of times (specifically, once) with a predetermined allowable time.

  Next, specific specifications of the game in each game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram comparing the specifications of the game in each game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the unit game by the first special symbol by the left-handed game technique and the variation display of the unit game by the second special symbol by the right-hand game technique are simultaneously executed in parallel. When one of the variable displays is won, the other variable display is stopped at a non-winning (losing) symbol, and a transition is made to a special game state related to the winning of the one variable display.

  In FIG. 22, the selection frequency of the variation time of the second special symbol in the case where a big hit is not won (big hit non-winning) is set to “◎”, “○” in descending order of frequency in accordance with each game state. , “Δ”, and “−”.

  In the normal game state, the player is allowed to play a game by the left-handed game technique, and in the right-handed game technique, a long time (hereinafter, “long time 2”) that is continued for 10 minutes or more so that the game does not progress. In this embodiment, a fluctuation time of 1200 to 1800 seconds is selected. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, the player plays the game by the left-handed gaming technique and executes the game with the aim of winning the lottery according to the first special symbol.

  In the probable change game state, the fluctuating time selected by the above-described five probable states A to E is different, and in the probable state A and the probable state D, the fluctuating display in a short time (about 0.5 seconds) occupies most. The other variable time is set so as not to be executed or to be hardly executed except for the case of winning the big hit (for example, less than 1%). In the probable change states B and E, a fluctuating display with a fluctuating time of 60 seconds to 90 seconds (hereinafter also referred to as “long time 1”) longer than the probable change states A and D is easily selected. Here, in the probable change state B, it is easy to perform a loss-reach effect accompanied by the appearance of a specific character, and in the probable change state E, an end effect accompanied by a display or sound that informs the player of the end of the probable change state is performed. You. In the probable change state C, the short-time fluctuation display and the long-time fluctuation display 1 are executed at substantially the same ratio.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the time saving state is set in the probable state A and the probable state B, and the non-time saving state is set in the probable state C, the probable state D, and the probable state B. It is configured. In addition, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the time to open the right starting winning device 1432 (permissible entry time) is, as described above, in the non-working time state, one time in approximately 0.5 seconds. , And in the time saving state, it is set to be opened three times continuously in a time of about 1.8 seconds.

  As for the jackpot probability, the normal game state is set to a low probability and the probability change state is set to a higher probability than the normal game state. As the jackpot bonus, in the normal gaming state, a long time period in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the right big winning device 1434 or the lower big winning device 2434 over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds or 16 rounds). For example, approximately 30 seconds), the approach permitting postures of the entry control mechanisms 1454 and 2454 corresponding to the open state continue, and in the probable change state, the setting is more advantageous than the normal game state and a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) For a long period of time.

  The small hit probability is constant irrespective of the gaming state, and is won with a probability of about 1/1 (that is, about 100% of the case where the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is not won). The small hit bonus is set to a fixed privilege in both the normal gaming state and the probable change state, and an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the right big winning device 1434 occurs for a predetermined open time.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum allowable time specified for the right big prize device 1434 that is opened as a small hit privilege is determined by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. The time is set according to the stage set by the change of the setting of the rate (change of the setting of the game mode).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, by changing the setting of the throwing rate, the first hit probability is significantly low, but the probability of change in probability is a top-type game mode. And three types of game modes having different initial hit probabilities, and three types of game modes of a middle type in which the initial hit probability is medium and the probability change continuation rate is also medium, and the initial hit probability is different. A configuration in which one of nine types of game modes including three types of game modes, which are bottom type game modes in which the initial hit probability is significantly low but the probability of change in probability is significantly high, and in which the initial hit probability is different, can be selected. Is done.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment having such a configuration, the maximum permissible entry time of the right large prize device 1434 that is opened as a small hit privilege is set to one of the six types of game modes of the top type or the middle type. In this case, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set, and when any of the three types of game modes of the bottom type is set, the second predetermined time (which is longer than the first predetermined time) is set. For example, 5 seconds).

  Next, a description will be given of the playability of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment by small hits. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed in the probable change states A and B, which are time saving states, in the probable play state in which a game is played by the right-handed play technique, as the playability by small hits (or , The number of acquired balls gradually decreases), and in the probable change state C, the probable change state D, and the probable change state E which are non-time saving states, the number of obtained balls is set to gradually increase. The “acquired number of balls” is the number of balls that can be obtained by the player by paying out the game balls, and the number of balls shot into the game area from the number of awarded balls paid out when the game balls are won by the winning device. The number of spheres minus the number.

  Specifically, in the probability-changing states A and B, which are the time saving states, the game ball easily enters the right starting winning device 2432 as compared with the normal game state. Therefore, in each of the unit games in the probability change states A and B, most of the game balls fired by the right-handed game technique enter (win) the right starting winning device 2432, and thus the acquired balls are obtained in the unit game. The numbers rarely increase or gradually decrease.

  On the other hand, in the probable change states C to E, which are non-time saving states, game balls are more likely to enter the right big winning device 1434 than in the normal game state. Therefore, in each unit game in the probable change states C to E, the game ball flows down the downstream (lower left side) from the right starting winning device 1432 through the ball passage portion 1611 and the game ball enters the right big winning device 1434. (Winning), the number of acquired balls in the unit game gradually increases.

  As described above, each transition pattern includes a plurality of unit games in the probable state A, one unit game in the probable state B, a plurality of unit games in the probable state A, and one unit game in the probable state C. A unit game, a plurality of unit games in the probability change state D, and a single unit game in the probability change state E appear in this order. Accordingly, the number of times of the probable change states (probably variable game states A and B), which are the time saving states constituting the first half of each transition pattern, and the number of the probable change states (probable change game states C to E) which are the non-time saving states which form the latter half of each transition pattern. In accordance with the combination with the number of times, the number of acquired balls in the probable change game state can be significantly changed for each transition pattern. This makes it possible to provide the player with various game properties based on the determined difference in the transition pattern.

  Here, during the opening period of the right big prize device 1434 due to one small win, if a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prizes allowed to win in the opening period averagely occurs, The number of game balls given to a player as a bonus of payout by small hits win (hereinafter also referred to as “payout award for one small hit”) is determined by the number of game balls to the right big prize device 1434 with respect to the predetermined number. This is a number (for example, 5 × 13 = 65) multiplied by the number of prize balls (for example, 13) paid out by one winning. In this case, the number of acquired balls is approximately 6 obtained by adding the time for the variable display and the time for opening the right big prize device 1434 from the number of game balls given to the player as a payout privilege for one small hit. A value obtained by subtracting the number of shot spheres of approximately 10 shots per second (for example, 65−10 = 55) is obtained.

  However, the number of game balls that win the right large prize device 1434 in one small hit prize is not always a fixed number, and, for example, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 of the right large prize device 1434 becomes the entry allowable posture. Later, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls permitted to be won does not win, the entry control mechanism 1454 may shift to the entry-prohibited position due to the passage of the allowed time, or the predetermined number may be set. There is a possibility that a number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number may be won between the time when the entry control mechanism 1454 shifts to the entry-prohibited position after the winning of the game is detected, and the fluctuation may occur. However, in the following description, the number of game balls to be awarded to the right big prize device 1434 in one small hit prize will be simply described as a fixed number (for example, five).

  The number of balls obtained as a payout bonus for one small hit and the number of balls obtained in one special game state can be adjusted by the structure of the right big winning device 1434, the shape of the path along which the game ball flows, and the like. It is. Therefore, by actually measuring the number of obtained balls, the shape of the structural portion, the arrangement position of the switch, the duration of the approach allowable posture, the number of winnings for one small hit winning, etc. are adjusted so as to match the design value. It can be adjusted by changing.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the increase in the number of obtained balls is limited in the probable states A and B, and the number of obtained balls is gradually increased in the probable states C to E. The number of game balls that can be acquired as a privilege for a small hit in one probable game state is the number of game balls that can be acquired as a payout privilege for one small hit, and the number of game balls in the probable state C to E included in the selected transition pattern. It is the number obtained by multiplying the number of unit games.

  Therefore, for example, when the number of unit games in the probability change states C to E included in the transition pattern is 31, when the unit game in the probability change state E ends (that is, the basic execution number of the probability change game state is set in advance) At the time when the predetermined number of unit games is completed), the player, in the probable change game state, obtains 31 units for the number of obtained balls (for example, 55) as a payout privilege for one small hit. The number of game balls obtained by multiplying the number of games (for example, 55 × 31 = about 1700) can be obtained.

  On the other hand, the number of obtained balls in one special game state is a number according to the continuous round determined based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter as the type of the special game state. In the special game state, the number of game balls basically paid out after the elapse of one round is determined as the number of game balls that are defined as a condition for the entry control mechanism 1454 to shift from the entry allowed position to the entry prohibited position in one round. The number (for example, eight) is multiplied by the number of prize balls (for example, thirteen) paid out by one prize to the right big prize device 1434 (for example, 104).

  However, the number of obtained balls in one special game state is restricted even if the number of winning balls of the game ball specified as a condition for the entry control mechanism 1454 to shift from the entry permitted position to the entry prohibited position has been reached. Immediately before the mechanism 1454 shifts to the entry-prohibited position, a round in which more game balls are paid out due to a game ball winning in the right big prize device 1434 occurs, and the number of obtained balls is not always constant. The number of acquired balls in one special game state is set to, for example, approximately 500 in the case of winning six rounds, and approximately 1500 in the case of winning 16 rounds, which is larger than in the case of six rounds.

  Therefore, when the internal game state transition pattern in the probable change game state is the above-described transition pattern in which the number of unit games in the probable change states C to E is 31, the payout privilege for the small hit in the probable change game state is given. The number of acquired balls of about 1700 is larger than the number of acquired balls in the special game state of 16 rounds.

  As described above, even if the player does not win a jackpot in the probability change game state, the probability change states C to E executed after a certain number of unit games (that is, the unit games in the probability change states A and B) are executed. In the unit game, a bonus for a small hit can be obtained. Therefore, the player is not limited to the occurrence of the special game state, and the small hitting win continues until the time when the number of acquired balls starts to increase in the probability change game state thereafter (that is, the start of the unit game in the probability change state C). Playing with expectation.

  In addition, for example, when the number of unit games in the probability change states C to E included in the transition pattern is 67, which is more than the above-described 31 times, the game is executed at the time when the unit game in the probability change state E ends. The player multiplies the number of obtained balls (for example, 55) as a payout bonus for one small hit by the number of unit games of 67 times (for example, 55 × 67 = approximately 3700) in the probable change game state. Game balls. On the other hand, if the number of unit games in the probable state C to E included in the transition pattern is twelve, which is less than the number of 31 exemplified above, at the time when the unit game in the probable state E is completed, the player In the probable change game state, the number of games obtained by multiplying the number of obtained balls (for example, 55) as a payout privilege for one small hit by the number of 12 unit games (for example, 55 × 12 = approximately 660 games) You can get a ball. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to add a playability in which the number of acquired balls in the certain-variable game state fluctuates according to the selected transition pattern.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the last unit game in a predetermined number of times predetermined as the basic number of times of execution of the certain-variable gaming state is executed, the unit game according to the special symbol is executed. If the jackpot is not won in the jackpot lottery, the unit game in the probable state D is executed each time a start winning is generated. Therefore, the player can play the unit games in the probable states A and B. After the completion of the game, the number of obtained balls can be increased as long as the small hits are won.

  Here, the maximum allowable time of the right big prize winning device 1434 which is released as the small hit privilege by the small hit winning is set to a time shorter than the allowable time (approximately 5.4 seconds) in the normal symbol winning in the time saving state. Preferably. With this setting, in a time-saving state, when the entry restriction mechanism 1454 of the right start winning device 1432 takes the entry allowable posture after winning the lottery relating to the normal symbol, the maximum entry allowance of the right large winning device 1434 by the small hit winning is achieved. Over a certain period of time, the game ball, including the subsequent game ball, can be prevented from reaching the side of the right big winning device 1434 located downstream of the right starting winning device 1432.

  As a result, it is possible to limit the increase in the number of acquired balls in the probable change states A and B, which are the time saving states, and to increase the number of obtained balls in the probable change states C to E corresponding to the non-time saving state. In (2), the situation of the number of acquired balls can be changed according to the length of the period until the number of acquired balls starts to increase (that is, the period from the first unit game to the start of the unit game in the probability change state C). . Therefore, the number of acquired balls can be made significantly different according to the pattern selected as the transition pattern, thereby providing the player with various game characteristics due to the difference in the transition pattern.

  Also, the allowable entry time (for example, approximately 5.4 seconds) in the normal symbol winning in the time saving state is a time (for example, approximately 0) until the game ball passing through the starting device 436 reaches the right starting winning device 1432. .3 seconds), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probability change state A (for example, approximately 0.5 seconds), and the maximum allowable time (for example, approximately 3 seconds) in the small hit of the right large winning device 1434. It is more preferable to set the time to be longer than the added time, and thereby, it is possible to make the playability in which the number of game balls obtained by the player is increased by successive small hits more remarkable.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the probable change game state is started, the unit games in the probable change states A and B, which are the time saving states, are executed a predetermined number of times defined by the transition pattern. After that, since the unit games in the probable state C to E corresponding to the non-time saving state are configured to be executed, after the unit game in the probable state A, B is completed, it is obtained as long as the small hitting win continues. The number of balls can be increased.

  Here, a specific example of each stage of the change of the throwing rate (change of the setting of the game mode) which can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 will be described.

  The initial hit probability in the top type (ie, the big hit probability in the low probability) is set to be approximately 1/300 which is the same in all of the first to third tier probabilities, and the initial hit probability in the middle type is approximately 1 / 200, the initial hit probability in the bottom type is set to approximately 1/100. In addition, it is not necessary to set the big hit probability at the time of low probability differently for the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, and to include the same probability for any two or three or more types. May be set, or a setting in which the jackpot probability is different in any two or three or more stages from the first stage to the third stage in each type may be included.

  The jackpot probability at the time of high probability in the top type (the jackpot probability in the probable changing game state) is approximately 1/30 in the first stage probability, approximately 1/40 in the second stage probability, and approximately 1 in the third stage probability. / 50, the jackpot probability at the high probability in the middle type is approximately 1/20 in the first-order probability, approximately 1/25 in the second-stage probability, and approximately 1/30 in the third-stage probability. The big hit probability at the time of the high probability in the bottom type is approximately 1/10 in the first-order probability, approximately 1/14 in the second-stage probability, and approximately 1/18 in the third-stage probability. .

  The probability (probability of continuation of probability) that the probability change jackpot is selected is about 2/3 (about 66%) in the top type, about 1/2 (about 50%) in the middle type, and about 1/3 in the bottom type. (Approximately 33%) is set. Note that it is not necessary to set the probability variation continuation rate differently for the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, but to set the same probability for any two or three or more types. The setting may be such that the probable continuation rate is different in any two or three or more stages from the first stage to the third stage in each type.

  Here, the probability of ending the probability variation big hit (probability variation termination rate) when winning the jackpot lottery in the probability variation game state can be expressed by a value obtained by subtracting the probability variation continuation rate from one. In addition, when a start winning prize related to a special symbol occurs in the probable changing game state, the probability that the probable changing game state ends by the lottery related to the special symbol and the transition to the normal gaming state is changed to the jackpot probability at the time of the high probability and the probability of the probability of change Is equal to the value (probability) multiplied by. Hereinafter, this probability is also referred to as a probability change game end probability.

  The probability-change game end probability is approximately 1/90, which is a value obtained by multiplying the jackpot probability at the time of high probability (approximately 1/30) by the probability-change end ratio (approximately 1/3) in the top type first-stage probability. . By the same calculation, the probability-change game end probability in the top type is set to approximately 1/120 in the second stage probability and approximately 1/150 in the third stage probability. The probable variable game end probability in the middle type is set to approximately 1/40 in the first floor probability, approximately 1/50 in the second stage probability, and approximately 1/60 in the third stage probability. The probability change game end probability in the bottom type is set to approximately 1/15 in the first floor probability, approximately 1/21 in the second stage probability, and approximately 1/27 in the third stage probability. The probability-change game end probability corresponds to the expected value of the number of times a unit game continues and a small hit occurs in the probability-change game state (ie, the number of occurrences of start winning), and the lower the probability-change game end probability is, the lower the probability change game state is. Tends to increase the number of unit games in.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the middle-type game machine having the probability-change game termination probability in the range of 1/40 to 1/80 has the probability change game termination probability in the range of 1/20 to 1/40. Since the number of unit games in the probable change game state is more likely to be increased than in the bottom type, it is easy to benefit from the game ball acquisition by the small hit privilege in the probable change game state. Similarly, the top type having the probability-change game termination probability in the range of 1/60 to 1/140 is more likely to be the unit game in the probability change game state than the middle type having the probability change game termination probability in the range of 1/20 to 1/40. Is likely to increase, so that it is easy to receive the benefit of game ball acquisition due to the small hit bonus in the probable game state.

  In each type, the setting of the second-stage probability is more likely to benefit from the game ball acquisition by the small hit bonus by setting the second-stage probability than the first-stage probability. The setting of the third tier probability is more likely to increase the number of unit games in the probable change game state than the probability.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, according to each stage of the change of the throwing rate that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the small hit is won as the surely changing game state, The main control board 920 controls the number of times (the expected value of the number of times) that the entry restriction mechanism 1454 of the right big prize device 1434 operates continuously over a plurality of unit games, and thereby the game ball by the small hit privilege The structure is different in the easiness of receiving the benefits. Therefore, it is possible to add a game property of estimating the setting based on the number of unit games in the certain-variable game state.

  In addition, the probability change game state may be set to be continued until the next big hit occurs, or when the unit game is executed after a predetermined upper limit (for example, 200 times) start winning has occurred, the big hit is won. It is also possible to set to end the probable change game state without it, and to set this upper limit number differently for each type, for example, 300 times for the top type, 200 times for the middle type, and 150 times for the bottom type. .

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the right starting winning device 1432 includes a plurality of flowing passage portions 1532A and 1532B as flowing passage portions through which game balls entering from the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432 can pass. Right downstream winning switches 1442A and 1442B capable of detecting game balls passing through the downstream passage portions 1532A and 1532B are provided downstream of the downstream passage portions 1532A and 1532B. Accordingly, it is possible to detect a game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 1432 by using the plurality of right-start winning switches 1442A and 1442B, so that a game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 1432 can be efficiently detected. Thus, the time from when the game ball enters the right starting winning device 1432 to when it is detected by the right starting winning switches 1442A and 1442B can be suitably suppressed.

  Of the plurality of downflow passage portions 1532A and 1532B, the first downflow passage portion 1532A has an opening serving as an inlet portion provided upstream of the opening serving as the inlet portion of the second downflow passage portion 1532B, and thus the start-up operation is started. In a configuration in which the game ball that has passed through the device 436 reaches the upstream side of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 1452, the game that has passed through the starter 436 when the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry permitting posture. The ball can mainly enter the first downstream passage portion 1532A.

  Here, in a configuration in which a game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 can mainly enter the first downflow passage portion 1532A, the first downflow passage portion 1532A is a movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 that is in an entry prohibited posture. From the lower surface, the longest distance L1 among the distances at the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A is configured to have a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball that has entered the first downflow passage portion 1532A is The time required for detection by the start winning switch 1442A can be suppressed to a short time. In addition, even when the distance L1 is configured to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, similarly to the case where the distance L1 is configured to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first downflow passage portion 1532A is used. However, the time required for detection by the right start winning switch 1442A can be suppressed to a short time.

  Further, since the first downflow passage portion 1532A is configured to have a passage width that allows the game balls to enter one by one, when the game balls flow down the first downflow passage portion 1532A, the game balls are moved in the downflow direction. Swaying in the cross direction can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first downflow passage portion 1532A can smoothly flow down the first downflow passage portion 1532A, and at this point as well, after entering the first downflow passage portion 1532A, the right start winning switch 1442A. The time required for detection can be reduced to a short time.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the last number of the game balls that is the specified number (for example, five) allowed for one approach allowable posture in the approach control mechanism 1452 is the first downflow passage portion. Since the time required from the entry into the 1532A to the detection by the right start winning switch 1442A can be suitably suppressed, the last game ball having the specified number passes through the entrance of the right start winning device 1432 and becomes the second game ball. The time required from entry into the one downstream passage portion 1532A to the winning by detection by the right starting winning switch 1442A and the switching of the entry control mechanism 1452 to the entry prohibited position can be suitably reduced.

  Thereby, of the game balls flowing down from the upstream side to the right start winning device 1432, the last game ball having the prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture in the entry control mechanism 1452 is the right start win. When the vehicle enters the device 1432 (more specifically, the first downflow passage portion 1532A), the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is switched to the entry prohibition posture early from the entry, so that one time in the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is performed. After the last game ball having the prescribed number allowed for the entry allowable posture enters the right starting prize device 1432, the game balls exceeding the prescribed number enter the right starting prize device 1432 and are prevented from winning. can do.

  In addition, when the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time (approximately 0.5 seconds), whether the player has entered the right starting winning device 1432 in the previous winning in the probable changing game state in which the small hit is continuously won. In some cases, it may not be possible to determine whether or not the player has entered the right starting winning device 1432 in the subsequent winning of a small hit. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the last game ball that reaches the prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture quickly moves the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1432. Since it can be detected by the right start winning switch 1442A, even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time in the gaming state in which the small hit is continuously won, it is possible to easily detect the game ball appropriately. And, by making it possible to easily set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to be short, it is possible to easily suppress the progress of the game ball to the downstream side from the right starting winning device 1432 during the time saving game state, To that extent, the right starting winning device 1432 can be easily reduced in size, and the degree of freedom in arranging game components such as a game area in which a game ball flows down, a winning device, a decorative component, and the like can be increased.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first downstream passage portion 1532A is provided on the upstream side of the right start winning switch 1442A so that the passage width approaches the diameter of the game ball as approaching the right start winning switch 1442A. Is provided with a gradually changing section, so that the game balls flowing down the first downflow passage portion 1532A are rectified in the downflow direction as they proceed down the gradually changing section. Therefore, a game ball flowing down the first downflow passage portion 1532A can smoothly flow down the right start winning switch 1442A located on the downstream side of the gradual change section. It is possible to suppress word detection such as detection of the degree.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control board 920 controls the maximum allowable time of the right big prize winning device 1434, which is opened as a small hit privilege, to be different depending on the type setting. Is done. For example, when one of the six types of game modes of the bottom type or the middle type is set, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set, and one of the three types of game modes of the top type is set. Is set to a second predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined time.

  Here, the top-type game mode has a configuration in which the probability of the initial hit is significantly low but the probability of continuation of change is significantly high, so that it is difficult to obtain the benefit of the game ball acquisition in the special game state. Although it is difficult to win the game, if the game mode is shifted from the normal game state to the probable game state once via the special game state, the probable game state is likely to be continued, and the player can use the right-handed game method in the probable game state. By playing the game, it is easy to receive the benefit of the game ball acquisition by the small hit privilege.

  On the other hand, the bottom-type game mode has a configuration in which the initial hit probability is significantly high but the probability of change in probability is significantly low, so that it is easy to win the big hit lottery in the normal game state, but the transition from the normal game state to the probability change game state is made. Even if it does, it is difficult for the probable game state to be continued and it is easy to return to the normal game state, so the player is likely to benefit from the game ball acquisition by the special game state, but the game ball acquisition by the small hitting bonus in the probable change game state Difficult to benefit.

  When the right special winning device 1434 is opened as a small hit privilege, the player, for example, stops firing game balls and measures the opening period of the right special winning device 1434, so that the maximum permissible entry time is determined. , It is possible to determine whether it is a first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or a second predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined time. Therefore, when the right large prize device 1434 is opened as a small hit privilege, the player determines whether the maximum allowable time is the first predetermined time or the second predetermined time, and determines whether the maximum allowable time is the second predetermined time. It is possible to add a game property for estimating the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100.

  Thereby, for example, the player considers whether the gaming machine he plays is a gaming machine suitable for his / her taste or a different gaming machine, and continues the game with the current gaming machine, or As one of the selection factors such as whether to move to another gaming machine, it is possible to use the estimated current gaming mode, so that it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the gaming mode can be set in multiple stages. it can.

  Here, the maximum allowable time of the right big prize device 1434 as the small hit privilege does not necessarily have to be set to one time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds), and the maximum allowable time is determined by a lottery related to the starting prize. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the time set for two or more different types can be selected. For each type or according to the setting (stage) within the type, the probability that the maximum allowable time is selected is different. The control may be performed by the main control board 920. For example, when any of the three types of game modes of the bottom type is set, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is easily selected (for example, 70%), and the first predetermined time (for example, 70%) is longer than the first predetermined time. 2 The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set to be hard to be selected (for example, 30%), and when any of the top three types of game modes is set, the first predetermined time is hard to be selected. (For example, 30%), the setting is such that the second predetermined time is easily selected (for example, 70%), and for the middle type, both the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time are selected at approximately 50%. It may be. As a result, it is possible to add a gaming ability for estimating a setting based on the selection rate of the maximum allowable time. In this case, as a first predetermined time, when a specified number (for example, 5) of game balls enter, a time (for example, 3 seconds) for shifting to the entry prohibition posture before reaching the maximum entry allowable time or almost simultaneously. ) Is preferably set. If the player continuously fires the game ball, it is difficult or impossible to estimate the setting of the first predetermined time or the second predetermined time. By stopping the firing of the game ball, it is possible for the player to recognize that the second predetermined time has elapsed, and by performing an operation for positive setting discrimination, the player can perform the setting. Can be added.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, when a time-saving state occurs after the end of the special game state, the time-saving state ends when the number of small hits reached (the number of small hits winning) reaches a predetermined number. The configuration is different from the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment is configured as a pachinko machine in which the internal game state changes in the probable change game state, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, and determines when the time reduction state ends in the probable change game state. The display to inform the player is devised. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, FIG. 23 to FIG. 25 are explanatory diagrams relating to the game specifications in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning probability of a special symbol lottery applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 24 is applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a symbol ratio in a special symbol, and an operation mode of a probability change function and a change time shortening function. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of an end condition of the fluctuation time reducing function applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the winning probability of the big hit in the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set to 1/100 in the low probability state and to 1/10 in the high probability state. I have. The winning probability of the small hit is set to 0 for the first special symbol and set to 1/5 for the second special symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the winning probability shown in FIG. 23 is applied, a small hit cannot be generated even if a game ball is caused to enter the middle-start winning device 2431 (see FIG. 14). A small hit can be generated by causing a game ball to enter the right starting winning device 1432 (see FIG. 20) by a right-handed game technique. Note that the winning probability per small hit may be set to a value other than 0 for the first special symbol, or may be the same as the setting for the second special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the big hit symbol in the first special symbol is composed of three types of symbols according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the first special symbol of the present embodiment is a first big hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 1_specific time-saving symbol 1”) in which the game state to be shifted to after the special game state is the probable game state. A second jackpot symbol (hereinafter, "special symbol 1_specified time short") in which the game state to be shifted to after the special game state is the probable change game state and the end condition of the variable time shortening function to be described later is different from the first big hit symbol. 3), and a third big hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 1_normal time saving symbol”) in which the game state shifted to after the special game state is the time saving game state.

  The big hit symbol in the second special symbol is also composed of three types of symbols according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the second special symbol of the present embodiment is a first big hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 2_specific time-saving symbol 1”) in which the gaming state to be shifted to after the special gaming state is the probable changing gaming state. A second big hit symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2_specified time short"), in which the game state to be shifted to after the special game state is the probable changing game state and the end condition of the later-described variable time shortening function is different from the first big hit symbol. 3), and a third big hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 2_normal time saving symbol”) in which the game state shifted after the special game state is the time saving game state.

  Note that the type of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol and the type of the big hit symbol in the second special symbol are not limited to the three types described above, and may be an appropriate number of two or more. Also, the type of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol and the type of the big hit symbol in the second special symbol need not be the same number, and the number of types of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol and the big hit symbol in the second special symbol. And the number of types may be different. Further, at least one of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol or the big hit symbol in the second special symbol may not include a symbol in which the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state after the special gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 24 is applied, the ratio of each big hit symbol in the first special symbol is 40% for the special symbol 1_normal time reduction symbol and the special symbol 1_specific time reduction symbol. The symbol 1 is 30%, and the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 is 30%. The ratio of each big hit symbol in the second special symbol is 40% for the special symbol 2_normal time-saving symbol, 30% for the special symbol 2_specific time-saving symbol 1, and 30% for the special symbol 2_specific time-saving symbol 2. 30%. In addition, each ratio of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol and each ratio of the big hit symbol in the second special symbol are not limited to the above-described ratios, and may be set to appropriate ratios.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, three types of small hit symbols are provided in the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 24 is applied, the ratio of each small hit symbol in the second special symbol is the first small hit symbol (hereinafter, “special figure 2_small hit symbol 1”). ) Is set to 70%, a second small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “special figure 2_small hit symbol 2”) is set to 20%, and a third small hit symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2_small symbol”). Win symbol 3) is 30%.

  In FIG. 24, with respect to the probability variation function and variation time reduction function corresponding to each big hit symbol, a function that operates after the special game state is marked with “○”, and a function that does not operate after the special game state is indicated by “×”. Is attached. Note that the “probability changing function” is a function that sets the winning probability of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to a high probability state, and the “variation time reducing function” is the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. This is a function of setting the variable display time of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol to a time different from the non-time reduction state to bring the same time reduction state as in the third embodiment.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 24, the special figure 1_specific time savings symbol 1, the special figure 1_specific time savings symbol 2, the special figure 2_the specific time savings pattern 1, and the special figure 2_ which shift to the probable changing game state after the special game state. When the specific time-saving symbol 2 is selected, both the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function operate after the special game state. On the other hand, when the special figure 1_normal time saving symbol and the special figure 2_normal time saving symbol which shift to the time saving game state after the special game state are selected, the fluctuation time shortening function is activated after the special game state, but the probability fluctuation is performed. Function does not work.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the probability variation function is activated after the special game state, the probability variation function is operated until the next condition device is activated (until the special game state occurs next). Continued. Therefore, the high probability state generated after the special game state due to the selection of the special figure 1_specific time reduction symbols 1 and 2 or the special figure 2_specific time reduction symbols 1 and 2 continues until the next special game state occurs. I do. The condition device is not a physical device but a conceptual device based on rules for managing general gaming machines. The operation of the condition device is triggered by a winning of a lottery related to a special symbol in the third embodiment. Corresponds to the occurrence of a special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variation time reduction function is activated after the special game state, the variation time reduction function is performed by the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated (the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is executed). Has reached a predetermined number of times, or the number of times a small hit symbol has been formed by one of the three types of small hit symbols has reached a predetermined number of times predetermined for the small hit symbol. To end.

  The number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol, which are the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, are combinations of symbols that will cause the condition device to operate, as shown in FIG. It is determined in advance according to the combination of the type of the (big hit symbol selected by the special symbol lottery) and the gaming state when the condition device is operated (during the special gaming state) based on the combination of the symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol, which are the termination conditions of the variable time shortening function, are the symbols that the condition device will operate. Is stored in the ROM of the main control board 920 in association with the combination of the type of the combination and the game state when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, specifically, when the combination of the symbols for which the condition device is activated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, When the game state at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination is the low probability state and the non-time saving state (that is, the normal game state), the operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 as the end condition of the variable time reduction function The number of times, the number of small hits made by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the number of small hits made by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of small hits made by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 100 times, respectively. 100 times, 100 times, and 100 times.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the internal game state of the probable change game state that has shifted after the special game state changes according to the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 according to the change pattern as in the third embodiment. The internal game is not executed when any one of the preset end conditions of the variable time reduction function is satisfied with respect to the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits established. The state transitions. That is, if the termination condition of the probability variation function is not satisfied and any one of the termination conditions of the variation time reduction function set for a plurality of types is satisfied after the transition to the probable variation game state, The internal game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state while maintaining the probability state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1_specific time-saving design 1, the special figure 2_specific time-saving design 1, the special figure 1_specific time-saving design 2 or the special figure 2_specific time-saving design 2 When the condition device is activated, after the termination of the operation of the condition device (after the end of the special game state), if the termination condition of the probability variation function is not satisfied and the termination condition of the variation time reduction function is satisfied, The internal game state of the probable change game state that has occurred after the end of the special game state transits from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the number of obtained balls when the internal game state is the time reduction state in the probable change game state, Is set to be suppressed (or the number of acquired balls is gradually decreased), and the number of acquired balls is gradually increased in a non-time saving state.

  When the combination of the symbols that the condition device is to operate is the special figure 1_specific time reduction symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time reduction symbol 1, the game state at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is In the case of the low probability state and the time saving state (that is, the time saving game state), the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 serving as the termination condition of the fluctuation time reducing function, The number of occurrences, the number of small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 10, 10, 7, and 3, respectively. .

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the condition device is activated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the high probability state and the non-time saving state, the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, The number of small hits achieved by the FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits formed by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 50 times, 50 times, 10 times, and 5 times, respectively.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the condition device is activated is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1, the game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the high probability state and the time saving state, the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are termination conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of small hits achieved by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the special figure The number of small hits formed by the 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits formed by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0, 0, 0, and 0, respectively.

  Therefore, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 1 is operated in the gaming state in the high probability state and the time saving state, after the operation of the condition device is completed (special When the operation of the condition device is terminated (after the end of the gaming state) (the end of the special gaming state), the variable time reduction function does not function, and accordingly, after the end of the special gaming state, the non-time-saving state is definitely changed. Is started.

  Next, when the combination of the symbols to be operated by the condition device is the special symbol 1_normal time-saving symbol 1 or the special symbol 2_normal time-saving symbol 1, the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is activated. When the game state is the low probability state and the non-time saving state (that is, the normal game state), the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are conditions for terminating the variable time reduction function, the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 The number of small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 50 times, 50 times, 30 times, and 10 times, respectively. It has been.

  Also, when the combination of the symbols that the condition device is to operate is the special symbol 1_normal time-saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time-saving symbol 1, the game at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the low probability state and the time saving state (that is, the time saving game state), the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the conditions for ending the variable time reduction function, and the small number according to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 The number of wins per hit, the number of small hits based on the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of small hits based on the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 70 times, 70 times, 70 times, and 70 times, respectively. ing.

  Also, when the combination of the symbols that the condition device is to operate is the special symbol 1_normal time-saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time-saving symbol 1, the game at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the high probability state and the non-time saving state, the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, The number of small hits achieved by the FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits formed by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0, 0, 0, and 0, respectively.

  Therefore, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_normal time-saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time-saving symbol 1 operates in the gaming state that is the high probability state and the time saving state, the operation of the condition device ends ( As soon as the special game state ends, the variable time reduction function ends, and thereby the game state transits to the game state (ie, the normal game state) that is the low probability state and the non-time saving state.

  Also, when the combination of the symbols that the condition device is to operate is the special symbol 1_normal time-saving symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time-saving symbol 1, the game at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the high probability state and the non-time saving state, the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, The number of small hits achieved by the FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits formed by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 100 times, 100 times, 100 times, and 100 times, respectively.

  Next, when the combination of the symbols to be operated by the condition device is the special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, the condition device based on the combination of the symbols is operated. When the game state is the low probability state and the non-time saving state (that is, the normal game state), the termination condition of the variable time reduction function is the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the special figure 2_the small hit symbol 1 Irrespective of the number of small hits made by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits made by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 until the next condition device operates ( Until the next special game state occurs).

  Therefore, if the special state 1_specific time reduction symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time reduction symbol 2 is selected, the game state when the condition device is activated is a low probability state and a non-hour reduction state, and the symbol is based on the symbol. The time-saving state generated after the special game state continues until the next special game state occurs.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the condition device is activated is a special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or a special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, a game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the low probability state and the time saving state (that is, the time saving game state), the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the conditions for ending the variable time reduction function, and the small number according to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 The number of wins per hit, the number of small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of small hits by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 10, 10, 7, and 3, respectively. ing.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the condition device is activated is a special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or a special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, a game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the high probability state and the non-time saving state, the termination condition of the fluctuation time reducing function is the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the number of small hits achieved by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, Irrespective of the number of small hits achieved by the small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits achieved by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 until the next condition device is activated (that is, the special game state is Until it occurs).

  Therefore, when the special state 1_specific time reduction symbol 2 or the special figure 2_specific time reduction symbol 2 is selected, when the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device is a high probability state and a non-hour reduction state, the symbol is based on the symbol. The time-saving state generated after the special game state continues until the next special game state occurs.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the condition device is activated is a special figure 1_specific time saving symbol 2 or a special figure 2_specific time saving symbol 2, a game when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is the high probability state and the time saving state, the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are termination conditions of the fluctuation time shortening function, the number of small hits achieved by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the special figure The number of small hits formed by the 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits formed by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0, 0, 0, and 0, respectively.

  Therefore, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_specific time reduction symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific time reduction symbol 1 is operated in the gaming state in the high probability state and the time reduction state, after the operation of the condition device ends (that is, , After the end of the special game state), the operation of the condition device is ended (that is, the end of the special game state), the fluctuation time reduction function is immediately ended, and thereby, the certain variation game that occurs after the end of the special game state. The internal game state of the state transits from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state.

  The main control board 920 is a special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol), a big hit symbol (special figure 1_specific time saving symbols 1,2, special figure 2_specific time saving symbols 1,2, special figure 1_normal) When the time-saving symbol, special figure 2_normal time-saving symbol) is selected, as the termination condition of the variable time reduction function according to the combination of the symbol and the gaming state at the time of operating the condition device based on the combination of the symbol. The set number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol (special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, special figure 2_small hit symbol 3) Is set as a remaining period in a remaining period counter (not shown) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM before the activation of the variable time reduction function corresponding to the symbol combination.

  After the end of the special game state, each time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 operate (each time a unit game related to the special symbol is executed), the main control board 920 sets the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. Is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which is stored, and when the finalized display displayed in the unit game is the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 is stored. 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter thus set. Similarly, if the final display displayed in the unit game is the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 is stored. If the final display displayed in the unit game is the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3, 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 is stored.

  Then, the main control board 920, based on the content of the remaining period counter after the update, the remaining period of the special symbol display device 471, 472, the remaining period of the special figure 2_ small hit symbol 1, the special figure 2_ small hit symbol If it is determined that the remaining period of the second period or the remaining period of the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 has reached zero, it is determined that the condition for ending the variable time reduction function is satisfied, and the corresponding unit game is determined. After displaying the display, the fluctuation time reducing function is ended. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 shifts from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a description will be given of a configuration for notifying the player of the time when the time saving state ends in the probable change game state. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the gaming state in the high probability state and the time saving state.

  In the high-probability state and the time-saving game state (probably changing game state in which the internal game state is the time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 26, the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 are decorated symbols. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 together with 1731 and 1732. The decorative symbol 1731 is a decorative symbol that is always displayed, and the decorative symbol 1732 that is displayed larger than the decorative symbol 1731 can be temporarily hidden in some situations such as when a predetermined effect is performed. It is a decorative pattern.

  The remaining period display section 1711 displays information corresponding to the remaining period for the execution period of the variable time reduction function. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (in the present embodiment, the variable time reduction function of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472) The number corresponding to the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter that stores the remaining number of operations until the end condition is reached is displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711. The display control of the remaining period display unit 1711 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 is set to a smaller value by one each time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 operate. In the configuration in which the number corresponding to the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter is displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711, the number is always displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711 every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 operate. It is not necessary to update the number to be reduced by one. For example, in at least a part of the period during the execution of the variation time reducing function, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 every time the special symbol display devices 471, 472 operate a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is the predetermined number of times. A configuration such as updating to a value smaller by the minute may be used.

  The post-transition game state display section 1712 includes information (hereinafter, referred to as “hereinafter, a game state”) for notifying a player of the game state when a game state that is a high-probability state and a non-time saving state occurs due to the termination of the variable time reduction function. This information is also referred to as “game state information”). In the example shown in FIG. 26, the gaming state information is configured by a character string “PERFECT RUSH”. The game state information does not necessarily have to be a character string, but may be a symbol or a pattern, or may be a combination of a character string and a symbol or a pattern. The display control of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  When the variation time reduction function is completed, a predetermined effect display is performed using the game state display unit 1712 after the transition (for example, the decorative pattern 1732 is hidden and the transition is performed using the area where the decorative pattern 1732 is displayed). By displaying the rear game state display portion 1712 in a large size), the player can recognize that a game state that is a high probability state and a non-time saving state has occurred.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the amount of overlap between the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 gradually increases as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 decreases.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to 26 (C), the remaining periods related to the special symbol display devices 471, 472. (That is, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 decreases), the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 increases. In this example, the sizes of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 gradually increase as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that both the display units 1711 and 1712 are displayed. Overlap amount increases.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are on one side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (the upper end of the screen in the example shown in FIG. 26). , The player does not significantly change his or her line of sight to change the display mode of the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712, or change the amount of overlap between the display sections 1711 and 1712. It is possible to visually recognize without.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, the visibility of the game state information (PERFECT RUSH) is improved as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is reduced. The display mode of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is configured to change with the change of the remaining period.

  The change in the visibility of the game state information may be realized by changing the display mode of a predetermined image overlapping the game state information, or the size or color of the game state information (for example, The configuration may be realized by a change in (color difference). In FIG. 26, a change in the visibility of the game state information is indicated by hatching over the game state information.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of small hits established is adopted as an end condition of the fluctuation time reducing function activated after the special gaming state, so that in a gaming machine capable of generating the small hitting gaming state, A new game property for terminating the variable time reduction function in accordance with the number of wins can be added.

  In particular, since a plurality of small hit symbols (small hit types) are provided and the number of small hits established as the termination condition of the variable time reducing function is provided for each type of the small hit symbol, the variable time reducing function is terminated. The conditions can be diversified, whereby the diversification of the game in which the variable time reduction function is terminated according to the number of small hits can be suitably realized.

  Also, the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol that is the end condition of the variable time reduction function depends on the type of symbol combination that the condition device is to operate on and when the condition device is operated based on the combination of the symbols. Since it is determined according to the combination with the gaming state, the conditions for terminating the variable time reduction function can be diversified. Therefore, also in such a point, diversification of the game ability for terminating the variable time reduction function in accordance with the number of small hits can be suitably realized.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the overlapping amount of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 gradually increases as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. Is done. Since the remaining period display unit 1711 displays a number corresponding to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the player visually recognizes a change in the remaining period displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. By recognizing that the end time of the variable time reduction function is gradually approaching, and by recognizing an increase in the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712, it is possible to ensure that It is possible to recognize that the time when the internal game state transitions to the non-time saving state in which the number of acquired balls can be expected to increase is approaching. Thus, when the internal game state in the probable change game state is the time saving state, the player can appropriately expect the time when the internal game state transitions to the non-time saving state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the numbers corresponding to the remaining periods of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711. If the end condition of the variation time reduction function is satisfied by the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol before the end condition of the variation time reduction function is satisfied by the number of operations, the remaining time display unit 1711 is displayed. A non-time saving condition occurs when the number is not zero. On the other hand, when the end condition of the fluctuation time reduction function is satisfied by the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol before the end condition of the fluctuation time reduction function is satisfied by the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which zero is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 regardless of the remaining periods related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described fourth embodiment, the probability variation function operated after the special game state is configured to be continued until the next operation of the condition device. The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that when the number of small hits winning (the number of small hits established) reaches a predetermined number, the probability changing function is ended together with the changing time reducing function. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described first to fourth embodiments, or the configuration of the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment may be added. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the gaming state shifts to the probable game state after the special game state, the internal game state (probability change) according to the selected transition pattern. The states A to E) change.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, portions different from the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment will be described.

  In the probable change game state, after the small prize is won in the small lottery, the large winning device is operated a predetermined number of times with a predetermined allowable time, and then the internal game state is set to the non-time saving state (in this embodiment, the probable change state C ＥE), if the number of small wins (the number of small wins) has reached a predetermined upper limit predetermined as a termination condition of the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function, the probability Assuming that the respective ending conditions of the variation function and the time variation reduction function are satisfied, the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function are terminated. Thereby, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

  In addition, the upper limit of the number of small hits established as the termination condition of the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function may be configured such that one type of upper limit is provided irrespective of the type of the small hit symbol. As in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of types (for example, three types) of upper limits are provided according to the types of small hit symbols may be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the number of small hits which is set as the termination condition of the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function depends on each transition pattern of each of the probability variation states A to E. Value is set. Note that the upper limit of the number of small hits established as an end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function may be the same value common to a plurality of types of transition patterns.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the number of small hits established as the termination condition of the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function is such that the internal game state of the probability change game state transits to the non-time saving state. It is defined as the upper limit of the number of small hits established later. In a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920, a counter (not shown) for counting the number of small hits is provided. After the transition to the time saving state, the counter is updated each time a small hit is won.

  Note that the upper limit of the number of small hits established as an end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation reduction function is determined after the probability change game state according to the transition pattern starts (that is, the first probability change state A starts according to the transition pattern). A configuration that is defined as an upper limit value of the number of small hits that are established later) may be adopted.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of small wins is adopted as an end condition of the probability variation function operated after the special gaming state. It is possible to add a new game property for terminating the probability varying function according to the number of times of the establishment.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment is characterized by a configuration relating to a display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 that changes according to the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. It is provided as a configuration. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to fifth embodiments described above, or may be added to the configuration of the first to fifth embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  Similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment does not satisfy the condition for terminating the probability varying function after transition to the probable change game state, and sets the condition for terminating the varying time reduction function. When the set predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the internal game state is changed from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state while maintaining the high probability state. In the configuration, the increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed (or the number of acquired balls gradually decreases) when the internal game state is the time reduction state, and the number of acquired balls is gradually increased when the internal game state is the non-time reduction state. Is done.

  FIGS. 28 to 30 are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of display modes of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment.

  First, a first feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28D show display modes in a state where “100”, “60”, “10”, and “0” are displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711, respectively. FIG. 28 (E) shows a display mode when the internal game state of the probable change game state has transitioned to the non-time saving state.

  As described above, the number displayed on the remaining period display section 1711 indicates the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (in this embodiment, the end of the variable time reduction function of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472). This indicates a numerical value corresponding to the content stored in the remaining period counter in which the remaining number of operations until the condition is reached is stored. Therefore, each of FIGS. 28A to 28D shows a case where the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases in this order.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the recognizability of the game state information composed of a plurality of characters (more specifically, the recognizability for the contents of the game state information) is different from that of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. The first feature is that the longer the period is, the worse it is, and the shorter the remaining period is, the better it is.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 28A to 28C, in a situation where the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 remains to some extent, the game state information in the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is displayed. The image 1713 superimposed and displayed in the display area 1714 impairs the recognizability of the contents of the game state information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 28, the game state information is a character string “PERFECT RUSH” composed of a plurality of characters (see FIG. 28E). As shown in FIG. 28A, in a situation where “100” is displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711, the image 1713 overlaps all the characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH”, and each of these characters Is difficult or unrecognizable. Also, in the situation shown in FIG. 28A, the image 1713 overlapping the characters constituting the game state information makes it impossible to recognize or difficult to recognize even how many characters constitute the character string constituting the game state information. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 28A to 28D, the amount of the image 1713 overlapping the display area 1714 decreases stepwise as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. The display control of the image 1713 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  Therefore, in all the characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH”, the proportion of the characters in which the image 1713 does not overlap or in which the overlap of the image 1713 is small and which can be recognized is the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. It gradually increases as the number decreases.

  During the execution of the variable display based on the start condition of the last special symbol being satisfied in the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, that is, even in the situation where “0” is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. Although some of the characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH” are difficult or invisible to be recognized by the image 1713 (see FIG. 28D), the start condition of the last special symbol is satisfied. If the special symbol lottery performed based on is not a big hit (that is, if it is lost in the special symbol lottery), after the variable display ends, as shown in FIG. The image 1713 is not displayed in 1714A, and all the characters constituting the character string "PERFECT RUSH" can be recognized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the recognizability of the content of the game state information gradually increases as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, and finally, the special symbol display. In a situation where the remaining period of the devices 471 and 472 has ended and the internal gaming state has transitioned to the non-saving time state, the state of the gaming state information can be completely recognized by the player. The player can fully recognize the game state information in the game state display unit 1712 after the transition, thereby recognizing that the internal game state of the probable change game state has transitioned to the non-time saving state.

  In addition, when the variable display based on the start condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is completed, a predetermined input operation (for example, the pressing operation device 261) is given to the player. ) Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like. In this configuration, when the player performs the input operation, the image 1713 displayed in the display area 1714 is hidden and the character string is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which all the characters constituting "PERFECT RUSH" are made recognizable (that is, the state transitions from the state of FIG. 28D to the state of FIG. 28E).

  As described above, by causing the player to perform a predetermined input operation before the post-transition game state display unit 1712 shifts to the state of FIG. 28E, the player can perform the character string “game state information”. It is difficult to overlook a change in which at least some of the characters constituting "PERFECT RUSH" are difficult or unrecognizable to be in a state in which all the characters are recognizable. Can be suitably recognized by the player. This allows the player to enjoy a game in which the internal game state of the probability-change game state can transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

  Next, a second feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each time the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 reaches a predetermined value, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is configured to increase stepwise. For example, the numbers displayed on the remaining period display section 1711 are “50”, “10”, “9”, “8”, “7”, “6”, “5”, “4”, “3”, In the case of “2”, “1”, and “0”, the size of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is configured to be larger than the previous size.

  In such a configuration, when the size of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 changes, the post-transition game state display unit 1712 (hereinafter, such post-transition game state display unit 1712 displays the post-transition game state display) that is larger than the post-transition size. The second characteristic is that the post-transition game state display section 1712 of the changed size is displayed after temporarily displaying the display section 1712A).

  For example, by changing the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 from “11” to “10”, the size of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is changed as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29C. When the post-transition game state display portion 1712 of the changed size (the size shown in FIG. 29C) is displayed one step later, as shown in FIG. The post-transition game state display section 1712A, which is larger than the changed size, is configured to be temporarily displayed.

  Next, a third feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 also has a remaining period every time the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 reaches a predetermined value, similarly to the post-transition game state display unit 1712. When the size of the remaining period display unit 1711 changes while the display unit 1711 is configured to increase in a stepwise manner, the remaining period display unit 1711 (hereinafter, such remaining period display unit 1711) is larger than the changed size. Is also temporarily displayed on the remaining period display section 1711A), and then the remaining period display section 1711 having the changed size is displayed.

  In such a configuration, during the period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function, only the remaining period display portion 1711 is temporarily expanded, and the remaining period display portion is displayed. A third feature is that a timing is provided in which both 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 are temporarily expanded in synchronization.

  For example, as described above, the numbers displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 are “50”, “10”, “9”, “8” when the game state display unit 1712 gradually increases after the transition. , “7”, “6”, “5”, “4”, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0”, while the remaining period display unit 1711 displays When the number displayed on the remaining period display section 1711 is two or more digits, the first digit becomes zero (that is,... 90, 80, 70,..., 20, 10). When the number displayed on the remaining period display section 1711 is a single digit, the number is set to a time that decreases by one (ie, 9, 8,..., 3, 2, 1, 0).

  Thereby, at the time when both the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 increase by one level, for example, at the time when the number displayed on the remaining period display section 1711 changes from “11” to “10” As shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C, after the remaining period display portion 1711A and the post-transition game state display portion 1712A that are larger than the changed size are temporarily displayed in synchronization, (The size shown in FIG. 29C) is displayed on the period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712.

  On the other hand, at the time when only the remaining period display unit 1711 is increased by one level, for example, at the time when the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 changes from “61” to “60”, FIG. As shown in FIG. 30C, only the remaining period display unit 1711 displays the changed size (the size shown in FIG. 30C) after the remaining period display unit 1711A that is larger than the changed size is displayed. ). In such a case, the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is simply displayed one step larger in accordance with the change in the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  According to the first feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game state information of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 composed of a plurality of characters such as the character string “PERFECT RUSH” is the post-transition game state. In a predetermined initial state in which the display unit 1712 is displayed (that is, a state in which the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is the maximum), all characters are displayed so as to be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. As the remaining period becomes shorter, the recognizability of characters that were unrecognizable or difficult to recognize is increased so that all characters constituting the game state information can be finally recognized.

  Therefore, when the internal game state of the probable change game state is the time saving state (the case of the high probability state and the time saving state), the character string (character information) of the game state information of the game state display unit 1712 after the transition is changed. The whole image is completed as the remaining period (ie, the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471, 472) with respect to the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471, 472, which is one of the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, decreases. As it approaches, as the recognizability of the game state information (more specifically, the recognizability for the contents of the game state information) gradually increases, the player is prompted to end the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471, 472, In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation of the time when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-time saving state.

  According to the second feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the size of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is increased stepwise, the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is This is displayed after temporarily displaying the post-transition game state display section 1712A which is larger than the post-transition game state display section 1712 after the change.

  Therefore, before the post-transition game state display unit 1712 (for example, FIG. 29C) is displayed, the post-transition game state display unit 1712A (for example, FIG. 29B) is temporarily displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the post-transition game state display unit 1712 after the change is larger than the post-transition game state display unit 1712 (for example, FIG. 29A) before the change. be able to. Thereby, in the process of gradually increasing the size of the post-transition game state display section 1712, at a certain time, the player is made to feel as if the post-transition game state display section 1712 is suddenly enlarged. Can be given, the player's consciousness about the transition of the internal game state of the probable change game state from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state can be made more or less slower, whereby the internal game state transitions to the non-time-saving state. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation of the event.

  Further, according to the third feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is one of the end conditions of the fluctuation time reducing function, reaches the end condition. There are provided a plurality of periods in which the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 gradually increases, and in some of the plurality of periods, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the transition are displayed. Both the after-game state display sections 1712 are temporarily enlarged before being displayed in the changed size (that is, the remaining period display section 1711A and the after-transition game state display section 1712A are displayed). At other times, only the remaining period display portion 1711 is temporarily enlarged and displayed before being displayed in the changed size.

  Therefore, in the end of the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471, 472, that is, in the process of gradually approaching the time when the internal game state transitions to the non-time saving state, the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712. Are temporarily enlarged, or only the remaining period display portion 1711 is temporarily enlarged, so that the player can be prevented from feeling monotonous in the process, and thereby, the internal game state becomes non-time saving. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation for transition to the state.

  At this time, the time interval at which both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are temporarily expanded is set to the remaining period until the end condition of the variable time reduction function is satisfied (for example, special symbol display). By shortening as the (remaining period for the number of operations of the devices 471, 472) becomes shorter, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 become closer as the time when the internal game state transitions from the time saving state to the non-time saving state approaches. Are temporarily expanded, and the increase in the frequency can suggest to the player when the internal game state transitions to the non-time saving state. Also in this regard, the player's expectation that the internal game state transitions to the non-time saving state can be appropriately increased.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment does not satisfy the condition for terminating the probability varying function after transition to the probable change game state, and sets the condition for terminating the varying time reduction function. When the set predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the internal game state is changed from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state while maintaining the high probability state, and the small-hitting playability is a probable changing game state. In the configuration, the increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed (or the number of acquired balls gradually decreases) when the internal game state is the time reduction state, and the number of acquired balls is gradually increased when the internal game state is the non-time reduction state. Is done.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment having such a configuration, the start condition of the last special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 is satisfied. In this case, a function is provided for changing the display mode of the remaining period display section 1711 in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) based on the starting condition of the special symbol. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to sixth embodiments described above, or the configuration of the first to sixth embodiments described above may be added. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 31 is a screen diagram for explaining the features of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. More specifically, it is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 in a gaming state in which a high probability state and a time saving state have occurred after a special gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability state and the time saving state, the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is established. If the special symbol lottery performed does not win the jackpot (that is, if the player loses the special symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 31 (A), it is the last unit game in the remaining period. The remaining period display unit 1711 on which the number (ie, “0”) is displayed is displayed together with the post-transition game state display unit 1712 based on the establishment of the last special symbol start condition, and the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. Are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in synchronization with the start of the variable display of symbols executed in the step (1).

  When the last unit game in the remaining period is completed, the image 1713 displayed over the character of the game state information (character string “PERFECT RUSH”) in the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is not displayed, and the probable game state is changed. In the symbol variation display after the internal game state of the game has transitioned to the non-time saving state, as shown in FIG. 31B, all characters constituting the game state information are recognizable.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the high probability state and the time saving state, the special symbol lottery performed based on the fact that the last special symbol starting condition is satisfied in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is a big hit. In the case of winning, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the remaining period display section 1711 is not displayed, and only the post-transition game state display section 1712 displays the special state based on the establishment of the last special symbol starting condition. The symbols are displayed in synchronization with the start of symbol variable display performed by the symbol display devices 471 and 472.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the post-transition game state display unit 1712 in such a case displays the transition in the case where the special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the last special symbol starting condition does not win a big hit. Similar to the rear game state display portion 1712, a part of characters constituting the game state information is difficult or invisible due to the image 1713. Therefore, when the symbol variation display is being performed in the situation shown in FIG. 31C, the player is in the current game state, and the internal game state of the probable change game state is the time reduction state (that is, the non-time reduction state). Has not transitioned to).

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the internal game state of the probable change game state is the time saving state (the gaming state in which the high probability state and the time saving state are present), the last of the remaining periods related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is performed. "0" is displayed when the internal game state of the probable change game state transitions to the non-time saving state after the end of the unit game based on the establishment of the special symbol starting condition (that is, after the display of the confirmation display). The remaining period display section 1711 is displayed.

  Therefore, in such a case, the player is displayed in correspondence with the number “0” displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711, that is, the predetermined zero state in which the remaining periods related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 have disappeared. (Hereinafter referred to as "zero information"), the symbol is displayed while being changed during display of the zero information (that is, based on the establishment of the last special symbol starting condition). (Variable display of symbols) can be recognized as the last variable display when the internal gaming state of the probable variable gaming state is the time saving state, so that the internal gaming state transitions to the non-time saving state after the end of the variable display. You can continue playing while expecting.

  On the other hand, when the internal game state of the probable change game state is the time saving state, the probable change game after the end of the unit game based on the establishment of the last special symbol start condition in the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471, 472. If the internal game state of the state does not transition to the non-time saving state, the remaining period display section 1711 displaying “0” is not displayed.

  Therefore, in such a case, since the player cannot visually recognize the number “0” displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, that is, the zero information, the remaining period relating to the special symbol display devices 471, 472 has disappeared (that is, the player has no remaining period). , The number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 has reached the end condition of the variable time reduction function). Therefore, as in the case where the zero information is displayed (that is, the situation shown in FIG. 31A), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to expect the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. When the internal game state transitions to the non-time saving state after the last symbol change display in the remaining period of the display devices 471 and 472, the player can be prevented from misunderstanding.

  As a result, a game state different from the situation expected by the player due to misunderstanding occurs after the end of the last symbol change display in the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, and the player plays the game based on the situation. It is possible to suppress the feeling that it is not interesting. Therefore, in the probable change game state in which the internal game state can transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to more suitably realize the improvement of the game property in which the player expects the transition to the non-time-saving state.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment has a configuration in which the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) and the vicinity thereof can be detected. The status display unit 2591 that displays a predetermined error set in advance for the device 100 can be used to display a result based on the detection.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting a ball-injection rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls. The configuration is such that setting suggestion information can be output when the lowest initial hit probability (that is, first-stage probability) is set for each of the three types (top type, middle type, and bottom type). Is done.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to seventh embodiments described above, or may be added to the configuration of the first to seventh embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 32 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32, a notification unit 2491 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The notification unit 2491 includes a light emitting body such as a light emitting diode (LED), and performs predetermined notification by light emission of the light emitting body. In the present embodiment, the notifying unit 2491 determines that the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) and in the vicinity thereof is in an inappropriate state (hereinafter, this is referred to as the following). It emits light when it is determined that the state is "base error".

  Note that the notification unit 2491 may include a display device capable of displaying characters or the like, an output device capable of outputting sound, or the like, instead of or in addition to the light emitter. The notification may be performed using a display or an output sound from an output device.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the notification unit 2491 is provided as a part of the main control board 920, and the output is controlled by the control of the main control board 920. The notification unit 2491 is located inside a light-transmitting substrate case 371 (see FIG. 4) that houses the main control substrate 920, and can be visually recognized through the substrate case 371. The notification unit 2491 may be provided as a separate component electrically connected to the main control board 920, or may be provided so as to be located outside the board case 371.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, a status display section 2591 is provided. The status display unit 2591 is configured by a 7-segment display, and when a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 is detected, displays a display corresponding to the error. The state display section 2591 is not limited to a seven-segment display, but may be another display device capable of displaying characters or the like, such as a liquid crystal display device.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the status display section 2591 is connected to the payout control board 930, and the display is controlled by the payout control board 930. The state display portion 2591 is located inside a light-transmitting substrate case that accommodates the payout control substrate 930, and can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

  As an error set as an error display target by the status display unit 2591 (a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100), for example, a ball in which game balls are not normally refilled in the case rail 530 An out-of-flow condition, a ball overflow condition in which game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241, a payout error caused by a clogged ball of the payout motor 542, or a case where the front block 102 or the intermediate block 103 is the intermediate block 103 or the rear block, respectively. There is a command failure (command error) due to a state opened to the 104, a break of a harness, and a communication failure of a card unit (not shown).

  The state display unit 2591 displays, for example, “1” when a ball out condition is detected, “2” when a ball overflow condition is detected, and “3” when a payout error is detected. "Is displayed," 4 "is displayed when the open state of the previous block 102 or the intermediate block 103 is detected," C "is displayed when a command error is detected, and communication failure of the card unit is detected. "U" is displayed when it is done.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a base error is detected and the notification is performed by the notification unit 2491 (in this embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is turned on), the initial state is determined. When the switch 907 is operated (pressed), information relating to the base error (in the present embodiment, the result of the base error determination) is displayed on the status display unit 2591.

  The display corresponding to the error displayed on the status display unit 2591 due to the occurrence of the predetermined error set in the pachinko machine 100 is deleted by eliminating the error. The information on the base error displayed on the status display portion 2591 by the operation of the initialization switch 907 is displayed while the operation is being performed, and is deleted when the operation is completed.

  On the right side of the status display portion 2591, a status return switch 2592 is provided. The state return switch 2592 is connected to the payout control board 930 as shown in FIG. The state return switch 2592 functions as, for example, a switch for canceling the payout error (returning to a normal state) when a payout error is detected. The state return switch 2592 also functions as a switch for terminating the notification when the notification by the notification unit 2491 is performed. The state return switch 2592 is operated as a switch for deleting the display corresponding to the error displayed on the state display portion 2591 by operating the pachinko machine 100 after eliminating a predetermined error set in advance. It is good also as composition which makes it do.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 920 is provided with a base data storage unit 2492. More specifically, the base data storage unit 2492 is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920. The base data storage unit 2492 stores general prize devices 2439A and 2439B (or general prize devices) during a period until the number of game balls (the number of fired balls) fired in the game area reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50,000 balls). 439A, 439B) (hereinafter, the number of game balls is also referred to as “base data”) is stored.

  Note that the RAM in which the base data storage unit 2492 is provided is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 901, so that even when the supply of the driving voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped, The stored contents of the general winning number counter are retained. That is, as long as the information stored in the RAM is not erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the contents stored in the base data storage unit 2492 are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state. Note that the predetermined switch is not necessarily provided, and the storage content of the base data storage unit 2492 may not be erased by an external operation by an employee of the game arcade or the like. Further, even if an operation for initializing information on game control on the main control board 920 is performed by the initialization switch 907 and information on the game is initialized, the storage of information in the base data storage unit 2492 is retained. It may be configured.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base data storage unit 2492 stores the last measured base data (hereinafter, also referred to as “current base data”) and the base data measured one time before the current base data ( Hereinafter, it is also configured to be able to store base data measured immediately before the previous base data (hereinafter, also referred to as “base data before last time”) and base data measured one time before the previous base data (hereinafter, also referred to as “base data before last time”). That is, the base data storage unit 2492 is configured to be able to store the latest three consecutive base data. Further, the base data storage unit 2492 is configured to be able to store the result of the base error determination (see S1704 in FIG. 34) for each of these three base data in association with each base data.

  Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. On the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the same main processing as that of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 17) and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) are executed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the nail state-related process S1222 executed in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process) of the present embodiment. The nail state-related processing S1222 executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is similar to the nail state-related processing S1222 (see FIG. 13) executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B ( Alternatively, it is a process of detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A, 439B) and displaying and outputting the result based on the detection.

  In the following, among the processes executed in the nail state-related process S1222 of the present embodiment, portions different from the nail state-related process S1222 of the first embodiment will be mainly described. In the nail state-related processing S1222 of the present embodiment, in addition to the processing S1401 to S1405 related to the detection of the state of the nail 411 and the processing S1501 to S1504 related to the display of the nail state level based on the detection, a base error Each of the processes S1701 to S1706 related to the determination and each of the processes S1721 to S1727 related to the output of the base error are configured.

  The processes S1701 to S1706 related to the detection of the base error are executed after S1401 to S1405 and before S1501 to S1504. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, when it is determined that the shooting sphere is not detected in the determination process S1404 (S1404: N), or after S1405, the determination process S1701 is executed.

  The determination process S1701 determines whether or not the number of fired ball counters (hereinafter, also referred to as “second fired ball number counter”) for counting the number of fired balls to be used for base error determination has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50,000). This is the process of determining whether In the determination process S1701, when it is determined that the second shooting ball number counter has not reached the predetermined number (S1701: N), the process of S1702 to S1706, which will be described later, is not performed, but the process of S1501 is performed.

On the other hand, in the determination process S1701, when it is determined that the second firing ball number counter has reached a predetermined number (S1701: Y), a general winning number counter (hereinafter, referred to as “counting”) that counts a general winning number used for determining a base error. The value of the “second general winning number counter” is stored as base data in a predetermined area of the base data storage unit 2492 (S1702).
The “second firing number counter” is a counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (RAM to which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901) of the main control board 920, and has detected a firing ball in the determination process S1404. If it is determined that this is the case, it is updated in S1405. That is, the second firing number counter is an independent firing number counter different from the firing ball number counter used for calculating the nail state level in the first embodiment, and is similar to the firing number counter of the first embodiment in advance. This is a counter that counts the number of game balls fired in the game area during a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied.

  The “second general winning number counter” is a counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (RAM to which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901) of the main control board 920. In the determination processing S1402, the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B are provided. (Or, it is updated in S1403 when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B). That is, the second general winning number counter is an independent general winning number counter different from the general winning number counter used for calculating the nail state level in the first embodiment, and is different from the general winning number counter of the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have won the general winning device during a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base data storage unit 2492 includes an area for storing current base data (hereinafter, also referred to as a “current base data storage area”) and an area for storing previous base data (hereinafter, “previous base data”). A base data storage area) and an area for storing the base data before last time (hereinafter also referred to as “base data storage area before last time”).

  In step S1702, the base data stored in the current base data storage area and the previous base data storage area and the result of the base error determination associated with each database are compared with the previous base data storage area and the two-last base data, respectively. After shifting to the data storage area by overwriting, the value of the second general winning number counter is stored by overwriting in the current base data storage area. As a result, the base data storage unit 2492 stores the number of winnings in the general prize device every time a predetermined number (for example, 50,000 balls) of game balls are fired in the gaming area as the base data from the latest three. The measurement order (the order of storage in the base data storage unit 2492) is stored so as to be identifiable.

  The base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 is added to the base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 by adding information that can identify the storage order in the base data storage unit 2492 to the three base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492. It may be configured such that it is possible to identify whether the data is the current base data, the previous base data, or the last previous base data.

  After S1702, the second general winning number counter and the second shot ball number counter are reset (S1703). After S1703, the base error is determined for the current base data (S1704).

  Specifically, in step S1704, the base data of this time is based on the first threshold value (for example, when the number of shot balls is 50,000) that sets the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning device in an appropriate state. If the value is smaller than 500 balls, the first base error is determined, and the second upper limit threshold value for setting the nail 411 in an appropriate state (for example, when the number of fired balls is 50,000 balls). If the value is larger than 5000 balls), it is determined to be the second base error. On the other hand, if the current base data is a value between the first threshold and the second threshold, it is determined that there is no base error. The result of the base error determination in S1704 is stored in the current base data storage area in association with the current base data.

  When it is determined that there is a base error (first base error or second base error) with respect to the current base data (S1705: Y), the notification unit 2491 is turned on to notify (S1706), and the process of S1501 is executed. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no base error for the current base data (S1705: N), the processing of S1501 is executed without executing the processing of S1706.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 34, when it is determined in the determination process S1401 that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), or when it is determined in S1501 that the previous block 102 is not in the open state (S1501: N), or After S1504, a determination process S1721 is performed. The determination process S1721 is a process of determining whether the notification unit 2491 is turned on.

  When it is determined in the determination process S1721 that the notification unit 2491 is turned on (S1721: Y), a determination process S1722 is performed to determine whether the initialization switch 907 has been operated (pressed). When the main control board 920 receives a signal based on the operation of the initialization switch 907, in the determination process S1722, it is determined that the initialization switch 907 has been operated. In the determination process S1722, when it is determined that the initialization switch 907 has been operated (S1722: Y), the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591 (S1723).

  In addition, when the initialization switch 907 is operated while the display corresponding to a predetermined error preset for the pachinko machine 100 is displayed on the status display unit 2591 while the notification unit 2491 is turned on. Displays the result of the base error determination on the status display section 2591 instead of the display corresponding to the error.

  The status display unit 2591 displays “L” when the result of the base error determination is the first base error, and displays “H” when the result of the base error determination is the second base error, If the result of the base error determination is that there is no base error, “A” is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, while the operation of the initialization switch 907 is continued (that is, while the initialization switch 907 is pressed), the result of the base error determination for each base data is displayed as a state. It is configured to be sequentially displayed on the unit 2591.

  Specifically, when the initialization switch 907 is operated, first, the result of the base error determination for the current base data is displayed on the status display unit 2591, and thereafter, while the operation is continued, the previous base data → the second-last base The result of the base error determination for each base data is displayed on the status display section 2591 in the order of data → current base data → previous base data →.

  If it is determined that the operation of the initialization switch 907 has been completed (S1724: N), the result of the base error determination displayed on the status display unit 2591 is hidden (S1725). In the case where a display corresponding to a predetermined error set in advance on the pachinko machine 100 is to be displayed, the error corresponding to the error is displayed when the result of the base error determination is hidden. Is displayed on the status display section 2591.

  After the result of the base error determination displayed on the status display unit 2591 is hidden, if it is determined that the status return switch 2592 has been operated (pressed) (S1726: Y), the notification unit 2491 Is turned off (S1727), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In addition, when the result of the base error determination is not displayed (that is, when the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed), or for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the result of the base error determination is not displayed When the elapsed time has elapsed or when the initialization switch 907 has been operated in S1722, the configuration may be such that the notification unit 2491 is turned off without operating the state return switch 2592.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification unit 2491 is not turned on in the determination processing S1721 (S1721: N), or when it is determined that the initialization switch 907 is not operated in the determination processing S1722 (S1722: N). , And returns to the main control interrupt processing without executing the processing of S1723 to S1727.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion information related processing S2021 executed in the timer interrupt processing (main control interrupt processing) of the present embodiment. The setting suggestion information related processing S2021 executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is similar to the setting suggestion information related processing S2021 executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 19), and outputs the setting suggestion information. This is a process of outputting setting suggestion information when a condition set as a condition is satisfied.

  In the following, among the processes executed in the setting suggestion information related process S2021 of the present embodiment, the portions different from the setting suggestion information related process S2021 of the second embodiment will be mainly described. The setting suggestion information-related processing S2021 of the present embodiment includes determination processing S1801 to S1804 as processing for determining whether an output condition of setting suggestion information is satisfied.

  The determination process S1801 determines whether or not the currently set game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability. This is the processing to be performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the initial hit probability is the lowest among the types (i.e., the first-stage probability) for each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, in the determination process S1801, It is determined that the first hit probability is the lowest game mode. That is, when the game mode of the first-stage probability in each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type is set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, in the determination process S1801, the initial hit probability is determined. Is the lowest game mode.

  When it is determined that the game mode has the lowest initial hit probability (S1801: Y), a determination process (determination processes S1802 to S1804) is performed to determine whether an output condition for setting suggestion information is satisfied. Note that the profit rate for the player is set to be substantially the same for each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type if the probability setting state is the same in all types. In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, when the most disadvantageous probability is set for the player, a determination process (determination processes S1802 to S1804) of whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied is executed. Is done.

  If it is determined in any of the determination processes S1802 to S1804 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output (S1606). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first hit probability is not the game mode with the lowest probability (S1801: N), the process returns to the main control interrupt process without executing the processes of S1802 to S1804.

  The determination processes S1802 to S1804 will be specifically described. The determination process 1802 is a process of determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied regarding the display state of the customer waiting effect. Specifically, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed, in the determination process S1802, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information regarding the display state of the customer waiting effect is satisfied. In addition, the “customer waiting effect” is irrelevant to the game state such as a title display or a demo display, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like when the pachinko machine 100 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time. This is an effect display. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the display state of the customer waiting effect (S1802: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

  The determination process S1803 is a process for determining whether or not the output condition of setting suggestion information is satisfied for a predetermined operation. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a dedicated operating device (not shown) for establishing the output condition of the setting suggestion information is provided, and when the operating device is operated, in the determination process S1803, It is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. Note that a dedicated operating device for satisfying the output condition of setting suggestion information is connected to the sub-control board 940, and when the operating device is operated, the operation information corresponding to the operation is transmitted from the operating device to the sub-control board. It is input to the control board 940.

  When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for a predetermined operation (in this embodiment, an operation on a dedicated operating device for establishing the output condition of the setting suggestion information) (S1803; Y), The output is executed (S1606).

  In addition, as the predetermined operation for satisfying the output condition of the setting suggestion information, in place of the dedicated operating device for satisfying the output condition of the setting suggestive information, or in addition to the dedicated operating device, Operations that can be performed by the player as well as operations on the dedicated device, for example, operations on an operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 or operations on the firing handle 252 may be performed. For example, when the pressing operation device 261 or a dedicated operation device for establishing the output condition of the setting suggestion information is operated, or after a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed since the last operation of the firing handle 252. If performed, the configuration may be such that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1803.

  Also, the opening / closing operation of the front block 102 (that is, the operation of opening the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103 and then closing it again) and the opening / closing operation of the intermediate block 103 (that is, the operation of moving the intermediate block 103 with respect to the rear block 104) After opening and closing again) or opening and closing operation of the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, after integrally opening the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, An operation that can be performed by a specific person other than the player (for example, an operation of re-closing), such as an employee of a game arcade, is at least included as a predetermined operation for satisfying the output condition of the setting suggestion information. You may. For example, a case where an employee or the like of a game arcade closes the front block 102 after opening the front block 102 and performing some operation (for example, cleaning a game board or an operation for eliminating a clogged ball), After the employee of the amusement arcade or the like integrally opens the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 and performs some work (for example, operation of the initialization switch 907), in the determination processing S1803, It may be configured that it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for a predetermined operation, and the setting suggestion information is output.

  The determination process S1804 is a process of determining whether or not an output condition of setting suggestion information that is satisfied by playing a game is satisfied. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has a predetermined number of start winnings (for example, 100 times). Therefore, when a special symbol start winning prize has occurred a predetermined number of times, it is determined in the determination process S1804 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied.

  In addition, in addition to the case where a special symbol start winning prize has occurred a predetermined number of times, or in place of the case where the special symbol starting prize has occurred a predetermined number of times, contact with the firing handle 252 for a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) When a predetermined number (for example, 5000) of game balls are fired from the launching device 330, a special symbol lottery is performed in the same manner as when a special symbol start prize is generated a predetermined number of times. When an event that can be achieved by the player is established regardless of the winning probability of various lotteries, the configuration may be such that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is established in the determination process S1804.

  Alternatively, in addition to, or in place of, the case where an event that can be achieved by the player is achieved regardless of the winning probability of various kinds of lottery such as the special symbol lottery, a special symbol start winning prize occurs a predetermined number of times. In addition to the above, or in place of the case where the special symbol starting prize has occurred a predetermined number of times, the case where the special game state has occurred a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), or the probability change game state or the time saving game state has the predetermined number of times It is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1804 when the game state of the high probability state and the non-saving time state continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). The configuration may be as follows.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is a first base error or a second base error (a base error is detected), a related party on the game hall (for example, an employee of the game hall) By operating the initialization switch 907 by a member or an outsider (for example, a member of a gaming machine inspection organization), the base error determination performed on the base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 is performed. A display corresponding to the result can be displayed.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, while the initialization switch 907 is pressed, three times of base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 (that is, three consecutive times of latest base data). The result of the base error determination for each of the base data) is configured to be sequentially displayed on the status display unit 2591. Therefore, the employees of the amusement arcade and the members of the inspection organization of the amusement machine are provided with the latest three consecutive times. Of the base error determination result for each of the base data can be grasped.

  Therefore, by referring not only to the result of the base error determination for the latest base data (that is, the current base data) but also to the results of the base error determination for the previous base data and the base data before the previous one, the current base data is detected. The base error is a temporary error caused by the occurrence of a clogged ball or the like, or is detected at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B). Whether the error is a base error caused by the state of the nail 411 provided can be suitably determined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined error that has been set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 occurs, the status display unit 2591 that displays the error without requiring operation by the player. Is used as an output destination of the result of the base error determination, so that it is not necessary to provide a dedicated display unit for outputting the result of the base error determination, and it is necessary to output the result of the base error determination. Costs can be reduced.

  In addition, the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) and the vicinity thereof is basically such that the pachinko machine 100 follows the design value. Therefore, there are basically few opportunities to display the result of the base error determination. Therefore, if a dedicated display unit for outputting the result of the base error determination is provided, it is difficult to find a failure of the display unit due to a small number of use opportunities, and there is an opportunity to display the result of the base error determination. When this occurs, the display unit may not be able to display the result due to a failure or the like. On the other hand, the status display unit 2591 operates (displays) every time a predetermined error that has been set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 occurs. Easy to discover. Therefore, by diverting the status display unit 2591 as an output destination of the result of the base error determination, a situation where the result cannot be displayed when there is an opportunity to display the result of the base error determination can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the base error is detected, the notification unit 2491 is configured to light up (emit light), and when the notification unit 2491 is lit (lighting of the notification unit 2491). Only in the case of (medium), the result of the base error determination can be displayed on the status display section 2591 by operating the initialization switch 907. Therefore, when the notification unit 2491 emits a time when the result of the base error determination can be displayed on the status display unit 2591 also serving as a display unit that displays a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 ( That is, when the base error is detected), the time can be recognized by the employees of the game arcade or the members of the inspection organization of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since the notification unit 2491 is configured to be output-controlled by the main control board 920, the output control of the notification unit 2491 is not easily tampered with. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress fraud that hides that the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) and the vicinity thereof is inappropriate.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the first-stage probability is set for each of the three types (top type, middle type, and bottom type), that is, the currently set game mode is When the type is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed and output. In each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, if the probability setting state is the same in all types, the profit rate for the player is set to be substantially the same. In the pachinko machine 100, when the most disadvantageous probability is set for the player, the setting suggestion information is displayed and output. Therefore, by visually recognizing the setting suggestion information, the player preferably sets the lowest initial hit probability (that is, the most disadvantageous probability for the player) among the types in the pachinko machine 100. Can be guessed or identified.

  Thereby, for example, the player considers whether the gaming machine he plays is a gaming machine suitable for his / her taste or a different gaming machine, and continues the game with the current gaming machine, or As one of the selection factors such as whether to move to another gaming machine, the estimated current gaming mode can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) capable of setting the gaming mode in a plurality of stages. Can be improved.

  In addition, for example, a start opening related to establishment of a start condition, or a winning opening (for example, a so-called “V winning”) to which a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a stochastic game state) is given when entering during a special game state. The probability of a game ball entering the winning opening called a “mouth”) depends on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100 such as the individual difference of the pachinko machine 100 and the mounting angle. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, the pachinko machine 100 becomes an advantageous gaming machine for the player depending on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100. Could be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the currently set game mode is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability in each type, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is shown to the player. Accordingly, the setting suggestion information can be used by the player as one piece of information for selecting the pachinko machine 100 to be played by itself while considering the physical state of the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to provide a new pleasure for selecting the machine 100.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is displayed, and thus the pachinko machine 100 comes to the game hall. When the player selects the pachinko machine 100 or when the player playing the game selects another pachinko machine 100 other than the pachinko machine 100 playing the game, the setting suggestion information is used by the player as a selection element. Can be.

  For example, in the case of a new model that requires a large number of players to play a game, if the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is displayed, the player may be a long player. The game of time is easy to avoid, and a large number of players can easily experience the game with the new model.

  In addition, when an event that can be achieved by the player is established regardless of the winning probability of various kinds of lottery such as a special symbol lottery, such as when a special symbol start winning prize occurs a predetermined number of times, the initial winning probability is set to the lowest gaming mode. With the configuration in which the corresponding setting suggestion information is displayed, the setting suggestion information can be provided fairly to the player who plays the game. Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide the gaming ability of the gaming machine in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages to all the players.

  Further, when an operation that can be performed by the player such as an operation on a dedicated operation device for establishing the output condition of the setting suggestion information is performed, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is displayed. With the displayed configuration, the setting suggestion information is confirmed by the player's intention, and a selection of whether to continue the game with the current gaming machine or move to another gaming machine is made based on the setting suggesting information. Can be made.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the predetermined operation (S1803: Y), the setting suggestion information is output in step S1606. A configuration may be adopted in which output is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to a predetermined display unit (for example, the decorative design display device 479) described above for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Thereby, the display probability of the setting suggestion information (for example, the setting suggestion information is changed every 10 seconds) in a local period of a predetermined period (predetermined period) after the predetermined operation is performed, compared to other periods. Since the displayed time ratio) increases, the displayed setting suggestion information can be easily recognized by the player.

  At this time, in a configuration in which the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased in a certain period after the player can perform an operation that can be performed, compared to other periods, the operation after the operation performed by the player himself Therefore, it is easy to associate the displayed setting suggestion information with the user's own operation, and also in this respect, it is easy for the player to recognize the displayed setting suggestion information. In addition, the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased in a certain period after an operation that can be performed by a specific person other than the player (for example, an employee of the game arcade) is performed as compared to other periods. In this case, by making it easier for the player to recognize the setting suggestion information after a certain operation other than the player has performed a certain operation, the player can be prevented from having a distrust of the operation. .

  Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 100 is configured to periodically (eg, every hour) display setting suggestion information on a predetermined display unit at predetermined intervals that are unlikely to be visually recognized by the player, When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information about the operation is satisfied, the predetermined operation is performed by shortening the display interval (for example, every two seconds) only for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). A configuration in which the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased in a local period of a predetermined period (predetermined period) after the start, compared to other periods. In such a configuration, the same effect as in the case where the setting suggestion information is displayed for a certain period after the predetermined operation is performed can be obtained.

  In addition, the condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to the player so as to be visually recognizable is a predetermined operation during the game in which the player is playing the game or immediately after the game is stopped or before the player plays the game. Alternatively, it may be added as one of the conditions whether or not a predetermined operation is performed after a certain period of time in which a game is not being played (for example, during a customer waiting effect). For example, during the game and after the player stops firing the game ball and before the customer waiting effect is started (including during the display of a special symbol or a normal symbol), or The condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to the player so as to be visually recognizable may be changed depending on whether the effect is being executed.

  That is, one of the output conditions of the setting suggestion information is that an employee or the like of the game hall opens the front block 102 and performs some work, and a predetermined operation corresponding to this output condition is performed during the game or immediately after the game is stopped. In this case, the setting suggestion information may be output so as to be visually recognizable to the player with a higher probability than during the customer-waiting effect. As a result, setting suggestion information can be output to the player so as to be visible to the player, as one of the compensations when the player is interrupted by the employee of the game hall or the like. Further, the length of time during which the game is interrupted may be set as one of the conditions for outputting the setting suggestion information so that it can be visually recognized by the player. For example, the time during which the front block 102 is opened is counted, and the time is counted. Has reached a certain time or longer, the setting suggestion information may be output with a higher probability than before or always so as to be visible to the player.

  In addition, when the predetermined operation other than immediately after the game is stopped during the game or the game is stopped, for example, when a predetermined operation is performed during a customer waiting effect, with a higher probability than before the operation, or always The setting suggestion information may be output so as to be visible to the player. Thereby, when an employee of the game arcade performs an operation on a gaming machine in which a game is not performed, it is possible to cause the player to expect the output of setting suggestion information and to have an interest in the gaming machine. Operation can be easily enhanced.

  Further, the setting suggestion information may not be output so as to be visible to the player, or the probability of outputting the setting suggestion information may be reduced by an employee of the game hall or the like. For example, a part of the input operation device 260 By closing the front block 102 while pressing, control is performed so that setting suggestion information is not output to the player so that the setting suggestion information can be visually recognized for a predetermined period (for example, one hour after the operation). Good. Thereby, at least a part of the output possibility of the setting suggestion information can be set by the employee of the game hall or the like, and the setting flexibility on the game hall side can be increased.

  Further, when the condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player is satisfied, the player is present in front of the gaming machine as a timing to start outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player. It may be after the situation is detected by a detection device such as a camera or a sensor, or after the game is started by touching the firing handle 252. That is, information output may be in a standby state until the situation where the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion information is set, and thereafter, the setting suggestion information may be output so as to be visually recognizable to the player.

  In addition, when the condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output to the player in a certain mode (for example, small characters), and thereafter, the same or the same information is output. When another output condition is established within a certain period, the output condition is displayed in a different manner from the previous one (for example, a display that is easy for the player to visually recognize, is displayed in larger characters than the previous one, and is a display that makes it easy to determine the setting). The setting suggestion information may be output to be visible to the player.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment has a function of preventing intrusion into a game (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “intrusion prevention function”). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the ninth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to eighth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram related to an example of the anti-sinking function provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting a throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls. Is configured as

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a countermeasure for immersion in the game, an attention display urging the player to pay attention to an excessive game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at a predetermined time. Specifically, in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol or the second special symbol big hit lottery), a warning display is displayed when a loss (big hit non-winning) continues for a predetermined number of times selected by the lottery. Is done.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000, one of the numbers from the range of 200 to 400 is selected by lottery, and the selection is performed. When the losing variation display of the given number of times (that is, the variation display of the special symbol when the losing is made in the special symbol lottery) occurs continuously, the attention display is displayed after the end of the last losing variation display. 479.

  On the other hand, when the number of continuous losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, any one of the numbers from the range of 100 to 200 is selected by lottery, and the variation display of the selected number is performed. Is displayed continuously after the last loss variation display is completed. In other words, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, the warning display can be displayed at a shorter interval than when the number of consecutive losses is less than 1000.

  Specifically, the sub-control board 940 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a continuous loss counter (not shown). The continuous loss counter is a counter that counts the continuous number of losses in the special symbol lottery. When the sub-control board 940 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 920, it indicates that the variation pattern command has won a big hit in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery). , The continuation-of-loss counter is reset, and if the variation pattern command indicates that the big hit has not been won in the special symbol lottery (that is, it is a losing), 1 is added to the continuation-of-loss counter.

  The variation pattern command is a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). In S1217 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the main control board 920 sets the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 in the unit game relating to the special symbol to the current game state and the lottery. As a result, a selection is made based on the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held, and in S1219, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is set. . The main control board 920 outputs the fluctuation pattern command set in S1219 to the sub-control board 940 in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  The sub-control board 940 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a display time lottery counter (not shown), a conversion table (not shown), and a display time monitoring counter (not shown). . The display time lottery counter is a counter for performing a lottery at the next display time of the caution display. The display time lottery counter is configured as a loop counter within a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “200”), and is updated periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 4 ms (milliseconds)).

  The conversion table is a table for converting the value of the display time lottery counter into the number of continuous loss change displays as the next display time of the caution display. The conversion table is prepared for each type of range that is set as the number of consecutive loss change displays that is the next display time of the caution display. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, the type of the range set as the continuous number of the loss variation display to be the next display time of the caution display is less than 1000 when the number of continuous loss in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000 times. In the case where two types are provided, the conversion table for converting the value of the display time lottery counter into each number from 200 times to 400 times (hereinafter, this table is referred to as “first conversion” for convenience). And a conversion table for converting the value of the display time lottery counter into each number from 100 to 200 (hereinafter, this table is also referred to as a “second conversion table” for convenience). ing.

  The sub-control board 940 reads the value of the display time lottery counter when a predetermined read time has come. The reading time of the display time lottery counter is a time when a predetermined value (for example, “2”) set as a reading initial value of the display time lottery counter in the continuous loss counter is reached, and a next display time of the caution display. This is the time when the number of continuous loss fluctuation displays determined as “1” has elapsed.

  When reading the value of the display time lottery counter, the sub-control board 940 refers to the conversion table and selects the number of consecutive loss variation displays corresponding to the read value as the next display time of the caution display. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control board 940 reads the value of the continuation-of-loss counter when the reading time has come, and converts the value corresponding to the read value in the first conversion table or the second conversion table. Select a table to browse.

  In the case where a plurality of ranges are set as the number of continuous loss change displays as the next display time of the caution display, a different display time lottery counter is prepared for each type of the range. Is also good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 36, the loop counter from “0” to “200” used when the number of continuous loss in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000, and the number of continuous loss in the special symbol lottery are A configuration in which a loop counter from “0” to “100” used when the number of times is 1,000 or more may be provided.

  The display time monitoring counter is a counter for monitoring the arrival of the display time of the warning display. The sub-control board 940 sets the selected number of times to the display time monitoring counter when selecting the continuous number of the loss variation display as the next display time of the caution display based on the value of the display time standby counter. When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 920 indicates that a loss has occurred in the special symbol lottery, the sub control board 940 subtracts 1 from the display timing monitoring counter, and the display timing monitoring counter after the subtraction reaches zero. In this case, it is determined that the display time of the attention display has come. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command received from the main control board 920 indicates that the big hit has been won in the special symbol lottery, the sub control board 940 resets the display timing monitoring counter.

  Note that the sub-control board 940 may be configured to add 1 to the display timing monitoring counter when the variation pattern command received from the main control board 920 indicates that a loss has occurred in the special symbol lottery. In such a case, when the continuous number of losing change displays as the next display time of the caution display is selected, the selected number is stored in a predetermined position of the RAM of the sub-control board 940, and the display time monitoring counter after the addition is added. May be configured to determine that the display time of the caution display has come when the value of has reached the value stored in the RAM.

  When the sub-control board 940 determines that the display time of the warning display has come based on the value of the display time monitoring counter, the sub-control board 940 displays the warning display on the decorative symbol display device 479 for a predetermined period after the end of the last loss variation display. To display. The display period of the warning display may be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), or may be a period until the end of the variable display performed after the last loss variable display.

  The attention display displayed on the decorative design display device 479 is, for example, a character string that prompts the player to pay attention to an excessive game, such as “Let's pay attention to excessive game.” Or a combination of the character string and a predetermined image. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which an image such as a mark that reminds a player of excessive game attention is displayed as an attention display.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is set as a countermeasure for immersion in the game, setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed at a predetermined time. It is configured to be. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, in the case of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, in which the first hit probability is set to the lowest game mode (that is, the first rank probability) in the type, When the number of continuous losing in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed at a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/10), and the decorative symbol display device is displayed after displaying the attention information. 479.

  Note that the setting suggestion information may be displayed after the display of the caution information is completed, or may be displayed together with the caution information a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the display of the caution information is started. It may be a configuration. Further, the display period of the setting suggestion information may be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or a period until the display of the caution information ends.

  On the other hand, even when the first winning probability is set in the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type in each type, the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery is less than 1,000. Is set, the setting suggestion information is not displayed. In addition, in the case of a game mode in which the initial hit probability is not the lowest among the types in the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type (that is, the second stage probability and the third stage probability), a special symbol is provided. The configuration suggestion information is configured not to be displayed regardless of the number of consecutive losses in the lottery.

  Specifically, the sub control board 940 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a display lottery counter (not shown). The display lottery counter is a counter for performing a lottery for selecting whether to display setting suggestion information. The display lottery counter is configured as a loop counter in a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “9”), and is updated periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 4 ms (milliseconds)). As for the value of the display lottery counter, a value corresponding to the display of the setting suggestion information is set in advance with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/10).

  When the sub control board 940 determines that the display time of the caution display has arrived based on the value of the display time monitoring counter, the currently set game mode is changed to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability (this embodiment In this case, if the game mode has the first-stage probability in each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, the value of the display lottery counter is read. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control board 920 sets the value corresponding to the selected game mode every time the setting of the game mode is changed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. Output to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 stores the value received from the main control board 920.

  When reading the value of the display lottery counter, if the read value is a value corresponding to the display of the setting suggestion information, the sub-control board 940 displays a caution display on the decorative symbol display device 479 and then displays the current setting. The setting suggestion information corresponding to the played game mode (that is, the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability) is displayed. When displaying the setting suggestion information, the configuration suggesting information may be displayed in synchronization with the display of the caution display, or the configuration may be such that the warning display is displayed after displaying the setting suggesting information. Is also good.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the loss is continued for the number of times selected based on the value of the display time lottery counter in the special symbol lottery (the big hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the excessive It is configured to display an attention display for urging the player to pay attention to a special game. Therefore, a situation occurs in which the player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of game balls (game value) by losing a predetermined number of times (number of times selected based on the value of the display time lottery counter) in the special symbol lottery. In such a case, the attention display is displayed with a higher probability than before the situation is reached, so that the player in the situation can easily recognize the attention display. Thus, in a situation where the player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of the game balls, the player who has fallen into the situation can be encouraged to suppress the game, thereby allowing the player to move away from the pachinko machine 100 and temporarily return to the current state. Can provide an opportunity to reconfirm.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 36, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, the attention display is displayed at shorter intervals than when the number of consecutive losses is less than 1000. The frequency of alerting the player is increased as the accumulation of the consumption of the game balls increases, so that the player can be appropriately encouraged to pay attention to the excessive game. .

  Further, the display interval of the attention display is randomly selected from a predetermined range based on the value of the display time lottery counter, so that the display interval can be prevented from being constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display interval of the attention display from becoming constant and the player's consciousness of the attention display from becoming lean.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a case where the first hit probability is set to be the lowest in each type (top type, middle type, bottom type) in the type (that is, the first stage probability). In the case where the number of continuous losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed with a predetermined probability.

  Therefore, also in this case, the player consumes a predetermined amount or more of game balls (game value) such that the loss is continued a predetermined number of times (the number of times selected based on the value of the display time lottery counter) in the special symbol lottery. When a situation occurs, the setting suggestion information is displayed with a higher probability than before the situation, so that the player in the situation can easily recognize the setting suggestion information.

  Since the setting suggestion information displayed in such a case is the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability in each type (top type, middle type, bottom type), the game is continued. Since the situation may not improve, it is easy for the player to select to stop the game. Therefore, since the setting suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player who has fallen into a situation of consuming a predetermined amount or more of the game balls to suppress the game. It can provide an opportunity to reconfirm the current situation once away.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 36, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, the setting suggestion information is displayed after the display of the caution information, but the number of consecutive consecutive characters is less than 1000. In such a case, it is configured not to display the setting suggestion information after the display of the attention information, and as the accumulation of the consumption of the game balls increases, the frequency of calling the player's attention is increased. Attention to excessive gaming can be appropriately encouraged.

  In addition, the display of the setting suggestion information is configured to be performed with a predetermined probability with respect to the number of times the warning information is displayed, so that the setting suggestion information is displayed after the display of the warning information, and after the warning information is displayed. The case where the setting suggestion information is not displayed can be randomly generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness of the display of the setting suggestion information and the warning display displayed before the setting suggestion information from becoming lean.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, a right starting winning device 3432 and a large winning device 3434 arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420 are characteristically constituted.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the tenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described first to ninth embodiments, or may be added to the configuration of the above-described first to ninth embodiments. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the game board 400X1 in the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 37, on the game board 400X, a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412, a central structure 420 arranged substantially at the center of the base 401, a middle starting winning device 431A, 431B, a general The winning devices 439A and 439B are provided in the same manner as the gaming board 400 (see FIG. 7), and the right starting winning device 3432 is located on the lower right side of the central structure 420 and downstream of the starting device 436. And a large winning device 3433 is provided below the right starting winning device 3432.

  The right starting prize device 3432 and the large prize device 3433 are constituted by a part of a prize device unit 3200 (see FIG. 38) which will be described later. The entrance portion of the device 3433 is located on the front side, and most of the winning device unit 3200 including the right starting winning device 3432 is located behind the front surface of the base 401. As shown in FIG. 37, the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is configured to be guided by the nail 411 only to the entrance portion 3211 which is one of the entrances of the winning device unit 3200.

  The right starting winning device 3432 is a starting winning device according to the second special symbol, similarly to the right starting winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). The game board 400X1 includes a switch similar to the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) (hereinafter, this switch is referred to as “right start winning switch” for convenience) as detecting means for detecting the passage of a game ball corresponding to the right start winning device 3432. A winning switch 3442 ”is also provided.

  The entrance portion (entrance) of the game ball in the right starting winning device 3432 is configured as a winning opening, and the passing of the gaming ball entering the winning opening is detected by the right starting winning switch 3442, and thereafter, the rear surface of the base 401. It is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the side.

  The right starting prize device 3432 has an entry control mechanism 3452 that changes the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside thereof by a transition between an entry allowed position and an entry prohibited position, and a right entry that drives the entry control mechanism 3452. A solenoid similar to the regulating solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) (hereinafter, this solenoid is also referred to as “entry regulating solenoid 3462” for convenience) is provided.

  The entry control mechanism 3452 includes a movable member 3452A (see FIGS. 38 and 39) driven by the entry control solenoid 3462. When the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is in the entry-prohibited position (first guiding state), the movable member 3452A is arranged to close (or narrow) the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball is started rightward. Although it is not possible to enter the device 3432, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitting posture (second guiding state), the movable member 3452A is arranged to open the game ball in the entrance so that the game ball can be guided. It is possible to enter the right starting winning device 3432.

  The right entry restriction mechanism 3452 responds to driving by the entry restriction solenoid 3462 when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery (normal symbol lottery) based on detection by the start switch 446. Then, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture only for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

  The big winning device 3434 is a winning device that functions as the big winning device similar to the upper winning device 434. The gaming board 400X1 is provided with a big prize switch 3444 (see FIG. 38) similar to the upper prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10) as a detecting means for detecting the passage of a game ball corresponding to the big prize device 3434. ing.

  The entrance portion (entrance) of the gaming ball in the special winning device 3434 forms a winning opening, and the passing of the gaming ball entering the winning opening is detected by the special winning switch 3444, and thereafter, formed on the base 401. It is guided through a through hole to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401.

  The large winning prize device 3434 changes an attitude of the approach control mechanism 3454 and an approach control mechanism that controls the approach of the game ball into the inside thereof by shifting between the approach permitting attitude and the approach prohibition attitude. An entry control solenoid similar to the solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) (hereinafter, this solenoid is also referred to as “entry control solenoid 3464” for convenience) is provided.

  The entry control mechanism 3454 includes a movable member 3454A (see FIG. 38) driven by the entry control solenoid 3464. When the entry control mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibited position (entry restricted state), since the movable member 3454A is arranged to close the entrance (winning opening), the game ball cannot enter the big winning device 3434, but the entry does not occur. When the regulating mechanism 3454 is in the approach permitting posture (entry permitting state), the arrangement is such that the movable member 3454A opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the special winning device 3434.

  The large prize winning device 3434 allows a game ball to enter when a large hit lottery is won. Specifically, the lottery based on the detection of the game balls that have entered the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B according to the first special symbol by the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B (ie, the first special symbol lottery) is won. In the case where the game ball entered the right start winning device 3432 related to the second special symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the right start winning switch 3442 (that is, the second special symbol lottery), The entry control solenoid 3464 operates. By this operation, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a type of big hit, a normal big hit that shifts to a normal game state via a time saving game state after the end of the special game state, and a time saving game state after the end of the special game state And a probable big hit that shifts to a normal game state. Therefore, when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state via the time-saving game state after the special game state shifted based on the winning. On the other hand, when the winning in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a win, the game shifts to the normal game state via the certain game state after the special game state shifted based on the win.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special winning device 3434 does not have the specific passage and the non-specific passage like the lower special winning device 433 (see FIG. 7). Is configured as a large prize winning device similar to the lower large prize winning device 433, and when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning device 3434 passes through a specific passage in the special gaming state, the game machine shifts to the certain variable gaming state after the special gaming state. Is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, a configuration of the winning device unit 3200 including the right starting winning device 3432 and the big winning device 3434 will be described. FIG. 38 is a schematic front view of the winning device unit 3200, and FIG. 39 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the winning device unit 3200 viewed from the front side. Note that FIG. 38 shows a case where the entry control mechanism 3452 of the right starting winning device 3432 is in the entry prohibited position, and the entry control mechanism 3454 of the large winning device 3434 is in the entry prohibited position.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the right starting winning device 3432 and the big winning device 3434 are arranged on the gaming board 400X1 in the form of a winning device unit 3200 in which these are unitized. As shown in FIG. 39, the prize device unit 3200 includes a first member 3210 in which a passage of a game ball is formed, and a second member 3240 disposed behind the first member 3210 to configure the large prize device 3434. And a third member 3270 provided with a right starting winning device 3432 disposed on the rear side of the second member 3240.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 41, a flowing path of a game ball in the winning device unit 3200 will be described. FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C) are simplified cross-sectional views of the prize winning device unit 3200 taken along lines X1-X1, X2-X2, and X3-X3 in FIG. 38, respectively. 40B is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the right starting winning device 3432 (entering restriction mechanism 3452) in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG.

  In each of FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C), the case where the entry control mechanism 3454 of the special winning device 3434 is in the entry prohibited position is shown. Also, FIG. 40 (B) illustrates a case where the entry control mechanism 3452 of the right starting winning device 3432 is in an entry prohibited position. In FIG. 40C, the arrangement of the entry control mechanism 3452 and the passage portions 3216 and 3217 in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B is shown by a dashed line for reference, and the front side of the winning device unit 3200 is shown. Is shown in FIG. In FIGS. 40 and 41, for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the prize device unit 3200 is shown, and the flow path of the game ball is indicated by a solid line or a dashed line arrow.

  The prize device unit 3200 has two entrances 3211 and 3212 serving as entrances into which a game ball flowing down in a region on the right side of the central structure 420 can enter, and a game ball entering the entrance 3211 or the entrance 3212 can pass therethrough. And passage portions 3213 to 3221 and 3241. Each of the passage portions 3213 to 3221 and 3241 provided in the winning device unit 3200 is configured as a passage through which game balls can pass one by one (in a line).

  The passage portion 3213 is a passage provided on the downstream side of the entrance portion 3212 and leading to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401. Then, it is discharged through the passage portion 3213 to the collection / discharge passage.

  The passage portion 3214 is a passage provided on the downstream side with respect to the entrance portion 3211 and guiding a game ball entered from the entrance portion 3211 to the left side (the direction of the arrow Q1 in FIG. 40A). The passage portion 3215 is a passage provided on the downstream side of the passage portion 3214 and extending in the vertical direction, and guides game balls that have entered through the passage portion 3214 to the vertical direction side.

  The passage portion 3216 and the passage portion 3217 are passages branched on the downstream side of the passage portion 3215, and game balls that have passed through the passage portion 3215 can enter. As shown in FIG. 38, the passage portion 3215 has an opening at the front side thereof through which the game ball can pass. Without entering any of the portions 3217, the air can be discharged (guided) from the opening to the front side with respect to the opening. The configuration in which game balls passing through the passage portion 3215 are discharged to the front side will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  Therefore, among the game balls passing through the passage portion 3215, the game balls not discharged to the front side from the opening formed in the front side of the passage portion 3215 enter either the passage portion 3216 or the passage portion 3217. Note that, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game balls passing through the passage portion 3215 are basically configured to fall on the support surface 3217A of the game balls inclined downward to the right side. Many of the game balls that have passed through the passage portion 3215 without being discharged to the side are guided rightward by the support surface 3217A and enter the passage portion 3217.

  The passage portion 3216 is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered through the passage portion 3215 to the left side and then to the front side, as indicated by the arrow Q2 in FIG. 40B. As shown in FIG. 40B, an opening 3216A that opens forward is formed on the downstream side of the passage 3216, so that game balls passing through the passage 3216 are discharged from the opening 3216A, It falls into the passage portion 3220 located on the front lower side with respect to the opening 3216A.

  The passage portion 3217 is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered via the passage portion 3215 to the right side as indicated by an arrow Q3 in FIG. The game ball is guided by the passage portion 3217 to the movable member 3452A of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the right starting winning device 3432, and enters the movable member 3452A from the entrance portion 3452A1 (see FIG. 41).

  The game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is guided to either the passage portion 3218 or the passage portion 3241 according to the posture of the entry restriction mechanism 3452. As shown in FIG. 41 (A), when the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture (first guiding state), the exit 3452A2 of the game ball in the movable member 3452A separates the passage 3218 from the passage 3241. Of the wall portion which is directed forward from the wall portion 3218B also serving as a side (that is, the side of the passage portion 3218), and which is erected around the support surface 3452A3 which supports the game ball from below in the movable member 3452A, The portion 3452A4 is disposed at a position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3241. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibited position, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A advances in the direction of the arrow Q4 in FIG. 41A and enters the passage 3218.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41B, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitting posture (second guidance state), the outlet 3452A2 is located on the rear side of the wall 3218B (that is, on the side of the passage 3241). The wall 3452A5 of the wall erected around the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A is arranged at a position where the wall 3452A5 regulates the entry of the game ball into the passage 3218. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A advances in the direction of the arrow Q5 in FIG. 41B and enters the passage portion 3241.

  The passage portion 3218 is a passage that guides the game ball to the right side and then to the front side, as indicated by an arrow Q6 in FIG. 40 (B). As shown in FIG. 40B, an opening 3218A that opens forward is formed on the downstream side of the passage 3218, so that game balls passing through the passage 3218 are discharged from the opening 3218A, It falls into the passage part 3219 located on the front lower side with respect to the opening 3218A. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the movable member 3452A into the passage portion 3218 falls on the passage portion 3219 through the opening 3218A. The passage portion 3219 is a passage that guides the game ball to the left side as indicated by an arrow Q7 in FIG.

  An entrance (winning opening) of the special winning device 3434 is provided on the downstream side of the passage portion 3219. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 3454 of the special winning device 3434 is in the entry permitting posture, the game ball passing through the passage portion 3218 passes through the passage portion 3221 provided in the internal space of the special winning device 3434 (see FIG. 38). , And guided to the special winning switch 3444 by the passage portion 3221.

  On the other hand, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the special winning device 3434 is in the entry prohibition position, the game ball passing through the passage portion 3219 is moved by the movable member 3454A of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 as indicated by an arrow Q8 in FIG. On the support surface of the game ball (the surface that supports the lower side of the game ball) in the left direction, and enters the passage portion 3220.

  The passage portion 3220 is a passage that guides the game ball to the left direction as indicated by an arrow Q9 in FIG. 40 (C). The downstream side of the passage portion 3219 is a lower side with respect to the central structure 420 and is open to a region on the right side with respect to the middle starting winning devices 431A and 431B. Discharged to the area.

  The passage portion 3241 is a passage provided in the right starting winning device 3432, and is provided downstream of the movable member 3454A of the entry control mechanism 3454. In the right starting winning device 3432 of the present embodiment, the entrance of the passage portion 3241 constitutes an entrance (winning opening) of the right starting winning device 3432. The passage portion 3241 guides the game ball discharged from the movable member 3452A to the right start winning switch 3442. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the movable member 3452A to the passage portion 3241 is detected by the right start winning switch 3442.

  Next, the movable member 3452A of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 in the right starting winning device 3432 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 (A) is a perspective view of the movable member 3452A as viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 42 (B) is a perspective view of the movable member 3452A as viewed from the rear left side. FIG. 43 is a sectional view taken along a plane passing through a rotation shaft 3452B for rotating the movable member 3452A of the entry restricting mechanism 3452 in the entry prohibition position, and the upstream passage 3217 and the downstream passage 3218 with respect to the movable member 3452A. It is sectional drawing which looked at the cross section at the time of doing from the front.

  FIG. 44A is a top view of the movable member 3452A in a case where the entry control mechanism 3452 takes an entry prohibition position, and FIG. 44B is a view showing a movable member 3452A in a case where the entry control mechanism 3452 takes an entry permission position. FIG. FIG. 45 is a top view of the movable member 3452A for explaining the behavior of the game ball in contact with the walls 3452A4 and 3452A5.

  For reference, in FIGS. 44A and 45A, the movable member 3452A in the case where the entry control mechanism 3452 takes the entry allowable posture is illustrated by a dashed line, and FIGS. In FIG. 45 (B), the movable member 3452A in the case where the entry control mechanism 3452 takes the entry allowable posture is shown by a dashed line. 44 and 45, for reference, the wall portion 3218B is illustrated, and the rotation direction of the movable member 3452A is illustrated by an arrow. In FIG. 45, for reference, an example of a game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A is illustrated, and an example of a traveling direction of the game ball is illustrated by an arrow.

  The movable member 3452A includes an entrance portion 3452A1 serving as an entrance of a game ball, an exit portion 3452A2 serving as an exit of a game ball, a support surface 3452A3 formed between the entrance portion 3452A1 and the exit portion 3452A2, and a support surface 3452A3. Walls 3452A4, 3452A5, which are set up between the entrance 3452A1 and the exit 3452A2, and a ball escape 3452A6 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the entrance portion 3452A1 functions as an entrance through which a game ball flowing down the passage portion 3217 can enter regardless of whether the entry restriction mechanism 3452 takes an entry-prohibited position or an entry-permitted position.

  In the state where the right starting winning device 3432 is provided on the game board 400X1, the entrance portion 3452A1 is a game ball flowing down the passage portion 3217 while being supported by the support surface 3217A of the game ball in the passage portion 3217. 43 (for example, as shown in FIG. 43, a position below the support surface 3217A).

  The outlet 3452A2 is formed between the wall 3452A4 and the wall 3452A5, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, the exit portion 3452A2 discharges the game ball to the passage portion 3218 when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibited position, and plays the game ball when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitted position. Function as an outlet for discharging the fluid into the passage portion 3241.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the support surface 3452A3 is a surface that is inclined downward from the upstream side (the side of the inlet 3452A1) toward the downstream side (the side of the outlet 3452A2). Thus, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A via the entrance 3452A1 is guided to the exit 3452A2 while its lower side is supported by the support surface 3452A3.

  As shown in FIG. 43, a step between the support surface 3452A3 and the entrance 3452A1 is such that the upstream side of the support surface 3452A3 (the side of the entrance 3452A1) is lower than the entrance 3452A1 (vertically lower side). Since the step portion is formed, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (the support surface 3452A3) via the entrance 3452A1 is discharged from the movable member 3452A via the entrance 3452A1, and returns to the passage 3217 again. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 43, when the right starting winning device 3432 is provided on the game board 400X1, the upstream side of the support surface 3452A3 is provided between the support surface 3452A3 and the support surface 3217A of the game ball in the passage portion 3217. A step (step portion) in which the entrance 3452A1) is below (vertically below) the support surface 3217A is formed.

  As described above, since the support surface 3452A3 is provided such that its upstream side is below the step with respect to the support surface 3217A, the movement of the game ball to the downstream side can be reduced by moving down the step. . In addition, the angle (gradient) of the descending slope on the support surface 3452A3 is reduced by the magnitude of the step between the support surface 3217A and the upstream side (the side of the entrance portion 3452A1) of the support surface 3452A3, and toward the downstream side of the game ball. Movement can be slow. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (the support surface 3452A3) from returning to the passage portion 3217 again.

  As shown in FIG. 43, a rotation shaft 3452B extending in the vertical direction is provided at a position below the member on which the support surface 3452A3 is formed as a rotation center of the movable member 3452A. The rotation shaft 3452B is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that rotates the rotation shaft 3452B around the axis by the driving force of the entry restriction solenoid 3462, and is rotated around the axis by the driving of the entry restriction solenoid 3462. .

  The movable member 3452A rotates around the vertical side (ie, the side in which the 3452A6 extends) by the rotation of the rotation shaft 3452B. That is, the movable member 3452A is configured to be rotatable around the vertical side in response to the operation of the entry restriction solenoid 3462. The “vertical direction side” is not necessarily required to be the vertical direction, and may be a direction slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  Specifically, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition position and the entry control solenoid 3462 is operated, the rotating shaft 3452B rotates counterclockwise in a top view, thereby moving the movable member 3452A. Rotates counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow RA in FIG. 44A) when viewed from above. In the following description, with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 3452B, the counterclockwise rotation when viewed from above is simply referred to as “counterclockwise rotation”.

  The movable member 3452A has a protrusion 3452A7 protruding outwardly formed on the side of the wall 3152A4 with respect to the outlet 3452A2, and is movable in the direction of the arrow RA (counterclockwise). In the position 3452A, at the position where the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowable posture, the projection 3452A7 comes into contact with the projection K (see FIG. 41) formed on the winning device unit 3200 and stops.

  Accordingly, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitting posture, the outlet 3452A2 of the movable member 3452A faces rearward of the wall 3218B (that is, the side of the passage 3241) (FIG. 44B). ), The game ball on the support surface 3452A3 (the game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3) can be discharged to the passage portion 3241.

  On the other hand, when the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitting posture and the entry control solenoid 3462 is operated, the rotating shaft 3452B rotates clockwise in the top view, thereby moving the movable member 3452A in the top view. At a clockwise direction (the direction of arrow RB in FIG. 44B). In the following description, with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 3452B, clockwise in top view is simply referred to as “clockwise”.

  The movable member 3452A that rotates in the direction of the arrow RB (clockwise direction) stops at the position where the entry control mechanism 3452 assumes the entry prohibition posture. Accordingly, when the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition position, the outlet 3452A2 of the movable member 3452A faces the side of the passage 3218 from the wall 3218B (see FIGS. 41A and 44A). ), The game balls on the support surface 3452A3 can be discharged to the passage 3218.

  As described above, the entry restricting mechanism 3452 of the right starting winning device 3432 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that the movable member 3452A rotatable around the vertical side rotates and the entry prohibition position and the entry prohibition position are set. It is possible to switch between the allowable posture and the allowable posture.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the wall portion 3452A4 functions as a portion that restricts the entry of a game ball into the passage portion 3241 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition position, and the wall portion 3452A5 has the entry restriction mechanism 3452. Functions as a portion that restricts the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3218 when is in the entry allowable posture.

  As shown in FIG. 42, each of the wall portions 3452A4 and 3452A5 is located at each end of the inlet portion 3452A1, and is located at each end of the outlet portion 3452A2. Thereby, it functions as a portion for guiding a game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3452A3 to the exit portion 3452A2.

  The size of the wall portion 3452A5 is smaller than the size of the wall portion 3452A4. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the length (that is, the height) of the wall portion 3452A5 in the vertical direction with respect to the support surface 3452A3 is configured to be smaller than that of the wall portion 3452A4.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the wall portion 3452A5 is a wall portion located on the front side in a state where the right starting winning device 3432 is arranged on the gaming board 400X1, and thus has a lower height than the wall portion 3452A4. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (that is, the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3452A3).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43, the wall 3452A5 has a notch that is larger at the outlet 3452A2 side when the wall 3452A5 is viewed from the front than at the outlet 3452A2 when the wall 3452A4 is viewed from the front. It is configured into a shape.

  More specifically, the end of the wall 3452A5 on the outlet 3452A2 side of the wall 3452A5 is located farther from the outlet 3452A2 than the end of the wall 3452A4 on the side of the outlet 3452A2. The angle between the direction in which the end of the wall 3452A5 on the side of the outlet 3452A2 extends and the support surface 3452A3 is smaller than the angle between the direction in which the end of the wall 3452A4 on the side of the outlet 3452A2 extends and the support surface 3452A3. Small acute angles.

  As described above, the wall portion 3452A5 of the movable member 3452A has a shape that is largely cut away on the outlet portion 3452A2 side (more specifically, a shape that is largely cut away as compared with the shape of the wall portion 3452A4 on the outlet portion 3452A2 side). 43), the end of the wall 3452A5 on the outlet 3452A2 side is upstream of the end of the wall 3452A4 on the outlet 3452A2 side (that is, the outlet 3452A2), as shown in FIG. Away from the side).

  As a result, when the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permitted position, it is difficult for the wall portion 3452A4 to open the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241 (that is, the game ball to the passage portion 3241 by the wall portion 3452A4). It is difficult for the entry restriction of the game ball to be released), and it is difficult for the wall portion 3452A5 to close the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218 (that is, entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3218 by the wall portion 3452A5 is difficult to be restricted).

  Specifically, when the movable member 3452A rotates counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow RA in FIG. 44A), the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry allowed position (switches). A period from the start of the transition until the wall portion 3452A5 reaches a position at which the game ball cannot enter the passage portion 3218 (that is, even if the movable member 3452A is rotated, the game ball enters the passage portion 3218). The period during which the entry is possible) is a period (from the time when the wall portion 3452A4 reaches the position at which the game ball can enter the passage portion 3241 after the start of the transition, until the entry control mechanism 3452 reaches the entry allowable posture. That is, the length can be made longer than a period during which the game ball can enter the passage portion 3241 during the rotation of the movable member 3452A).

  On the other hand, when the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry permission position to the entry prohibition position, the wall portion 3452A4 easily closes the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241 (that is, the game ball enters the passage portion 3241 by the wall portion 3452A4). It is easy for entry to be restricted), and the wall portion 3452A5 easily opens the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218 (that is, the entry restriction of the game ball to the passage portion 3218 by the wall portion 3452A5 is easily released).

  Specifically, when the movable member 3452A rotates clockwise (in the direction of the arrow RB in FIG. 44B) and the entry restricting mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry permitting position to the entry prohibition position, the transition starts. A period from the time when the wall portion 3452A5 reaches a position at which the game ball can enter the passage portion 3218 to the time when the entry control mechanism 3452 reaches the entry prohibition position (that is, the passage portion during rotation of the movable member 3452A). The period during which the game ball can enter the 3218) is the period from the start of the transition until the wall 3452A4 reaches a position where the game ball cannot enter the passage 3241 (ie, the movable member). Even if the 3452A rotates, it can be made longer than a period during which the game ball can enter the passage portion 3241).

  Therefore, the wall portion 3452A5 is formed to have a shape that is notched larger on the outlet portion 3452A2 side than on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the wall portion 3452A4, so that the entry control mechanism 3452 moves from one posture to another. The game ball flowing down on the support surface 3452A3 enters the passage portion 3218 during the transition of the posture when the posture is changed to the posture (that is, from the entry prohibited posture to the entry permitted posture or from the entry permitted posture to the entry prohibited posture). Easy to do.

  Further, since the end of the wall 3452A4 on the side of the outlet 3452A2 is formed downstream (the side of the outlet 3452A2) of the end of the wall 3452A4 on the side of the outlet 3452A2, the downstream side of the wall 3452A5. Can be in contact with the game ball at the position.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), in a state in which the entry control mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitting posture (dashed line), the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 moves the wall portions 3452A4 and 3452A5 near the exit portion 3452A2. When the entry restricting mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry permitting posture to the entry prohibition posture (that is, when the movable member 3452A rotates in the direction of the arrow RB), the game ball is moved to the movable member. As a result of being brought into contact with the wall 3452A4 relatively approaching by the rotation of the 3452A and being repelled toward the wall 3452A5, it is possible to enter the passage 3218 formed forward of the wall 3218B.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), when the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry allowed position (ie, when the movable member 3452A rotates in the direction of the arrow RA), the entry is stopped. In the state where the regulation mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture (dashed line), even if the game ball is located at the same position as in FIG. 45A, the game ball cannot sufficiently contact the wall 3452A5. In such a case, since the traveling direction of the game ball does not change significantly, the game ball cannot enter the passage portion 3241 formed on the rear side of the wall portion 3218B, and the game ball does not enter the wall portion 3218B. It enters the passage 3218 formed on the front side.

  Therefore, also in this respect, during the transition of the entry control mechanism 3452 from one position to another position (that is, from the entry prohibited position to the entry permitted position or from the entry permitted position to the entry prohibited position), the support is maintained. A game ball flowing down on the surface 3452A3 easily enters the passage 3218.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured as a step portion in which the wall 3452A5 side of the support surface 3452A3 on the outlet portion 3452A2 side is lower than the wall portion 3452A4 side. Since the ball escape portion 3452A6 is a stepped portion, it is easy for the game ball to enter, and it is difficult for the entered game ball to return to the upper side of the step. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball escape portion 3452A6 is discharged from the exit portion 3452A2 located downstream of the ball escape portion 3452A6.

  When the entry restricting mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry permitted position (that is, the movable member 3452A rotates in the direction of the arrow RA in FIG. 44A), the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 is It is easy to move relatively to the wall 3452A5 side, which is the opposite side to the moving direction. Therefore, during the transition of the entry restricting mechanism 3452 from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permissible position, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 releases the ball escape portion 3452A6 provided on the wall 3452A5 side on the exit 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3. , The game balls supported by the support surface 3452A3 can be easily discharged to the passage 3218 side.

  In addition, the game ball which is directed toward the wall 3452A5 by the rebound due to the contact with the wall 3452A4 can easily reach the ball escape portion 3452A6. In particular, when the game ball comes into contact with the wall portion 3452A4 during the transition of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 from the entry allowable position to the entry prohibition position, as described above, the game ball is suitably guided to the wall portion 3452A5 side. Therefore, even in such a case, the game balls supported by the support surface 3452A3 can be easily discharged to the passage 3218 side.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the entrance of the ball escape portion 3452A6 has a length between the wall 3452A4 and the wall 3452A5 in the direction from the wall 3452A4 to the wall 3452A5 on the support surface 3452A3. In this structure, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A from the entrance 3452A1 can easily reach the ball escape portion 3452A6.

  That is, since the ball escape portion 3452A6 is provided on the wall 3452A5 side of the support surface 3452A3 on the exit portion 3452A2 side, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A from the entrance portion 3452A1 faces the wall portion 3452A5 on the exit portion 3452A2. The game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is easily discharged to the passage portion 3218.

  As described above, according to the entry control mechanism 3452 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has advanced to the position where it contacts the movable member 3452A can easily advance at a low speed on the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A, and has a passage portion. It is configured to be easily discharged to 3218. For this reason, even if the time for shifting to the entry allowable posture is set longer, it is possible to reduce the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3241 which constitutes the winning opening of the right starting winning device 3432. Therefore, it is possible to provide a prize winning device capable of suppressing occurrence of a prize in a situation where it is desired to suppress occurrence of a prize (for example, during non-working hours) while making it easy for a player to recognize the operation of the right starting prize winning device 3432. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, the entry control mechanism 3454 of the special winning device 3434 will be described. First, the structural configuration and operation of the entry control mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the entry control mechanism 3454 in the winning device unit 3200. More specifically, FIG. 46A is a diagram illustrating a case where the entry control mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibited position, and FIG. 46B is a diagram illustrating the entry control mechanism 3454 during the transition from the entry prohibited position to the entry permitted position. FIG. 46C is a diagram showing a case where the entry control mechanism 3454 is in an entry allowed posture.

  Note that FIG. 46 shows a state in which a plate portion on the front side of the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the first member 3210 and the second member 3240) is cut away. Illustration of hatching is omitted. For reference, in FIG. 46B, the position of the movable member 3454A at the time shown in FIG. 46A is shown by a dashed line, and in FIG. 46C, FIG. The position of the movable member 3454A at the time point shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the entry control mechanism 3454 includes a movable member 3454A, a first link 3454B, a second link 3454C, a first operating portion 3454D, and a second operating portion 3454E. Each of these parts 3454A to 3454E is made of a resin material.

  The first link portion 3454B is disposed below the movable member 3454A, and one end side of the first link portion 3454B is connected to the movable member 3454A so as to be rotatable around the shaft portion J1A via the shaft portion J1A. Is done. The second link portion 3454C is disposed below the movable member 3454A and on the upstream side of the first link portion 3454B (on the side of the passage portion 3219), and one end side of the second link portion 3454C is via the shaft portion J2A. Are connected to the movable member 3454A so as to be rotatable with respect to each other around the shaft portion J2A.

  At a position inside the axial position of the shaft portion J1A in the longitudinal direction of the first link portion 3454B, the shaft portion J1B is axially threaded so that the first link portion 3454B can rotate around the shaft portion J1B, A shaft J2B is inserted through the other end of the second link 3454C so that the second link 3454C can rotate around the shaft J2B. Both the shaft portion J1B and the shaft portion J1B are fixed to the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240). In the entry control mechanism 3454 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the distance between the shaft J2A and the shaft J2B is longer than the distance between the shaft J1A and the shaft J1B.

  As a result, the movable member 3454A, the first link portion 3454B, and the second link portion 3454C constitute a four-node link mechanism using the movable member 3454A as an intermediate link portion. In addition, as described later, the first link portion 3454B functions as a drive link portion in the four-node link mechanism, and the second link portion 3454C functions as a driven link portion.

  A weight 3454F is attached to the other end of the first link 3454B (an end different from the axial position of the shaft J1A). The weight portion 3454F includes a weight made of a material having a higher specific gravity than the resin material (for example, a metal such as iron), and the weight portion 3454F is rotated around the shaft portion J1B so that the first link portion 3454B is rotated in a predetermined direction. Thus, when the first link portion 3454B is moved upward, a restoring force for rotating the first link portion 3454B in the opposite direction is given by its weight.

  It should be noted that the weight portion 3454F of the prize device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240) is moved in a counterclockwise direction in a front view over a predetermined first position around the shaft portion J1B due to its weight. A first stopper portion (not shown) for restricting the rotation is provided. The first link portion 3454B is maintained at the initial position by the first stopper portion in a state where the entry control solenoid 3464 is not driven.

  Further, when the first link portion 3454B is rotated around the shaft portion J1B in the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow F3) as viewed from the front, the second member 3240 rotates beyond the predetermined second position. A second stopper portion (not shown) for restricting the operation is provided. Thus, the first link portion 3454B is configured to be rotatable between a first position, which is an initial position, and a second position, which is a predetermined maximum displacement position which is displaced to a maximum from the initial position.

  In the following, regarding the rotation direction around the shaft portion J1B in the first link portion 3454B and the rotation direction around the shaft portion J2B in the second link portion 3454C, clockwise in front view may be simply referred to as “clockwise”. Counterclockwise in front view is simply referred to as “counterclockwise”.

  When the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position (first position), the movable member 3454A is arranged at a position that closes the entrance of the special winning device 3434, as shown in FIG. That is, when the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is set to the entry prohibited posture (entry restricted state). Note that the movable member 3454A is provided such that when the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position, the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the passage portion 3219 to the passage portion 3220. Therefore, when the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position (that is, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition position), the upper surface of the movable member 3454A moves the game ball entered from the passage portion 3219 to the game ball. It functions as a support surface that guides the downstream side (passage portion 3220 side) while supporting the lower side.

  Between the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B in the first link portion 3454B, a surface on the rear side of the first link portion 3454B closer to the second link portion 3454C than a straight line connecting the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B. A protruding portion 3454B1 protruding axially from the rear side (on the side of the first operating portion 3454D). Although details will be described later, when the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position, a downward force is applied to the protruding portion 3454B1 to rotate the first link portion 3454B clockwise around the axis J1B (arrow F3). Direction).

  The first operating portion 3454D is made of a tree material, and is disposed behind the link portions 3454B and 3454C and between the first link portion 3454B and the second link portion 3454C. The first operating portion 3454D functions as a portion that operates the first link portion 3454B.

  The first operating portion 3454D is configured to be gently bent, and a shaft portion J3A fixed to the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240) is provided at the bent portion. The first operating portion 3454D is pivoted around so as to be rotatable therearound. In the following, regarding the rotation direction around the shaft portion J3A in the first operation portion 3454D, clockwise rotation in front view is simply referred to as “clockwise”, and counterclockwise rotation in front view is simply referred to as “counterclockwise”. .

  At one end of the first operating portion 3454D facing the first link portion 3454B, an opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending from the tip end to the shaft portion J3A side is formed inside. Is provided. The first operating portion 3454D and the first link portion 3454B are engaged by inserting the protruding portion 3454B1 of the first link portion 3454B into the opening formed inside the engaging portion 3454D1.

  The other end of the first operating portion 3454D is provided with a projecting portion 3454D2 that projects axially rearward (toward the second operating portion 3454E) from the rear surface of the first operating portion 3454D.

  The second operating portion 3454E is made of a tree material, and is arranged behind the first operating portion 3454D. The second actuating portion 3454E is driven by the driving force of the entry restricting solenoid 3464, and moves to the initial position and a predetermined maximum displacement position on the left side (arrow F1 direction side) from the initial position, which is displaced to the maximum from the initial position. It is configured to be movable between.

  Specifically, when the entry control solenoid 3464 is in the non-drive state, the second operating portion 3454E is disposed at the initial position, and when the entry control solenoid 3464 is changed from the non-drive state to the drive state, the second operation section is activated. The part 3454E is moved leftward from the initial position to a predetermined maximum displacement position. On the other hand, when the entry control solenoid 3464 is changed from the driving state to the non-driving state, the second operating portion 3454E located at the maximum displacement position is moved rightward to the initial position.

  The second operating part 3454E functions as a part that operates the first operating part 3454D. On the front end side of the second operating portion 3454E, a groove-shaped engaging portion which is open at the front and extends upward from the lower end is provided. By inserting the protruding portion 3454D2 of the first operating portion 3454D into the groove-shaped engaging portion, the second operating portion 3454E and the first operating portion 3454D are engaged.

  Accordingly, when the second operating portion 3454E is moved in the left-right direction, a leftward or rightward force is applied to the protruding portion 3454D2 in accordance with the movement. By moving 3454E, first operating portion 3454D can be rotated around shaft portion J3A.

  Since the protrusion 3454D2 of the first operating portion 3454D is inserted into the engaging portion formed on the front end side of the second operating portion 3454E, the first operating portion when the second operating portion 3454E is at the initial position. The position of 3454D is the initial position of the first operating portion 3454D, and the position of the first operating portion 3454D when the second operating portion 3454E is the maximum displacement position is the maximum displacement of the first operating portion 3454D with respect to the initial position. Position.

  When the entry restricting solenoid 3464 is not driven, that is, when the first operating portion 3454D and the second operating portion 3454E are at the initial positions, as shown in FIG. The engagement portion 3454D1 does not contact the upper side of the protrusion 3454B1 of the first link portion 3454B at the initial position. Therefore, when the entry control solenoid 3464 is not driven, the first link portion 3454B is maintained at the initial position, and the entry control mechanism 3454 assumes the entry prohibition posture.

  When the entry control solenoid 3464 changes from the non-driving state to the driving state, the second operating portion 3454E is moved leftward (in the direction of the arrow F1), so that a leftward force is applied to the projecting portion 3454D2, Thereby, the first operating portion 3454D rotates counterclockwise (the direction of the arrow F2) around the shaft portion J3A.

  When the first operating portion 3454D is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft portion J3A, the engaging portion 3454D1 of the first operating portion 3454D exerts a downward force on the projecting portion 3454B1 of the first link portion 3454B. Thus, the first link 3454B rotates clockwise (in the direction of arrow F3) around the shaft J1B. As the first link portion 3454B is rotated clockwise around the shaft portion J1B, the movable member 3454A moves toward the second link portion 3454C, and the second link portion 3454C rotates clockwise around the shaft portion J2B. (In the direction of arrow F4).

  As described above, the distance between the shaft portion J2A and the shaft portion J2B is longer than the distance between the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B. The amount of rotation of the movable member 3454A on the second link 3454C side is smaller than the amount of rotation of the movable member 3454A on the lower side of the first link portion 3454B. Therefore, as the clockwise rotation of the first link portion 3454B advances, that is, as the second operating portion 3454E moves leftward, the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A increases (that is, the angle decreases). The angle of the descent is suddenly increased).

  The winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240) has a second link portion 3454C that rotates clockwise around the shaft portion J2B following the rotation of the first link portion 3454B. A third stopper portion (not shown) is provided to restrict the first link portion 3454B from rotating beyond a predetermined position reached before reaching the maximum displacement position.

  Therefore, when the entry control solenoid 3464 changes from the non-drive state to the drive state, that is, when the first link portion 3454B is driven by the first operation portion 3454D, the rotation of the second link portion 3454C is rotated by the third stopper portion. Until the second link portion 3454C rotates in the clockwise direction following the rotation of the first link portion 3454B, the movable member 3454A rotates the first link portion 3454B clockwise. As the movement progresses, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), while displacing to the upstream side (passage portion 3219 side), the displacing is performed so that the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface becomes large. In addition, the movable member 3454A which is positioned in accordance with the driving of the first link portion 3454B partially has a passage portion 3219 (specifically, a support surface which constitutes the passage portion 3219 and supports the lower side of the game ball). It is housed on the lower side.

  After that, after the rotation of the second link portion 3454C is restricted by the third stopper portion, the second link portion 3454C does not rotate, and only the first link portion 3454B is the maximum displacement defined by the second stopper portion. Since the movable member 3454A rotates to the position, the movable member 3454A is displaced so that only the downward inclination angle of the upper surface thereof gradually increases as the clockwise rotation of the first link portion 3454B advances.

  When the first link portion 3454B that rotates the shaft portion J1B clockwise reaches the maximum displacement position, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 assumes the entry allowed posture (entry allowed state). When the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture, as shown in FIG. 46C, the upper surface of the movable member 3454A supports the game ball entered from the passage portion 3219 while supporting the lower side of the game ball. It functions as a support surface for guiding to the passage portion 3221 side.

  When the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry permitting posture, as shown in FIG. 46C, the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A is equal to the angle of the downward inclination of the support surface of the game ball in the passage portion 3219. The angle is larger than that of. Accordingly, when the entry control mechanism 3454 is in the entry permission position, the game ball entered from the entrance of the special winning device 3434 moves on the movable member 3454A at a speed higher than the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage portion 3219. Flow down.

  In addition, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry permitting posture, the movable member 3454A is displaced to the upstream side, so that a part of the movable member 3454A on the upstream side (passage portion 3219 side) is located below the passage portion 3219. Since it is housed on the side, the distance that a game ball that has entered from the entrance of the special winning device 3434 can flow down on the movable member 3454A is shortened accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the entry control mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition position, a straight line connecting the shaft J1A and the shaft J1B and a straight line connecting the shaft J2A and the shaft J2B are Are inclined slightly to the left side (counterclockwise side) from the vertical direction. Therefore, when the posture change of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 which is the entry prohibited posture is started, the movable member is initially set. In 3454A, both the first link portion 3454B side and the second link portion 3454C side move upward. In such a case, the moving amount of the movable member 3454A on the first link portion 3454B side is larger than the moving amount of the movable member 3454A on the second link portion 3454C side. The angle of the descending inclination is temporarily reduced in a short period in the initial period after the posture change of the entry restricting mechanism 3454, which is the entry-prohibited posture, is started.

  When the entry control solenoid 3464 is changed from the driving state to the non-driving state, the second operating portion 3454E located at the maximum displacement position is moved in the direction of returning to the initial position (the direction opposite to the arrow F1 direction). Accordingly, the first operating portion 3454D also rotates in the direction to return to the initial position.

  As the first operating portion 3454D rotates in the direction of returning to the initial position, the first link portion 3454B also rotates in the direction of returning to the initial position (the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow F3), and is movable accordingly. The member 3454A and the second link portion 3454C also rotate in a direction to return to the initial position.

  The first operating portion 3454D that rotates toward the initial position returns to the initial position by the restoring force of the weight portion 3454F. With the return of the first operating portion 3454D to the initial position, the movable member 3454A and the second link portion 3454C also return to the initial position, whereby the entry restricting mechanism 3454 assumes the entry prohibition posture.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of the behavior of two game balls P1 and P2 continuously entering the entrance of the special winning device 3434 from the passage portion 3219 when the entry control mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment is in the entry permitting posture. FIG. In FIG. 47, the illustration of the second operating portion 3454E is omitted.

  As described above, in the entry restricting mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment, when the posture shifts from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permitted position, the angle of the downward inclination of the support surface of the movable member 3454A (hereinafter simply referred to as “movable The angle of the downward inclination of the member 3454A is also increased), so that the speed at which the game ball entered from the entrance of the big winning device 3434 flows down on the movable member 3454A can be increased, and the movable member 3454A is By being displaced to the upstream side, the distance by which the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the special winning device 3434 can flow down on the movable member 3454A can be shortened.

  Therefore, by setting the amount of displacement of the movable member 3454A to the upstream side when the entry control mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-allowed position, and the magnitude of the angle of the descending inclination of the movable member 3454A, a big win is achieved. It is possible to control the time during which a game ball entered from the entrance of the device 3434 stays on the movable member 3454A.

  In the entry control mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment, when the player is in the entry allowable posture, basically, two or more game balls are simultaneously placed on the support surface of the game ball in the movable member 3454A (that is, the upper surface of the movable member 3454A). The amount of displacement of the movable member 3454A toward the upstream side when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry permitted position and the magnitude of the angle of the downward inclination of the movable member 3454A are set so as not to flow down.

  That is, in the entry control mechanism 3454 of this embodiment, the amount of displacement of the movable member 3454A toward the upstream side when the entry control mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry allowed position, and the angle of the downward inclination of the movable member 3454A. In the situation where the two game balls P1 and P2 continuously flow down the passage portion 3219 when the entry control mechanism 3454 is in the entry permission position (FIG. 47 (A)), The game ball P1 that has entered the entrance of the big prize winning device 3434 flows down on the support surface of the movable member 3454A at a higher speed than the game ball P2 flowing down on the passage portion 3219 (FIG. 47 (B)). Before P2 reaches the support surface of the movable member 3454A, it is detected by the big winning switch 3444 (FIG. 47C).

  FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram for explaining the possibility of occurrence of ball biting in the special winning device 3434 including the entry control mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment. In FIG. 48, the illustration of the second operating portion 3454E is omitted, and a line segment passing through the center of the game ball P (that is, the diameter of the game ball P) is shown by a dashed line. .

  As shown in FIG. 48, the entry control mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment has a distance between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall 3220A facing the tip downstream of the tip at a distance equal to the diameter of the game ball P. In the separated state, that is, in the state where the distance between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall 3220A is one game ball P, the contact point D1 between the game ball P and the tip of the movable member 3454A, A line segment connecting P and a contact point D2 between the wall portion 3220A is set to pass substantially horizontally at a position substantially corresponding to the center C of the game ball P.

  By setting the entry restriction mechanism 3454 in this manner, the transition of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 from the entry restricted position to the entry permitted position and the transition of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 from the entry permitted position to the entry restricted position are performed. At this point, occurrence of a state in which a game ball is sandwiched between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A (so-called ball biting) is suppressed.

  In other words, when the state shown in FIG. 48 or a state close to that state occurs during the transition of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 from the entry prohibited position to the entry permitted position, the force transmitted to the movable member 3454A due to the weight of the game ball is The tip of the movable member 3454A acts in the direction of moving toward the upstream side (that is, the passage portion 3219 side), and the gap between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall 3220A is opened more than one game ball P. Easy to do. Therefore, the game ball P can enter the special winning device 3434 without the ball biting.

  In addition, when the state shown in FIG. 48 or a state close to that state occurs during the transition of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 from the entry permitting posture to the entry prohibition posture, the movable member 3454A is regarded as a transition to the entry prohibition posture. Moves toward the downstream side (that is, the wall portion 3220A side), but the force transmitted to the movable member 3454A due to the weight of the game ball is equal to the line segment connecting the contact point D1 and the contact point D2 with the center C of the game ball P. Since it passes through a position substantially equivalent to the above, the movable member 3454A acts strongly in a direction of pushing back the movable member 3454A to the approach allowable posture like a wedge. Therefore, the movement (displacement) of the movable member 3454A to the downstream side is prevented, and the tip of the movable member 3454A is temporarily returned to a position where the game ball is allowed to enter, and the game ball P passes downward. After that, the state is again shifted to the no-entry posture. Therefore, the game ball P can enter the special winning device 3434 without causing the ball to bite.

  When the game ball P contacting the tip of the movable member 3454A is positioned sufficiently high, the game ball P is gradually pushed upward by the movable member 3454A and is guided to the passage portion 3220 side. That is, during the transition of the entry control mechanism 3454 from the entry permitting posture to the entry prohibition posture, in a situation where the distance between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall 3220A is sufficiently shorter than the diameter of the game ball, When the tip of the movable member 3454A is reached, the tip of the movable member 3454A is located sufficiently below the substantially horizontal position passing through the center of the game ball, and moves with the movement of the movable member 3454A downstream. Thus, the game ball can be gradually pushed upward by the tip of the movable member 3454A, and can be guided to the passage portion 3220 side. Therefore, also in such a case, the occurrence of ball biting is suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 51, a configuration in which game balls passing through the passage portion 3215 are discharged to the front side will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic front view of the prize device unit 3200 showing an example of a state in which game balls are vertically stacked in the passage portion 3215, and FIG. 50 is a view of the prize device unit 3200 along the line YY in FIG. It is a simple sectional view. FIG. 51 is a schematic view showing an example of the behavior of the game ball PB discharged forward from an opening formed in the front of the passage portion 3215.

  49 to 51, for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the prize device unit 3200 is shown by a solid line or a dashed line, and an example of the traveling direction of the game ball PB is shown by a solid arrow. FIG. Also, in FIG. 49, for reference, a vertical center line passing through the center of the game ball PA is shown by a dashed line. Also, in FIG. 50, the position of the support surface 3214A of the game ball in the passage portion 3214 is shown by a dashed line for reference. In FIG. 51, a straight line E on the vertical side passing through the shaft portion J1B is shown by a dashed line for reference.

  When the game ball guided to the vertical direction by the passage portion 3215 reaches the support surface 3217A for guiding the game ball to the horizontal direction (more specifically, the left direction), the guide direction of the game ball before and after that is changed. Since it changes greatly, the falling speed (advancing speed) of the game ball is greatly reduced. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the passage portion 3215 first and has reached the support surface 3217A may come into contact with the game ball that has entered the passage portion 3215 next to the game ball.

  In FIG. 49A, the game ball PA that has passed through the passage portion 3215 and reached the support surface 3217A (that is, the lower side thereof is supported by the support surface 3217A) is different from the passage portion 3215 next to the game ball PA. The game ball PB entering the game ball and flowing down in the vertical direction is guided from the center of the game ball PA by the support surface 3217A on the horizontal side of the game ball (in the example of the winning device unit 3200 shown in FIG. 49, the right side). 2 illustrates an example of a case where the contact is made at a position on the opposite side to (direction).

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 49 (A), the lower game ball PA receives a force directed to the guide direction of the game ball in the horizontal direction by the support surface 3217A by the contact with the game ball PB. Entering into is smooth. Since the game ball PA smoothly enters the passage portion 3217, the game ball PB following the game ball PA moves to the support surface 3217A before being discharged to the front side from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215. The guide portion 3217 is guided by the passage portion 3217 to the movable member 3454A of the entry control mechanism 3454.

  In FIG. 49B, with respect to the game ball PA that has passed through the passage portion 3215 and reached the support surface 3217A, the game ball PB that has entered the passage portion 3215 next to the game ball PA and flows down in the vertical direction. An example of a case where the support surface 3217A makes contact with the center of the game ball PA at a position on the guide side of the game ball in the horizontal direction (left direction in the example of the winning device unit 3200 shown in FIG. 49A). Is illustrated.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 49B, the lower game ball PA is, by contact with the game ball PB, a force in a direction opposite to the guide direction of the game ball on the horizontal side by the support surface 3217A, that is, Since the game ball receives a force that cancels the movement of the game ball along the inclination of the support surface 3217A, the game ball is temporarily stopped or almost stopped. Therefore, the game ball PB in contact with the game ball PA is likely to be discharged (guided) from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 to the front side with respect to the opening before reaching the support surface 3217A. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, the rear wall portion 3215A of the passage portion 3215 is a front surface of the upper portion 3215A1 above the game ball support surface 3214A of the passage portion 3214 (that is, a surface facing the passage portion 3215). Are configured to protrude forward from the lower side 3215A2 below the support surface 3214A.

  Thus, among the game balls stacked vertically in the passage portion 3215, the upper game ball PB is restricted from moving backward by the front surface of the upper portion 3215A1, and the game ball PB is lowered by the support surface 3217A. The center of the game ball PA is a game ball whose side is supported, and which is located between a wall 3217B standing upright on the front side of the support surface 3217A and a lower portion 3215A2 of the wall 3215A. Contact at a more forward position. Therefore, the upper game ball PB is easily guided to the front side, and is easily discharged (guided) from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 to the front side with respect to the opening.

  The game ball PB discharged to the front side from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 falls forward and downward with respect to the opening as shown by the arrow Q11. The entrance of the big winning device 3434 (winning opening) is provided at the drop destination. Therefore, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition position, the game ball PB that has dropped (discharged) from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 is supported by the upper surface of the movable member 3454A while being supported by the upper surface of the movable member 3454A. Guided to 3220. On the other hand, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball PB that has fallen from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 enters the large winning device 3434 as shown in FIG. You can enter.

  Also, in a situation where the game ball PB discharged forward from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 falls onto the movable member 3454A, as shown in FIG. 51B, the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1A. When the straight line connecting J1B is inclined rightward with respect to the vertical straight line E passing through the shaft portion J1B, the movable member 3454A shifts to the entry allowable posture.

  Specifically, the movable member 3454A that has received a downward force by the game ball PB that has fallen from the upper side has an end on the side of the first link portion 3454B through which the shaft portion J1 is passed through, and the weight portion 3454F Since the first link portion 3454B is rotated clockwise around the shaft portion J1B by a force exceeding the restoring force, the movable member 3454A opens the entrance of the big winning device 3434. (Ie, the side on which the entry control mechanism 3454 transitions to the entry allowed posture).

  In other words, even if the game ball PB discharged from the opening formed in the passage portion 3215 falls on the movable member 3454A during the transition of the posture when the entrance restriction mechanism 3454 transitions from the entrance allowable posture to the entrance prohibition posture, Since the movable member 3454A moves to the side that opens the entrance of the special winning device 3434, the game ball PB can enter the special winning device 3434.

  Further, in a situation where the game ball PB discharged to the front side from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 falls onto the movable member 3454A, a situation near the end of transition to the entry prohibition posture (specifically, In a situation where the straight line connecting the shaft J1A and the shaft J1B overlaps with the straight line E), the upper surface of the movable member 3454A (the support surface facing upward and capable of supporting the game ball) is positioned below the passage portion 3215. It is arranged to wait for game balls. In this situation, even if the game ball from the passage portion 3215 contacts the movable member 3454A, the game ball can be supported on the upper surface of the movable member 3454A, and the movable member 3454A can be shifted to the entry prohibition position. it can. For this reason, in a situation near the end of shifting to the entry prohibition posture, a situation where the game ball contacts the end portion of the movable member 3454A on the side closer to the wall portion 3220A cannot occur.

  In other words, when the game ball PB discharged from the opening formed in the passage portion 3215 falls on the movable member 3454A during the posture transition when the entrance restriction mechanism 3454 transitions from the entrance allowable posture to the entrance prohibited posture, It is possible to prevent the game ball PB from being caught between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A, thereby causing the ball to bite. Therefore, even when the game ball is dropped from the passage portion 3215 toward the entrance of the special winning device 3434 and comes into contact with the movable member 3454A, the occurrence of damage or failure of the special winning device 3434 including the movable member 3454A is suppressed. can do.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the entry restricting mechanism 3452 of the right starting winning device 3432 is configured such that the movable member 3452A, which is configured to be rotatable around the vertical direction, is rotated by the movable member 3452A so that the entry prohibition position and the entry allowable position are set. When the movable member 3452A is in the entry-prohibited posture (first guidance state), the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is guided to the passage portion 3218, and the movable member 3452A is allowed to enter. When in the posture (second guiding state), the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is guided to the passage portion 3241.

  Since the movable member 3452A is rotatable around the vertical side, the support surface 3452A3 that supports the lower side of the game ball in the movable member 3452A is upstream of the rotation center of the movable member 3452A (ie, In the section of the entrance portion 3452A1), when the movable member 3452A is rotated around the vertical side, the game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3 in the section is subjected to centrifugal force due to the rotation operation. A force for moving the game ball toward the direction returning to the upstream side can be generated.

  Therefore, in both the case where the movable member 3452A shifts from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-allowed position, and the case where the movable member 3452A shifts from the entry-allowed position to the approach-forbidden position, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 is formed. (That is, a game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3452A3) can be made difficult to progress in the direction from the upstream side (entrance portion 3452A1) to the downstream side (outlet portion 3452A2).

  This makes it difficult for the game ball to advance toward the side where the game ball is guided (ie, the passage portion 3241 side) in the approach permitting posture, while setting a long time for shifting (switching) from the entry prohibition position to the entry permitting position. Possible, that is, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls entering the passage portion 3241 side.

  Therefore, according to the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the present embodiment, it is easy for the game ball to visually recognize the state in which the movable member 3452A is shifted to the entry allowable posture, and the number of the game ball entering the passage portion 3241 side is reduced. It is possible to configure the right starting winning device 3432 that is easy to set.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A in the entry control mechanism 3452 is provided so as to be below the step with respect to the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 provided on the upstream side. Accordingly, the angle (gradient) of the descending slope on the support surface 3452A3 can be reduced by the magnitude of the step between the support surface 3217A and the upstream side of the support surface 3452A3 (the side of the entrance 3452A1).

  Since the traveling speed of the game ball by the support surface 3452A3 can be decreased as the angle of the downward inclination on the support surface 3452A3 is smaller, the game ball advances to the side where the game ball is guided in the approach allowable posture (that is, the passage portion 3241 side). It is possible to make it difficult. Therefore, at this point as well, it is easy for the game ball to visually recognize the situation where the movable member 3452A has shifted to the entry allowable posture, and the number of game balls entering the passage portion 3241 (the number of winnings) is set to be small. An easy right starting winning device 3432 can be constituted.

  Further, since a step is formed between the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 and the upstream side (the side of the entrance portion 3452A1) of the support surface 3452A3, a game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (the support surface 3452A3) can be formed. And returning to the passage portion 3217 again.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the movable member 3452A is movable when the support surface 3452A3 on the side of the wall 3452A5 on the outlet portion 3452A2 side, that is, when the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry allowed position. A ball escape portion 3452A6 is provided on the side opposite to the rotation direction of the member 3452A. Therefore, when shifting (switching) the entry restricting mechanism 3452 from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permitted position, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 moves in the opposite direction relatively to the rotation direction. Therefore, it is easy to reach the ball escape portion 3452A6 provided on the opposite side (that is, the wall portion 3452A5 side).

  Since the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured as a step portion in which the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3 is lower than the wall portion 3452A4 side, when the game ball reaches the ball escape portion 3452A6. The game ball can be discharged from the outlet 3452A2. Therefore, when shifting (switching) the entry restricting mechanism 3452 from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permitted position, the game balls supported by the support surface 3452A3 can be easily discharged to the passage portion 3218 during the transition.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball to the passage portion 3241 is provided on the outer edge side of the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowable posture. A wall portion 3452A4 that functions as a portion that restricts entry, and a wall portion 3452A5 that functions as a portion that restricts entry of a game ball into the passage portion 3218 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry permitting posture is provided upright. An outlet 3452A2 is formed between the wall 3452A4 and the wall 3452A5.

  The wall portion 3452A5 is configured such that the exit portion 3452A2 side when the wall portion 3452A5 is viewed from the front is cut out larger than the exit portion 3452A2 side when the wall portion 3452A4 is viewed from the front side, so that the entrance is restricted. When the mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permitted position, the wall portion 3452A4 is less likely to open the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241, and the wall portion 3452A5 is less likely to close the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218, On the other hand, when the entry restricting mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry permitted position to the entry prohibited position, the wall portion 3452A4 easily closes the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241, and the wall portion 3452A5 is closed by the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218. Can be easily opened. Therefore, during the transition of the posture when the entrance restriction mechanism 3452 transitions from one posture to another posture (that is, from the prohibited passage posture to the permitted passage posture or from the permitted passage posture to the prohibited passage posture), the support surface is not moved. A game ball flowing down on 3452A3 can easily enter the passage portion 3218.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the entry control mechanism 3454 of the big winning device 3434 shifts from the entry prohibited position (entry restricted state) to the entry allowed position (entry allowed state), the movable member 3454A In addition, the movable member 3454A is displaced in the direction opposite to the traveling direction of the game ball (ie, upstream side), and the angle of the descending inclination of the movable member 3454A is larger than that in the case of the entry prohibition posture (steeper). Is displaced so that the game ball is guided to the passage portion 3221.

  Since the movable member 3454A is displaced upstream due to the change in the posture of the entry control mechanism 3454, a portion of the movable member 3454A on the upstream side is accommodated below the passage portion 3219. In the case of the allowable posture, the game ball cannot pass through (contact with) the portion of the support surface of the movable member 3454A that is accommodated below the passage portion 3219.

  Therefore, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the entry permitting posture, the position at which the game ball discharged from the downstream side of the passage portion 3219 reaches (falls) the movable member 3454A is determined by the entry restricting mechanism 3454 being in the entry prohibiting position. Since the position is a position downstream from the position reached in a certain case, the arrival positions (falling positions) of the game balls discharged from the downstream side of the passage portion 3219 are dispersed. Therefore, the position of the load applied to the upper surface (support surface) of the movable member 3454A can be dispersed, so that the deterioration of the movable member 3454A with time can be suppressed, thereby easily keeping the movable member 3454A in a suitable state. .

  In particular, the displacement of the position of the movable member 3454A and the displacement of the descending inclination accompanying the change in the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 are mechanically realized by a four-node link mechanism having the movable member 3454A as an intermediate link portion. , The movable member 3454A can be displaced appropriately.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction and the downstream thereof are continuously provided to guide the game balls to a predetermined horizontal direction (more specifically, to the right side). In the configuration provided with the passage portion 3217, an opening is formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215. Accordingly, when another game ball is stacked on the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217, the upper game ball among the game balls stacked vertically becomes the passage ball 3215. From the opening formed on the front side, it is discharged to the front side with respect to the opening.

  Therefore, the opening formed in the front side of the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction is set to the predetermined direction side (more specifically, the passage) in which the upper game ball of the game balls stacked vertically intersects the vertical side. Since the portion 3217 can function as a guide portion for guiding in a predetermined direction crossing a plane including the continuous direction side and the vertical direction side), the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction and the passage portion 3215 In a configuration in which the passage 3217 for guiding the game ball passing through the predetermined horizontal direction is connected to another passage, another game ball is stacked on the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage 3217. The occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) caused by this can be suppressed.

  In particular, an entrance (winning opening) of the special winning device 3434 is provided below the direction side (that is, the front side) where game balls are discharged by an opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball discharged from the opening to the front side may win the big winning device 3434. Therefore, the player can enjoy the situation where the game balls are discharged from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215.

  Particularly, a game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 is guided not only to a predetermined horizontal direction side (more specifically, to the right side) by the support surface 3217A, but also to the wall portion 3217B. , A predetermined direction side intersecting the vertical direction side (more specifically, a predetermined direction side intersecting a plane including the direction side where the passage portion 3217 is continuous and the vertical direction side) and the entrance of the special winning device 3434 Guidance to the side where the mouth is provided is restricted. Therefore, the game balls whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 can be prevented from being guided in the predetermined direction, and the game balls stacked on the upper side of the game balls can be selectively placed in the predetermined direction. It can be guided to the direction side.

  In addition, since the opening formed in the front side of the passage portion 3215 is formed as an opening facing the predetermined direction above the wall portion 3217B, the upper end of the wall portion 3217B can be used as the lower end of the opening. . Therefore, it is possible to realize, with a simple configuration, ball clogging that occurs when another game ball is stacked on a game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage portions 3214, 3215, 3217, 3218 including the entrance portion of the right starting winning device 3432 are located on the rear side with respect to the front surface of the base 401, and the large winning device 3433 The passage portions 3219 and 3220 including the entrance portion (entrance) are arranged so as to be located on the front side with respect to the front surface of the base 401. For this reason, compared to a configuration in which a passage including an entrance portion of the big winning device and the right starting winning device is provided in front of the front surface of the base 401, an entrance portion of the large winning device 3433 and the right starting winning device 3432 is provided. Can be reduced, and the size of the winning device unit 3200 in a front view can be reduced.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the entrance portion of the large winning device 3433 and most of the winning device unit 3200 including the right starting winning device 3432 are provided on the front surface of the base 401 as described above, the starting device 436 is entered. Since the configured game ball can enter only the entrance portion 3211 of the prize device unit 3200, the path through which the game ball entered the starting device 436 reaches the entrance portion (entrance) of the large prize device 3433 is determined. 40, a path that enters the passage section 3219 through the opening 3218A of the passage section 3218 (a path in the directions of arrows Q6 and Q7 in FIG. 40), or is discharged forward from an opening formed in front of the passage section 3215. It can be limited to any one of the routes (the route in the direction of arrow Q11 in FIG. 51). Thereby, the occurrence of breakage or failure of the large winning device 3434 including the movable member 3454A due to the game ball can be suitably suppressed.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the display time of the variable display of the normal symbol, which is executed when the normal symbol lottery is won, is characteristically constituted. The pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment has a configuration in which, similarly to the gaming board 400X1 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, a game board provided with a right starting winning device 3432 downstream of the starting device 436. Is done.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the eleventh embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described first to tenth embodiments, or may be added to the configuration of the above-described first to tenth embodiments. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the timing of the detection of a game ball by the start switch 466 and the transition of the rightward start winning device 3432 to the entry allowable posture in the entry restriction mechanism 3452. In FIG. 52, for reference, each position of the game ball at each time counted from the time (time t1) when the game ball is detected by the start switch 466 is shown by the flow path of the game ball shown in FIG. It is represented by the reference numeral (Q1, Q3, Q4, Q6, Q7) attached to the indicated arrow.

  The timing chart in FIG. 52 shows the operation timing at each time, and does not accurately show the positional relationship of each time on the time axis (horizontal axis) (that is, the time interval between each time).

  When a game ball fired by the right-handed game technique enters the starting device 436, the start switch 446 detects the game ball at time t1 and shifts to an ON state. When a game ball is detected by the start switch 446, a normal symbol lottery is executed based on the detection.

  After the start switch 446 shifts to the ON state, at time t2, the start switch 446 shifts to the OFF state. Unless the unit game related to the ordinary symbol is being played, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the ordinary symbol display device 473 at the timing when the start switch 446 is turned off (that is, at time t2).

  When the game ball that has passed through the starting device 436 enters the entrance portion 3211 of the winning device unit 3200, the game ball enters the entrance portion 3211 at time t3 when the normal symbol display device 473 is performing the variable display of the ordinary symbol. To enter. The game ball that has entered the entrance 3211 travels in the passage 3214 (see FIG. 40A) to the left (in the direction of the arrow Q1), and then travels in the passage 3215 in the vertical direction, and at time t4 Enters the passage 3217 (see FIG. 40B).

  The game ball that has entered the passage portion 3217 advances rightward (in the direction of the arrow Q4) along the passage portion 3217, and at time t5, enters the movable member 3452A of the entry restricting mechanism 3452 in the entry-prohibited posture. The game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A flows down toward the outlet 3452A2 while being supported by the support surface 3452A3 (while contacting the support surface 3452A3).

  At time t6 after the timing when the game ball enters the movable member 3452A (that is, at time t5), a stop symbol relating to the ordinary symbol is definitely displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 473, whereby the variation display of the ordinary symbol is stopped. (finish. When the normal symbol lottery is won in the non-time-saving state (the normal gaming state and the special gaming state), the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is entered from the entry-prohibited position at the timing when the display of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbols ends (ie, time t6). Move to the allowable posture.

  If the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry allowable posture due to winning in the normal symbol lottery in the non-time reduction state, after the shift, a predetermined maximum entry allowable time defined for the non-time reduction state (for example, , For approximately 0.3 seconds), and then the state is again shifted to the no-entry posture at time t7.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by winning in the ordinary symbol lottery in the non-time-saving state, entry control is performed over a predetermined maximum allowable time (for example, approximately 0.3 seconds) corresponding to the non-time-saving state. At time t6 when the mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry allowable posture (that is, when the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry allowable attitude), the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A at time t5 cannot enter the passage portion 3241. Such a time is set in advance.

  The transition time from the detection of the game ball by the start switch 446 to the transition of the entry control mechanism 3452 to the entry allowable posture (that is, the period from time t1 to time t6) is determined by the starter 436 and the winning device unit. Depending on the arrangement position and the shape of the 3200, it falls within a certain time range, and the time from the detection timing of the game ball by the starting device 436 to the position of the game ball on the movable member 3452A is also measured by an actually measured value. It can be estimated in advance. The time of the variable display corresponding to the transition time is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 920 based on the average value of the values estimated by the actual measurement values. The main control board 920 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol set based on the transition time in the ordinary symbol related process S1218 (see FIG. 12), and at time t6, the entry control mechanism 3452 changes from the entry prohibition posture. Control is performed so as to shift to the entry allowable posture.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the period from the start of the variable symbol display to the stop of the ordinary symbol (that is, the variable symbol display time) is the timing when the start switch 446 is turned off. It is set in advance in a period from (time t2) to time t6 set as described above. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture at the time t7, the game ball on the movable member 3452A is not the passage 3241 (see FIG. 40B) but the passage 3218 (see FIG. 40B) at the time t8. (See FIG. 40B). Then, the game ball proceeds along the passage portion 3218 in the direction of arrow Q6, and then enters the passage portion 3219 (see FIG. 40C), and proceeds along the passage portion 3219 in the direction of arrow Q7.

  In the case of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time reduction state (the time reduction gaming state and the probable changing game state), the ordinary symbol being executed on the ordinary symbol display device 473 at the same time t6 as in the case of winning the ordinary symbol lottery in the non-time saving state. Is stopped, and the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibited position to the entry allowed position.

  If the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry allowable posture due to winning in the ordinary symbol lottery in the time reduction state, after the shift, a predetermined maximum entry allowable time defined corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, approximately The transition to the approach allowable posture is made intermittently (for example, divided into three times) over 4.8 seconds). When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 3442, the entry control mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 3432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  In addition, it is not necessary to set only the time of the above-mentioned variable display as the time of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and it is also possible to select one of the variable display times by lottery, including the time of the other variable display. Is also good.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start switch 466 in the non-time saving state (that is, when the start condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied), the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 473 is displayed. The variable display is started after entering the movable member 3452A in the entry-prohibited position, and thereafter, the movable member 3452A that has shifted to the entry-permissible position based on winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is the game ball on the support surface 3452A3. It is configured to be executed until a time (time t6) at which the vehicle cannot enter the passage portion 3241.

  That is, the length of the fluctuation display time (variation time) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol executed when the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied in the non-time saving state comes into contact with the movable member 3452A that takes the approach allowable posture ( In detail, the game ball (which has contacted the support surface 3452A3) has such a length that the movable member 3452A cannot enter the passage portion 3241 due to the transition to the entry prohibition posture.

  Thereby, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied in the non-time saving state, the game ball is moved to the movable member 3452A in the entry allowable posture at the timing when the symbol hits the normal symbol display device 473 and the symbol is displayed as the stop symbol. Can be visually recognized as having contacted (i.e., having contacted on the support surface 3452A3) and that the game ball having contacted the movable member 3452A could not enter the passage portion 3241. Therefore, even when the maximum allowable time is set to an extremely short time, such as 0.1 second, as in the case where the starting condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied in the non-time saving state, the movable member 3452A is set in the allowable allowable posture. Can be easily visually recognized by the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even when a game ball is detected by the start switch 466 in the time reduction state, the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is changed in the non-time reduction state. Is the same length as the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol when detected.

  Accordingly, even when the starting condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied in the time saving state, the player also starts the ordinary symbol in the non-saving time state at the timing when the symbol hits the ordinary symbol display device 473 and is displayed as the stopped symbol. Similarly to the case where it is established, it is possible to visually recognize that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member 3452A in the entry allowable posture, so that the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the movable member 3452A has shifted to the entry allowable posture. it can.

  In both the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state, at the timing when the symbol hits the normal symbol display device 473 and the symbol is displayed as the stop symbol, the player can determine that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member 3452A in the entry allowable posture. Since it is possible to visually recognize, it is easy to identify the difference depending on the game state of the maximum allowable time of the movable member 3452A, and it is easy to identify whether the game state is the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is configured as a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting a throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls. Is done. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment having such a setting change function, measures are taken to prevent the throwing rate from being set improperly.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the twelfth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment described above, or the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment may be added. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 53) in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment. The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started upon returning from the power outage state, similarly to the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, portions different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907 in the setting change processing S2003, the back setting switch 905 Is turned off (S2004: Y), an open / close detection switch for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 (see FIG. 1) is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIG. 1). A determination process 3001 of the output state of the signal from the signal 108 (see FIG. 16) is performed.

  Specifically, when the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 is in the ON state indicating that the intermediate block 103 is not closed (that is, opened) with respect to the outer frame 101 (S3001: Y ), RAM change setting processing S2005 is executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the back setting switch 905 is operated. Is not operated by the predetermined key (that is, the operation of the back setting switch 905 by the predetermined key is ended), the game mode (ball pitch) of the pachinko machine 100 is changed by the back setting switch 905. The game mode after the change is set by operating the initialization switch 907 (that is, the setting change of the game mode is validated).

  On the other hand, if the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 is in the off state indicating that the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (S3001: N), the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is output. It is determined whether the state has changed from the off state to the on state (determination processing S3002). In the determination processing S3002, when it is determined that the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state (S3002: N), the temporary setting notification processing S3003 is executed.

  In the temporary setting notification process S3003, the main control board 920 performs control for executing predetermined temporary setting notification. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control board 920 outputs a control signal for causing the audio devices 281 and 282 to output the temporary setting notification sound to the sub control board 940. Thereby, predetermined temporary setting notification sounds are output from the audio devices 281 and 282 as temporary setting notification. The temporary setting notification sound may be, for example, a repetition of a voice such as “Setting change is not enabled”, or may be an electronic sound of a predetermined pattern such as “Pip-pip ...”.

  If it is determined in the determination processing S3002 that the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state (S3002: Y), the RAM change setting processing S2005 is executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the operation of changing the game mode (selection operation) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is performed with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In this case, on the condition that the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 after the change operation, the game mode (ball pitch) of the pachinko machine 100 is determined by the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. The game mode after the change by the operation is set.

  FIG. 54 is a timing chart for setting change by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. More specifically, FIG. 54A is a timing chart when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101. FIG. 54B is a timing chart when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101.

  The timing charts in FIGS. 54A and 54B show the timing of the operation or state at each time, and the positional relationship of each time on the time axis (horizontal axis) (that is, each time). Time interval) is not exactly shown.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, when the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is on), at time t11, When the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (specifically, is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise), the setting signal from the switch 905 changes to the ON state.

  While the rear setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (that is, while the switch 905 outputs an ON-state setting signal), the main control board 920 executes the above-described setting change processing S2003. Specifically, while the ON setting signal is output from the back setting switch 905, each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed (that is, each time the initialization switch 907 outputs the ON initialization signal, The main control board 920 cyclically sequentially selects one of a plurality of predetermined (for example, nine) game modes one by one, and sets a value corresponding to the selected game mode in a predetermined area of the RAM. Store as correspondence information.

  At time t12, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by the predetermined key is terminated (that is, when the setting signal from the switch 905 changes to the off state), the main control board 920 proceeds to the RAM change setting process S2005 described above. Execute Accordingly, the game mode (ball pitch) of the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode after the change by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 (that is, the setting change of the game mode is validated). ).

  Therefore, when a change operation of the game mode by each of the switches 905 and 907 is performed in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the timing at which the change operation ends, that is, a predetermined key At the timing (time t12) when the operation of the back setting switch 905 is completed (time t12), the game mode changed by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is changed before the operation of the back setting switch 905 using a predetermined key. Is newly set in place of the game mode (the old game mode) that has been set to the game mode.

  Until the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is closed at time t13 (that is, while the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is on), the on state output from the open / close detection switch 108 is turned on. The main control board 920 that receives the signal executes control for executing predetermined opening / closing notification. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control board 920 outputs a control signal for causing the sound devices 281 and 282 to output the opening / closing notification sound to the sub control board 940. As a result, a predetermined opening / closing notification sound is output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 as the opening / closing notification.

  Note that the opening / closing notification sound output until the intermediate block 103 is closed at the time t13 with respect to the outer frame 101 is a control start process (from execution of the program start process S1001 to execution of the random number initialization process S1019). When the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 during execution of each process related to the normal game after each process is performed, over the opening period (the period from time tA to time tB). This is the same as the opening / closing notification sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282.

  The opening / closing notification sound may be, for example, a repetition of a sound such as “the door is open” or an electronic sound of a predetermined pattern such as “peep-peep ...”. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing notification sound is a predetermined pattern of the electronic sound, the pattern of the electronic sound is different from the electronic sound as the temporary setting notification sound.

  As described above, when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the temporary setting leaving process S3003 is not executed, and thus the audio device 281 , 282 do not output the temporary setting notification sound.

  As shown in FIG. 54B, when the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, when the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is in the off state), the back setting switch 905 The main control board 920 executes the above-described setting change process S2003 while the ON setting signal is output from the back setting switch 905 due to the operation of the predetermined key (from time t21 to time t22). I do. Therefore, between the time t21 and the time t22, each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed, a predetermined plurality of types of game modes are sequentially and sequentially selected one by one, and the selected game mode is selected. The corresponding value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM as setting correspondence information.

  At time t22, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by the predetermined key is completed (that is, the setting signal from the switch 905 changes to the off state), the above-described temporary setting leaving process S3003 is executed, and Then, the output of the temporary setting notification sound from the audio devices 281 and 282 is started.

  Thereafter, at time t23, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, when the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 changes to the ON state), the main control board 920 executes the above RAM change. The setting process S2005 is executed. Accordingly, the game mode (ball pitch) of the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode after the change by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 (that is, the setting change of the game mode is validated). ).

  Therefore, when the game mode change operation is performed by the switches 905 and 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, after the change operation is completed, the outer frame 101 is At the timing when the intermediate block 103 is released (time t23), the game mode changed by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is set before the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Is newly set in place of the changed game mode.

  Further, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 at time t23, the temporary setting leaving process S3003 is not performed, and the output of the temporary setting notification sound started at time t22 stops at time t23. .

  On the other hand, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the main control board 920 starts control for executing predetermined opening / closing notification at time t23. Thus, the output of the opening / closing notification sound from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 is started. That is, at time t23, the sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282 switches from the temporarily set notification sound to the opening and closing notification sound.

  Note that the opening / closing notification sound at which output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 starts at time t23 has been subjected to the control start process, similarly to the opening / closing notification sound at which output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 starts at time t12. When the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 during execution of each process related to the later normal game (that is, at the time tA), the same as the opening / closing notification sound in which the output from the audio devices 281 and 282 is started. Things.

  Thereafter, at time 24, when the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, the control for executing the predetermined opening / closing notification is not performed. Therefore, the output of the opening / closing notification sound started at time 23 is It stops at time t24.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  As in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a pachinko machine configured such that the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 provided on the back side can be operated when the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Even if the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in such a situation, the operation may not be detected from the front side of the pachinko machine, so that the game mode (ball throwing rate) is illegally changed. There was a possibility that it would be done.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game mode (ball-out rate) is changed by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101. When the operation is performed, the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 after the end of the change operation (that is, after the operation of the back setting switch 905 using a predetermined key is completed). The game mode of the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode after the change by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907.

  Therefore, in order for the game mode changed (selected) by pressing the initialization switch 907 in the state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 to be changed as a new game mode, the game mode must be changed. Since it is necessary for an employee of the playground to perform an opening operation of the intermediate block 103 (an operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101), it is possible to prevent the game mode from being illegally changed in this state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, a predetermined key is used. Since the provisional setting notification (output of the provisional setting notification sound in this embodiment) is performed when the operation of the back setting switch 905 is terminated, the game mode is incorrectly changed in this state also in this point. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in a situation where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged, a worker in a manufacturing factory or an employee of a game hall can use the pachinko machine 100 with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101 from the rear side (back side). After the game mode change operation (setting change operation) by the switches 905 and 907, the pachinko machine 100 that has performed the change operation can be easily recognized by the temporary setting notification, so that the setting change is confirmed. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the setting of another pachinko machine is accidentally changed.

  Further, the provisional setting notification is configured to stop (end) on condition that the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101. Therefore, when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, the temporary setting notification output thereby is stopped, so that the Since it is necessary for an employee or the like to perform the opening operation of the intermediate block 103, also in this respect, it is possible to preferably suppress the illegal change of the game mode.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a setting change function for setting the throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of the game balls, as well as the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment. Is configured as a pachinko machine with measures to prevent unauthorized setting. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment in that the same content as the door opening notification is provided as the temporary setting notification.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to twelfth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the thirteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to twelfth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment to the twelfth embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the temporary setting notification processing S3003 (see FIG. 53), the main control board 920 sends a control signal for causing the sound devices 281 and 282 to output the opening / closing notification sound to the sub-control board 940. Output. As a result, predetermined opening / closing notification sounds are output from the audio devices 281 and 282 as temporary setting notification. The output of the opening / closing notification sound from the audio devices 281 and 282 starts when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 during execution of each process related to the normal game after the control start process is performed. This is the same as the opening / closing notification sound performed.

  FIG. 55 is a timing chart for setting change by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. More specifically, FIG. 54 is a timing chart when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101.

  Hereinafter, a part different from the timing chart of FIG. 54B described above, that is, the back setting switch 905 and the initialization are performed in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment. Parts different from those in the case where the switch 907 is operated will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 55, at the time t22, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by the predetermined key is ended (that is, when the setting signal from the switch 905 changes to the off state), the above-described temporary setting leaving The process S3003 is executed, whereby the output of the opening / closing notification sound from the audio devices 281 and 282 is started as the provisional setting notification.

  Thereafter, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 at time t23, the temporary setting leaving process S3003 is not performed, but on the other hand, control for executing predetermined opening / closing notification is started. Therefore, the opening and closing notification sound is continuously output from the audio devices 281 and 282.

  Therefore, when the opening / closing notification sound is composed of, for example, a repetition of a voice “the door is open”, after the operation of the back setting switch 905 by the predetermined key is completed, the intermediate block 103 Is opened and closed (that is, from time t22 to time t24), the sound of “the door is open” is repeatedly output from the sound devices 281 and 282 as an opening / closing notification sound. .

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 provided on the rear side are operated with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, An opening / closing notification sound is output as the provisional setting notification. The opening / closing notification sound is a notification sound that is output even when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, and is a sound provided by a general pachinko machine. There is no need to prepare.

  Further, since the opening / closing notification sound that is output even when the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 is a notification sound that is output relatively frequently, the opening / closing notification sound is generated by the player's It is a sound that is difficult to become. Therefore, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 performed in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 is an operation properly performed by an employee of the game arcade or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player who does not fall off from feeling uncomfortable.

<14th embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment, a power supply is connected to the main control board 920 to check the operation of a device whose operation is controlled by the main control board 920 (for example, the right approach restriction mechanism 2452). It is configured as a pachinko machine that can be executed at the time of introduction.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to thirteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the fourteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to the thirteenth embodiment described above, or the configuration described in the first embodiment to the thirteenth embodiment may be used. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured as a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting the throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. You.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 56) in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment. The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started upon returning from the power outage state, similarly to the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, portions different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when it is determined in the determination processing S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001). : N), a determination process S4001 is performed to determine whether the setting correspondence information is stored in the RAM of the main control board 920.

  If it is determined in the determination processing S4001 that the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM (S4001: N), a hardware operation for confirming the operation of various devices (electric components) connected to the main control board 920 The confirmation processing S4002 is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game mode that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is not set when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on ( When the setting correspondence information corresponding to the set game mode is not stored in the RAM), the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed.

  The devices to be checked for operation by the hardware operation check processing S4002 include a right entry restriction mechanism 2452 (see FIG. 10) of the right starting prize device 2432 and an upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 (see FIG. 10) of the upper large prize device 2433. , The lower entry winning mechanism 2434 (see FIG. 10), and the distribution mechanism (not shown) in the upper winning application 2433.

  In the hardware operation check processing S4002, the device whose operation is to be checked is operated. For example, the right entry restriction solenoid 2462, the upper entry restriction solenoid 2463, the lower entry restriction solenoid 2464, and the switching solenoid 2465 are driven to respectively drive the right entry restriction mechanism 2452, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453, the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454, and the vibration. Activate each minute mechanism.

  Specifically, for example, the right approach restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach allowable attitude and maintains the approach allowable attitude for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then shifts to the approach prohibition attitude, and After maintaining the entry-prohibited attitude for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the state is again shifted to the entry-permitted state, and the approach-permitted state is maintained for a predetermined period, and then the state is shifted to the entry-prohibited state. The right entry restriction solenoid 2462 is driven.

  Similarly, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 shifts to the entry permission position, maintains the entry permission position for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then shifts to the entry inhibition position to change to the entry inhibition position. Is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the state is shifted again to the entry allowable posture, and the entrance allowable posture is maintained for the predetermined period before shifting to the entry prohibited posture. The entry control solenoid 2463 is driven.

  Similarly, the lower entry control mechanism 2454 shifts to the entry allowable attitude and maintains the entry allowable attitude for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), then shifts to the entry inhibition attitude, and shifts to the entry inhibition attitude. Is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then moved to the approach allowable posture again to maintain the approach allowable posture for a predetermined period of time and then shift to the entry prohibited posture. The entry control solenoid 2464 is driven.

  Similarly, the distributing mechanism in the upper-prize winning device 2433 shifts to the guidance posture and maintains the guidance posture for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then shifts to the non-guidance posture and shifts to the non-guidance posture. After maintaining the guidance posture for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), switching to the guidance posture is again performed so that the guidance posture is maintained for the predetermined period and then to the non-guidance posture. The solenoid 2465 is driven.

  In the hardware operation check processing S4002, whether or not an apparatus to be checked for operation has been operated is a structure in which a person related to the game arcade (for example, a game arcade manager or an employee) visually checks the operation. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the target device has operated by detection by a sensor capable of detecting a position change due to the operation. For example, when the sensor that can detect the position of the movable piece when the right approach restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach allowable posture is detected by the sensor as having the movable piece at the position in the approach allowable attitude, the right approach is restricted. The structure which determines with the mechanism 2452 having operated may be sufficient.

  After the hardware operation check processing S4002, an information output command output processing S4003 for outputting an information output command to the sub-control board 940 is executed. When receiving the information output command output by the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 executes a process related to the output of the information prompting the setting of the game mode. As a result, information prompting the user to set the game mode is output.

  For example, when receiving the information output command from the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 displays a character string such as “Please set the throwing rate” as information for prompting the setting of the game mode. A process to be displayed on the device 479 is executed. As a result, information that prompts the user to set the game mode is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 as a character string.

  The “information for prompting the user to set the game mode” includes a character string and an image displayed on the decorative design display device 479, a sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282, a board light emitting device 490 and a frame light emitting device 271. To 275, the colors and patterns emitted by the light emitting elements 275 to 275 can be exemplified.

  After the information output command output processing S4003, the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on, when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM (that is, when the game mode is not set), Is configured such that the processing after the information prompting the setting of the game mode is output is restricted.

  Since the information prompting the setting of the game mode is output by the execution of the information output command output process S4003, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off after the information output command output process S4003, the related person on the game hall side: The power can be turned on again with the back setting switch 905 operated by a predetermined key (specifically, rotated clockwise by approximately 90 °) based on the information prompting the setting of the game mode.

  When the power is turned on again while the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key, in the determination process S2001, it is determined that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is on (S2001: Y). Since the RAM clear processing S2002 to the determination processing S2004 are executed, the setting correspondence information can be stored in the RAM, that is, the game mode can be set.

  In the determination process S2004, when it is determined that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 has been turned off (S2004: Y), various types of devices connected to the main control board 920 as in the hardware initialization process S1009. After the hardware initialization processing S4006 for initializing the device is executed, the RAM change setting processing S2005 and the set command output processing S2006 are executed.

  Further, in the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the power failure information is not the predetermined power failure value indicating that the storage information has been saved and ended when the power failure state is entered (S1005: N). Or, when the storage information is not normally retained (S1007: N), after executing the hardware operation check processing S4002 and the information output command output processing S4003, the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Continue infinite loop until

  Therefore, even when the saved information is not saved at the time of shifting to the power outage state, or when the saved information is not normally retained, the related party on the game arcade operated the rear setting switch 905 with a predetermined key. When the power is turned on again in this state, the RAM clear processing S2002 to the determination processing S2004 are executed, and the erasing of the information stored in the RAM and the setting of the game mode can be performed.

  In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the determination processing S1007 that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), the same processing as the determination processing S1004 is performed. A determination process S4004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power / emission control board 900 is performed.

  When it is determined that the initialization signal is in the ON state (S4004: Y), a RAM clear process S4005 similar to the RAM clear process S2002 is executed. That is, in the RAM clear processing S4005, information of substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is deleted. When it is determined that the initialization signal is in the off state (S1004: N), or after the RAM clear processing S4005 is performed, the hardware initialization processing S1009 is performed.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is configured to be executable in the main processing of the main control board 920. Therefore, when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on, the solenoids 2462 to The operation of various devices (electric components) connected to the main control board 920, such as 2465, can be checked when the power is turned on.

  In particular, the hardware operation check processing S4002 is configured to be executed when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on. When a pachinko machine such as a pachinko machine in a state where the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM is delivered to a game hall (hall), various kinds of various devices connected to the main control board 920 by turning on the power. The operation of the device can be confirmed.

  Further, even when the setting correspondence information is erased from the RAM for some reason, the setting correspondence information is stored in the RAM (that is, the game mode is set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907). The operation of various devices connected to the main control board 920 can be checked before.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 100 does not store the setting correspondence information in the RAM of the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on. When a specific situation that requires operation by a person on the amusement arcade occurs, hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed and the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are operated, so that each of the solenoids 2462 to 2465 is operated by the operation of the solenoid 2462 to 2465. The occurrence of the specific situation can be notified to the related person on the game arcade side by the movement of the devices (right entry control mechanism 2452, upper entry control mechanism 2453, lower entry control mechanism 2454, distribution mechanism).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on, the information output command output processing S4003 Is executed, the setting of the game mode (that is, storing the setting correspondence information in the RAM) can be urged to the related person on the game hall side.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at the time of returning from the power failure state such as when the power is turned on, the power is finally turned off. Since the infinite loop is configured to be continued until the processing can no longer be executed by completely shutting down, the execution of the control start processing is restricted, thereby suppressing the execution of the subsequent timer interrupt processing related to the normal game. it can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a normal game is played in a state where the game mode is not set.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is performed when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on. In the configuration executed, the pachinko machine in which the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM is turned on, and the operation of various devices connected to the main control board 920 is checked to confirm the operation of the game hall. Can be notified. For this reason, the administrator of the game arcade can recognize that the situation occurring in the gaming machine is a particular situation in which the game cannot be controlled normally, and this particular situation is determined by the main control board 920. The electric component connected to the main control board 920 can be used to notify the pachinko machine 100 with a prize winning device that is easy to confirm when viewed from the front side. Therefore, a specific situation in the main control board 920 can be identified without requiring control by another control board, and a particular situation in a factory in a manufacturing stage of a gaming machine can be recognized, as well as a situation in a game arcade. It is also possible to easily confirm the situation.

  In addition, even when the saved information is not saved when the power is turned on or when the saved information is not saved normally when the power is turned on, even if the saved information is not normally held, the power Is completely interrupted and the infinite loop is continued until the processing cannot be executed, so that the situation where the normal game is played in a state where the state stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is uncertain can be suppressed. .

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment, a device (for example, a right approach restriction mechanism 2452) that is electrically connected to the main control board 920 and whose operation is controlled by the main control board 920 includes a sub control board. By electrically connecting to the 940, the device is configured as a pachinko machine that can execute the operation check of the device when the power is turned on.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the fifteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, or may be added to the configuration of the first embodiment to the fourteenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured as a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting the throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. You.

  FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment. In FIG. 57, a connector portion 921 provided on the back side of the main control device 370 and a connector portion 941 formed on the back side of the sub control device 390 are schematically illustrated. FIG. 58 exemplarily shows a connector member 921A, which is one of the connector members constituting the connector portion 921, and a connector member 941A, which is one of the connector members constituting the connector portion 941. .

  As shown in FIG. 57, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 100, the sub-control device 390 is disposed on the upper left side of the main control device 370, and the control unit 479A of the decorative symbol display device 479 is the main control device. It is arranged on the upper right side of 370 and on the right side of sub-control device 390.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a connector portion 921 for connecting a device (electric component) controlled by the main control board 920 to the main control board 920 is provided on the back side of the main control device 370. ing.

  The connector portion 921 is configured to detachably mount a male connector member formed on the other end of a signal line having one end connected to a device connected to the main control board 920, and may be detachably attached to one or more female types. It is composed of a connector member. Although FIG. 57 illustrates an example in which the connector portion 921 includes three connector members 921A to 921C, the number is not limited to three.

  One or a plurality of devices (electric components) can be connected to each of one or a plurality of connector members constituting the connector portion 921. Specifically, a female connector member formed on the other end of a signal line extending from one or a plurality of devices is configured to be attached to a male connector member constituting the connector portion 921. In addition, between the one or a plurality of devices and the connector member on the female side, a configuration in which a relay board is interposed in the middle or a configuration in which no relay board is interposed may be employed.

  In the present embodiment, of the connector members constituting the connector portion 921, the right entry restriction is applied to the connector member (the connector member 921 </ b> A in the example shown in FIG. 57) formed closest to the sub-control device 390. A solenoid 2462, an upper entry restriction solenoid 2463, a lower entry restriction solenoid 2464, and a switching solenoid 2465 are configured to be connectable. That is, a female connector member formed at the other end of the signal line extending from each of the solenoids 2462 to 2465 is configured to be attached to the connector member 921A.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a connector portion 941 for connecting a device (electric component) controlled by the sub-control board 940 to the sub-control board 940 is provided on the back side of the sub-control device 390. ing. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, the input operation device 260 (261 to 263), the decorative design display device 479, the board light emitting device 490, the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275, the sound devices 281 and 282, etc. Are configured to be connected to the connector unit 941.

  The connector part 941 is provided with one or a plurality of female-type female members to which a male-side connector member formed on the other end of a signal line having one end connected to a device connected to the sub-control board 940 can be detachably attached. It is composed of a connector member. Although FIG. 57 illustrates an example in which the connector portion 941 includes four connector members 391A to 391D, the number is not limited to four.

  One or a plurality of devices (electric components) can be connected to each of one or a plurality of connector members constituting the connector portion 941. Specifically, a female connector member formed at the other end of a signal line extending from one or a plurality of devices is configured to be attached to a male connector member constituting the connector portion 941. In addition, between the one or a plurality of devices and the connector member on the female side, a configuration in which a relay board is interposed in the middle or a configuration in which no relay board is interposed may be employed.

  In the present embodiment, among the connector members constituting the connector portion 941, the connector portion 921 is formed at a position closest to the connector member to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are mounted (the connector member 921A in the example shown in FIG. 57). The input operation device 260 (261 to 263) can be connected to the connector member (the connector member 941A in the example shown in FIG. 57). That is, a female connector member formed on the other end side of the signal line extending from each of the pressing operation device 261, the rotation operation device 262, and the selection operation device 263 is mounted on the connector member 941A.

  In the present embodiment, a connector member (connector member 941A in the example shown in FIG. 57) to which the input operation device 260 (261 to 263) can be connected includes a right entry restriction solenoid 2462, an upper entry restriction solenoid 2463, The lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 and the switching solenoid 2465 are configured to be connectable.

  That is, the connector member formed closest to the connector member to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are mounted in the connector portion 921 is a female type formed on the other end side of the signal line extending from each of the operation devices 261 to 263. And a female connector member formed at the other end of the signal line extending from each of the solenoids 2462 to 2465.

  The sub-control board 940 is configured to execute an operation check of a device (electric component) connected to each connector member constituting the connector section 941 when the power is turned on. Therefore, instead of the input operation device 260 (261 to 263), the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to a connector member (for example, the connector member 941A) to which the input operation device 260 (261 to 263) can be connected in the connector portion 941. When the power is turned on in this state, the operation of these solenoids 2462 to 2465 is confirmed (that is, the operations of the right entry restriction mechanism 2452, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453, the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454, and the distribution mechanism) are performed. Becomes possible.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 59) in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment. The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started upon returning from the power outage state, similarly to the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, portions different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not check the operation of various devices (electric components) in which the main control board 920 is connected to the main control board 920 as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth embodiment. Be composed.

  Therefore, in the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when it is determined that the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM (S4001: N), the power failure information is If it is not the predetermined power failure value indicating that the storage information has been saved and ended at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or if the saved information is not normally retained (S1007: N), the information is stored. After executing the output command output processing S4003, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the initialization signal is determined to be in the OFF state (S1004: N), or after the RAM clear processing S4005 is executed. It is determined whether or not there is a connection abnormality of the solenoid, that is, whether or not the right entry control solenoid 2462, the upper entry control solenoid 2463, the lower entry control solenoid 2464, and the switching solenoid 2465 are set on the main control board 920. A determination process S5001 is performed.

  In determination process S5001, solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to connector members (connector member 921A in the example shown in FIG. 57) to which solenoids 2462 to 2465 are to be connected among connector members constituting connector portion 941 (connector member). Is attached) is determined.

  In the determination process S5001, when it is determined that there is no abnormal connection of the solenoid, that is, when it is determined that the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to the connector members to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are to be connected (S5001). : N), execute hardware initialization processing S1009.

  On the other hand, in the determination process S5001, when it is determined that there is a solenoid connection abnormality, that is, when it is determined that the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are not connected to the connector members to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are to be connected, (S5001: Y), connection request command output processing S5002 for outputting a connection request command to the sub-control board 940 is executed.

  When receiving the connection request command output from the main control board 920, the sub control board 940 prompts the solenoids 2462 to 2465 to connect to the main control board 920 (hereinafter, the information is also referred to as “connection request information”). ) Is executed. Thereby, the connection request information is output.

  For example, when the sub control board 940 receives the connection request command from the main control board 920, a character string such as “Please connect the solenoid to the main control board” is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 as connection request information. Execute the process to be displayed. Thereby, the connection request information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a character string.

  Note that the “connection request information” includes a character string or an image displayed on the decorative design display device 479, a sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282, and light emission by the panel light emitting device 490 or the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275. Color, pattern, and the like can be exemplified, and the configuration may be performed by any one of them, or the configuration may be performed by a plurality of combinations.

  After the connection request command output process S5002, the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the solenoids 2462 to 2465 to be connected are not connected to the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on, a connection request is issued. The processing after the information is output is configured to be restricted.

  Since the connection request information is output by the execution of the connection request command output processing S5002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is shut down after the connection request command output processing S5002, a related person on the game hall side transmits the connection request information to the connection request information. Based on this, the power can be turned on again while the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to the corresponding connector member (for example, the connector member 921A) among the connector members constituting the connector portion 941.

  In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 has been turned off (S2004: Y), the same as the determination processing S5001. Is performed, and if it is determined that there is no solenoid connection abnormality (S5003: N), hardware initialization processing S4006 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a solenoid connection abnormality (S5003: Y), a connection request command output process S5002 is executed.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the solenoids 2462 to 2465 connected to the connector 921 of the main control board 920 are also configured to be connectable to the connector 941 of the sub-control board 940. When the power is turned on with the power supply to the connector 2465 connected to the connector portion 941, the operation of these solenoids 2462 to 2465 is confirmed (that is, the right approach control mechanism 2452, the upper approach control mechanism 2453, the lower approach control mechanism 2454, and the vibration (Operation confirmation of the minute mechanism) can be performed by controlling the sub-control board 940.

  On the other hand, in the main control board 920, when the power is turned on, in the determination processing S5001 and the determination processing S5003, devices (electric components) to be connected to the connector 921, such as the solenoids 2462 to 2465, are connected to the connector. If it is determined that the processing is not connected to the power supply 921, the power supply is finally completely shut down and the infinite loop is continued until the processing cannot be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the execution of the timer interrupt process related to the normal game performed thereafter. This can suppress a situation in which a normal game is played in a state where devices such as the solenoids 2462 to 2465 to be connected to the connector 921 (main control board 920) are connected to the connector 941 (sub-control board 940).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, in determination processing S5001 and determination processing S5003, devices (electric components) to be connected to the connector unit 921, such as solenoids 2462 to 2465, are connected to the connector. If it is determined that the connection is not made to the unit 921, the connection request command output processing S5002 is configured to be executed, so that it is connected to the connector unit 921 (main control board 920) for operation confirmation. When the power supply is turned on while the device to be connected is connected to the connector portion 941 (sub-control board 940), it is possible to urge the related person on the game arcade side to connect the device to the connector portion 921.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the connector member to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are mounted in the connector portion 941 of the sub control board 940 is the same as the main control board 920 among the connector members constituting the connector section 941. Since the connector 921 is provided at a position closest to the connector member to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are mounted, devices to be connected to the main control board 920 such as the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are operated by the sub control board 940. For confirmation, it is possible to prevent a signal line extending from the device from being greatly extended.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the embodiment.
(1) Counting Period In the above embodiment, the counting invalid period is provided after the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, so that the general winning devices 439A and 439B enter the counting invalid period. The game balls that have been played are not counted as general winnings. In this case, the game ball used for detecting the continuous insertion is counted as a general winning number by the general winning number counter, but when the continuous insertion is detected, the game ball used for the detection is detected from the general winning number counter. The configuration may be such that the value is subtracted by the number of spheres.

  In the above embodiment, some examples of the period that can be the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 are described. However, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 When it is arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, instead of or in addition to the above example, the counting start condition is that the normal game state has been started, and the normal game state ends. The period up to this may be set as the “counting period”.

  Among the general winning devices 439A and 439B, the general winning device 439A arranged on the left side with respect to the middle starting winning devices 431A and 431B allows the game ball to enter (win) only by the left-handed game technique. The game ball can enter (win) the general winning device 439B arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning devices 431A and 431B by either the left-handed game technique or the right-handed game technique. Here, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, so that in the special gaming state, the player is A game is played by a hitting technique. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general prize winning device 439B during the special game state, the general winning number counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state calculated based on the general winning number thus counted. The level may be a value that does not appropriately reflect the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B or in the vicinity thereof.

  On the other hand, when the normal game state is started, the counting start condition is set, and the period until the normal game state ends is set as the “counting period”, so that the player enters the general prize device 439B during the special game state. Gaming balls can be suitably excluded from counting targets. Therefore, the number of general winnings counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general winnings counted as described above are placed at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It is possible to obtain the value of the nail 411 provided as a value that appropriately reflects the state of the nail 411 with high accuracy.

  The start of the normal game state can be determined, for example, based on the output state of a signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, when the signal indicating that the game is in the special game state is no longer output from the external terminal board 580, it can be determined that the normal game state has been started.

  Alternatively, like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, during the special game state. It is unlikely that a left-handed gaming technique is being performed. Therefore, whether the left-handed game technique is performed is determined based on the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252, and the case where the left-handed game technique is performed may be regarded as the normal game state.

  In the above embodiment, the period in which the previous block 102 is in the open state is exemplified as an example of the “count invalid period”, but the period in which the previous block 102 is in the closed state may be referred to as “count invalid period”. Further, when the previous block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B is detected, a predetermined period thereafter may be defined as a “count invalid period”. When the preceding block 102 is in the closed state and continuous throwing of game balls into the general prize devices 439A and 439B is detected, a predetermined period thereafter is set as a “count invalid period”, for example, in the game area. A ball clogging state in which a game ball stays in a part of the game area occurs, and the ball clogging state disables the flow of the game ball in a part of the game area, so that the game ball continues to the general winning devices 439A and 439B. When a situation occurs in which the game balls enter, it is possible to prevent the general winning number counter from being updated for at least a part of these game balls. Accordingly, in the case where the player keeps firing game balls in the ball clogged state and illegally continuously enter the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, the general winning number counter is updated as follows. Can be made to correspond to the number of entering game balls excluding a part of the game balls. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed. Also, in the case where a fraudulent act of continuously entering the game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B using the magnet is performed, the general winning number counter is updated for at least a part of the game balls. The performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be more appropriately evaluated.

(2) Value calculated in S1502 In the above embodiment, in S1502, a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter) ) Is calculated, but the value used as the divisor (division) is not necessarily a firing ball if the number of game balls fired in the game area from the firing device 330 increases as the number increases. It need not be a number (ie, the value counted by the launch ball counter).

  For example, during a predetermined period, such as during a counting period or during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the number of times of display of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the number of times of display of the ordinary symbol, The number of occurrences of the special game state may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter. Alternatively, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 is counted, and from the counted number of game balls, or from the number of game balls, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 but cannot reach the game area is determined in advance. A value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter.

(3) Nail State Level Calculated in S1503 In the above-described embodiment, the case where the nail state level is divided into three levels has been exemplified, but the nail state level is not necessarily classified into three levels. For example, the nail state level is configured to be divided into at least two stages: a section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate, and a section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state. Is also good. Further, the nail state level may be divided into four or more stages.

  In the above embodiment, while the section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state is subdivided into two sections, the section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is subdivided. Although the case where one section is used without the example is illustrated, the section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate may be divided into two or more sections.

  In the above embodiment, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the minimum value “1”, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the higher the nail state level. Although the configuration is increased, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the maximum value, and the nail state level decreases as the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state increases. Is also good.

  In the above embodiment, the nail state level is calculated from the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of shot balls counter), but the nail state level is calculated from the value of the general winning number counter. It is good also as composition which calculates a state level. That is, a configuration may be employed in which the nail state level is calculated without using the value of the firing ball number counter.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed on condition that the previous block 102 is in the open state. However, the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed May be performed irrespective of the state.

(5) Nail State Level Output Destination in S1504 In the above embodiment, the nail state level is displayed and output on the nail state level display device 474. However, the nail state level output destination is not necessarily the nail state level display device. It does not need to be a display device like 474. For example, the output destination of the nail state level is a management device (for example, a management device called a so-called "hole computer") or a portable terminal device. In S1504, data indicating the nail state level is transmitted to the management device or the terminal device. It is good also as a structure which does. Alternatively, the output destination of the nail state level may be a printing device such as a printer, and in S1504, print data indicating the nail state level may be output to the printing device and the printing device may print the nail state level. Alternatively, the output destination of the nail state level is an audio output device such as a speaker, and in S1504, audio data indicating the nail state level is output to the audio output device, and the audio output device outputs audio indicating the nail state level. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the nail state level display device 474 constituted by a seven-segment display is exemplified as the output destination of the nail state level. However, the nail state level display device 474 need not necessarily be constituted by a seven-segment display. There is no. For example, the nail state level display device 474 may be configured by a display device such as an LCD that can display various images.

  In the above embodiment, the display device for displaying the nail state level exclusively (that is, the nail state level display device 474) is provided as the nail state level output destination. However, the nail state level output destination is not necessarily required. It is not necessary to be a dedicated display device, and a display device used for other purposes may be configured to also function as a nail-level display device. For example, the nail design level may be displayed on the decorative design display device 479.

  Here, when the nail state level is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, it is preferable that the display position of the nail state level is on the corner side of the decorative symbol display device 479. By displaying the nail state level on the corner side of the decorative symbol display device 479, the displayed nail state level can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the nail state level displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, so that information unrelated to the game (that is, the nail state level) is displayed, so that distrust of the game is displayed. It is possible to appropriately suppress the feeling of being held by the player.

  When the nail state level is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the nail state level may be displayed during the execution of the first special symbol change display. Thus, a person who confirms the nail state level (for example, an outsider such as a member of a gaming machine inspection organization) can perform the nail state level during the game played by the player (that is, without opening the front block 102). Can be confirmed. Instead of displaying the nail state level on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is open, the decorative symbol display device 479 is displayed at a predetermined time, such as during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. May be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the nail state level display device 474 is provided at a position where the front block 102 is visible when the front block 102 is opened to the intermediate block 103. Is not necessarily the location exemplified above. For example, the nail state level display device 474 may be provided at a position that is invisible to the player playing the game (for example, on the back side of the pachinko machine 100). That is, the nail state level display device 474 may be provided at a position visible from the back side of the intermediate block 103, and may be provided on any of the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, or the sub control board 940.

(6) Display Contents of the Nail State Level Displayed in S1504 In the above embodiment, the nail state level value calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, but the nail state level is indicated. If it is information, the display content (output content) indicating the nail state level does not necessarily need to be a numerical value. For example, when the nail state level display device 474 is constituted by, for example, an LCD, even if the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed as a number, it is displayed as a symbol, a character, a graphic, or the like corresponding to each numerical value. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the form of a bar code (for example, a two-dimensional bar code) indicating the number of figures, such as a circle or a square, or a numerical value according to each numerical value.

  In the above embodiment, the value of the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. However, the value calculated in S1502 is displayed on a display device such as a 7-segment display or LCD. It is good also as a structure which performs. That is, a configuration in which the process of S1503 is omitted may be adopted.

  In the above embodiment, the value of the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. However, the numerical value calculated in S1503 or the value calculated in S1502 is replaced with a predetermined value. Information encrypted based on the operation may be displayed on a display device such as a 7-segment display or an LCD. By displaying the encrypted information, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that information irrelevant to the game (that is, the nail state level or the like) is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from having a distrust of the game.

  The predetermined calculation may be performed by a fixed calculation formula, may be performed periodically (for example, every hour), or at a predetermined timing (for example, a winning random number counter related to a special symbol becomes a predetermined value). (Timing), an operation may be performed by an arithmetic expression that is changed based on a predetermined pattern. Regardless of whether the arithmetic expression is fixed or variable, a person who verifies the encrypted information (for example, an external person such as a member of a gaming machine inspection organization) Is preferably signaled decodable.

(7) Output Timing of Nail State Level In the above embodiment, the nail state level is displayed and output on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is in the open state. However, it is not always necessary that the front block 102 is in the open state. For example, the nail state level may be constantly displayed on the nail state level display device 474. Further, the nail state level may be displayed on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is opened and a predetermined operation is input. Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 100 receives an output request transmitted from a terminal device, a management device, or the like, the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, or the transmission source terminal device or management It may be configured to output data indicating the nail state level to an apparatus or the like.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, a prize ball is awarded for entering a prize device to be counted, but a movable piece that is not related to the jackpot lottery and that can change the entry probability is also provided. Although the configuration is limited to the general winning devices 439A and 439B which are not provided, a winning device in which a jackpot lottery is performed by entering as in the starting winning devices 431A, 431B and 432, and a movable piece which can change the entry probability are provided at the entrance. The right starting winning device 432 and the like provided in the portion may be counted, and the nail state level may be calculated for each winning device.

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B for separately detecting the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B are separately provided. The configuration may be such that the path of the game ball that has entered 439B is joined at the downstream side, and the number of general winnings is counted by a common winning switch. The winning switch used for counting the number of general winnings may be a switch used for paying out a prize ball, or may be provided separately from a switch used for paying out a prize ball.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning number is collectively counted for a plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B which respectively detect the game balls entering the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B. The general winning number counters may be separately provided corresponding to the plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B, and the general winning number and the nail state level may be separately displayed on the general winning devices 439A and 439B. . In this case, the prize switch for counting the number of prizes by the prize number counter is such that when a specific game technique (for example, a left-handed game technique) is performed, the game ball can enter only by the game technique. A prize device (or a prize port, for example, a general prize device 439A) and a prize device (or a prize port, for example, a general prize device 439B) in which a game ball can enter by another game technique (for example, a right-handed game technique). It is preferable to provide a value appropriately reflecting the arrangement state of members that affect the flow of a game ball such as a nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of each winning device or in the vicinity thereof. As a result, it is possible to accurately acquire the general winning number and the nail state level.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration in which the number of general winnings is counted for one counting period and the nail state level is displayed has been described. However, the configuration in which the number of general winnings is separately counted for a plurality of counting periods is described. It may be. For example, a general winning number counter is provided separately for a plurality of gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state and a special gaming state), and a general winning number and a nail state level are separately provided for each gaming state. May be displayed.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the number of general winnings and the number of shot balls are counted by the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the main control board 920), but during the counting period, the general winning devices 439A, 439A, The configuration may be such that the management device can acquire the number of game balls that have entered the 439B and the number of shot balls during the counting period, and calculate the nail state level in the management device.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the information regarding the nail state level such as the number of shot balls and the general winning number counter is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 901 and is necessary for returning to the game state before the power failure. When the stored information is stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 that stores the stored information and the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the firing ball counter and the general winning number counter are stored. Has been described, but the storage information may be different from the stored information in a method of deleting stored contents. For example, even if the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the values of the number of shot balls counter and the general winning number counter are not erased. It may be configured to be erased only when a specific operation is performed. For example, when a predetermined switch is pressed for a certain period of time or longer, when an erasing operation is performed by a predetermined communication device, or when an erasing operation is performed by a predetermined key (for example, the main control board 920 can be rotated by a key operation. When a predetermined erasable operation is performed (for example, when the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 of the front block 102 is maximized, the storage information is stored by a predetermined switch (not shown)). (When an erasing operation is performed). Further, the information may be stored in a storage medium (for example, a flash memory or an IC chip) different from the storage information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and the information may be stored for a longer time than the storage information. It is preferable that a storage medium that can be stored is provided in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the main control board 920), and information on the nail state level such as the number of shot balls and the general winning number counter is stored in the storage medium.

(11) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Second Embodiment In the second embodiment, a switch (such as a back setting switch 905, an initialization function) provided by a setting changer such as an amusement arcade manager is provided on the pachinko machine 100. By operating the switch 907), a change in the setting of the pitching rate (that is, a change in the setting of the game mode) is performed. Instead, an external device (for example, a management device called a “hole computer”) or a portable terminal device (portable terminal device) capable of communicating with the pachinko machine 100 changes the game mode to the next game mode. A signal corresponding to the instruction or information indicating a game mode to be set may be input to the pachinko machine 100 by communication.

  In the second embodiment, in the determination process S1601, it is configured to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503. In the determination process S1601, it may be configured to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the value calculated in the process of S1502, that is, (value of the general winning number counter / value of the number of shot balls counter). Good. Further, in the determination process S1601, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the value of the general winning number counter counted in a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

  Or, when the number of times the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol is displayed, the number of times the normal symbol is displayed, the number of times the special game state occurs, or the like is used as a divisor to the value of the general winning counter (the dividend). Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601 with respect to a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor.

  Further, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 is counted, and from the counted number of game balls, or the number of game balls, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 but cannot reach the game area is determined in advance. When a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value is adopted as a divisor to the value of the general winning number counter (dividend), the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601 is a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor. May be configured to determine whether or not the output condition is satisfied.

  In the second embodiment, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or more. However, the nail state level is “1”. In such a case, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the value indicates that the nail 411 is likely to be in an appropriate state.

  In the second embodiment, in the determination process S1602, it is configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information regarding the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is satisfied. , 2439B as well as a start-up prize device such as a mid-start prize-winning device 2431, and a determination may be made as to whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied regarding the entry of the game ball into the prize device.

  In the above-described second embodiment, when a game ball enters one predetermined general prize device (for example, the general prize device 2439B) of the general prize device 2439A or the general prize device 2439B, the setting suggestion information is displayed. Although the configuration in which the output condition is determined to be satisfied has been illustrated, the output of the setting suggestion information is performed when a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls enter a predetermined general winning device. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described second embodiment, when a game ball enters one predetermined general prize device (for example, the general prize device 2439B) of the general prize device 2439A or the general prize device 2439B, the setting suggestion information is displayed. Although the configuration in which the output condition is determined to be satisfied has been illustrated, a configuration in which the output condition of the setting suggestion information is determined to be satisfied when the game ball enters any of the general prize device 2439A and the general prize device 2439B may be employed. . That is, when a game ball enters any of a plurality of (two or more) predetermined prize devices, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601. Is also good. Further, even when the game ball enters both of a plurality of (two or more) predetermined prize devices, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601. Good.

  When a game ball enters a predetermined plurality of winning devices in a predetermined order (for example, in the order of the general winning device 2439B and the general winning device 2439A), the setting suggestion information is determined in the determination process S1601. May be configured to determine whether or not the output condition is satisfied. In other words, when a plurality of predetermined prize devices are provided, not only the entry of the game balls into the plurality of prize devices, but also a configuration that includes the order of the entry as a requirement of the output condition of the setting suggestion information. Good. This allows the player to obtain setting suggestion information as a privilege of having the game balls enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be satisfied by an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute according to the player's intention during the special game state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information may be satisfied by another operation. For example, in a normal game state that is advantageous to a player by performing a game by a left-handed game technique, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is easily satisfied when a right-handed game technique different from the left-handed game technique is performed. In this case, in this case, for example, a game ball fired by a right-handed game method such as the combination operating device 435 can pass with a high probability (approximately 50% or more is preferable, and approximately 70% or more is preferable). It is preferable that the area is a simple area so that the player can easily establish the output condition of the setting suggestion information, and the game ball is an area to which other functions are added and which is not used in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the passing is set as the output condition of the setting suggestion information because it is easy to set the area so that the game ball can pass with a high probability while suppressing the number of parts. In addition, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 in the normal game state, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the game ball lending operation is performed. Is performed by operating the ball removal operation member 232 (see FIG. 1) to perform an aggressive operation from the ball overflow switch 249 so that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241. May be added.

  In the second embodiment, in the setting suggestion information related process S2021, if it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in any one of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the setting is performed. Although the output of the suggestion information is executed, a part of the output condition of the setting suggestion information is individually set in a plurality of determination processes, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when all the conditions are satisfied. The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion information is output. For example, when it is determined that the output condition of each setting suggestion information is satisfied in all of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the configuration suggestion information may be output.

  In the second embodiment, the special display (the first special design, the second special) in the unit game related to the special design and the decoration design, the fluctuating display time (fluctuating time) of the game mode is currently set However, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period set within a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, The effect time of the appearing predetermined suggestive effect may be selectable in accordance with the currently set game mode. The “suggested effect” is an effect that indicates the degree (or expectation) of the ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is definitely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In the second embodiment, when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the variable display time in accordance with the game mode, the currently set game mode (that is, the main control board 920 at that time) is selected. Of the variable display time assigned to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the game), but the lottery for determining whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode is performed. In the case of winning, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the variable display time assigned to the game mode currently set in the sub control board 940 May be selected. Further, a configuration may be employed in which the sub-control board 940 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to change the variable display time in accordance with the game mode.

  In the RAM clear processing S2002 of the main processing (see FIG. 17) of the main control board 920 in the second embodiment, information of substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is erased. However, in the RAM clear processing S2002, all the information stored in the RAM including the setting correspondence information may be erased.

  In the main process of the main control board 920 (see FIG. 17) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is on (S2001: Y), Each process (S2002 to S2006) related to the setting of the game state is configured to be executed. In addition, even if it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), if the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, The configuration may be such that the processes (S2002 to S2006) related to the state setting are executed. Specifically, after execution of the RAM clear processing S1008, the process waits until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned on, and when it is determined that the setting signal has been switched to the on state, each of the settings relating to the setting of the game state is performed. The processing (S2002 to S2006) may be executed.

(12) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Third Embodiment In the third embodiment, the nine types of settings that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are the probability change termination rates for each type. (The value obtained by subtracting the probability change continuation rate from 1) is the same value. By setting the probability of three stages in each type, the big hit probability at the time of high probability (big hit probability in the probability change game state) is made different for each setting. In the above, the configuration in which the probable change game end probabilities are different for each setting has been described as an example. Instead of this, it is good also as a structure which makes the big hit probability at the time of high probability in each of the nine types of settings the same value, and makes the probability change end probability different for each setting by making the probability change end rate different for each setting, It is good also as a structure which makes the big hit probability at the time of a high probability in each of nine types of settings different, and makes the probability change end probability different by making each of the probability change end rates in each of the nine types different.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the nine types of settings that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are configured such that the probable change game end probabilities are different for each setting. However, it is not necessary to make the setting different in all the settings, and the setting may be made to include the setting with the same probable change game end probability. For example, for each of the three types of settings belonging to each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, the jackpot probability at the time of high probability and the probability change end in each setting are set so that the probability change game termination probability becomes the same value within the same type. It is good also as composition which sets a rate.

  In the third embodiment, the period from the first unit game in the probability change game state to the unit game immediately before the lottery reach generation unit game (ie, the unit games in the probability change states A and B are executed). The period) is configured such that the increase in the number of acquired balls due to the small hit winning is limited, but the configuration may be such that the number of acquired balls increases by the small hit winning from the first unit game in the probable game state.

  In a gaming machine having a configuration in which the number of balls obtained from the first unit game in the probability change game state by the small hits win increases, as the number of unit games that can be obtained by the game ball by the small hits win increases, the acquisition ball in the probability change game state Since the number (small winning balls) increases, the smaller the jackpot probability (high probability) in the probable change game state (that is, the harder it is to win the big hit), the larger the number of small hit balls can be obtained. The smaller the probability of transitioning to the normal gaming state later (that is, the higher the probability of continuation of change), the greater the number of small winning balls obtained.

  For this reason, if the top type whose initial hit probability is significantly low but the probability of continuation is significantly high is set by the setting change function, it is difficult to win the jackpot lottery in the normal game state, but from the normal game state, Once a transition is made to the probable play state via the special play state, the chance of acquiring game balls by the small hit bonus in a unit game in the probable play state can be increased, so that the number of obtained balls is greatly increased. Becomes possible.

  On the other hand, if the bottom type with a significantly higher initial hit probability but a significantly lower probability of continuation is set by the setting change function, it is easy to win the big hit lottery in the normal gaming state, but then the normal gaming state Easy to return. It is difficult to obtain game balls due to the small hitting bonus in the probable change game state, so that the number of obtained balls can be increased mainly by obtaining game balls in the special game state.

  For example, as the jackpot probability in the bottom type game mode, the low probability is 1/10 and the high probability is 1/5, while the low probability in the top type game mode is 1/100 and the high probability is 1/100. The probability change continuation rate is set to be common (for example, 1/2) regardless of the type.

  In addition, the average number of obtained balls in one special game state is set to 10 balls regardless of the type of the type, such as a top type or a bottom type. When the average number of acquired balls is 40 in the bottom type and 490 in the top type, the expected value of the acquired number of balls per initial hit (big hit in a normal game state) is 50 in the bottom type. (= 10 + 40), and 500 balls (= 10 + 490) in the top type. If the probable playing state continues for two consecutive times on average, the expected value of the number of acquired balls in the bottom type is 100 balls (= 50 × 2), and the expected value of the number of acquired balls in the top type is 1,000 balls (= 500 × 2). ).

  Accordingly, in this example, the bottom type is set such that the initial hit occurs with a probability of 1/10, but the expected value of the number of acquired balls is 100 balls. In the top type, the initial hit occurs with a probability of 1/100 lower than that in the bottom type, but the expected value of the number of acquired balls is set to be 1000 balls larger than that in the bottom type.

  In other words, when set to the bottom type, it is easy to make initial hits, but it is difficult to obtain game balls, and when set to the top type, it is difficult to make initial hits, but it is possible to create specifications that are easy to obtain game balls. . In the above example, the top type has 10 times the initial hit probability with respect to the bottom type, and the number of obtained balls (balls) is 10 times. It is almost the same.

  In the third embodiment, of the protrusions 1537 and 1538, the protrusion 1537A located on the most upstream side is provided at a position that does not overlap the opening of the first downstream passage portion 1532A when viewed from above (see FIG. 20 (C)), the protrusion 1537 or the protrusion 1538 may be provided at a position overlapping the opening of the first flow passage portion 1532A in a top view. By providing the protruding portion 1537 or the protruding portion 1538 at a position overlapping with the opening of the first downflow passage portion 1532A in a top view, the course direction is changed by the collision of the game ball with the protruding portions 1537, 1538. There may be a situation where the vehicle easily enters the one downstream passage portion 1532A.

  The positional relationship between the opening of the first downflow passage 1532A and the protrusions 1537, 1538 is such that the game ball is meandered in the front-rear direction by the protrusions 1537, 1538 in a top view. It is preferable to be located above the position. The “position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the protrusions 1537 and 1538” may be a position before the game ball reaches the protrusions 1537 and 1538 as in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment. Alternatively, it may be a position where the game ball has been moved either forward or backward by the protrusions 1537, 1538.

  In the third embodiment, the right starting winning device 1432 includes two flowing passage portions 1532A and 1532B as a flowing passage portion through which a game ball entered from the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432 can pass. However, as long as the first downstream passage portion 1532A has the shape described in the third embodiment, a configuration including three or more downstream passage portions may be employed.

  In the third embodiment, the maximum allowable time of the right big prize winning device 1434 released as the small hit privilege is different depending on the game mode changed by changing the setting of the throwing rate. A game in which the number of times the right special winning device 1434 is opened as a winning privilege or the interval time provided between each opening when the right special winning device 1434 is opened a plurality of times is changed by changing the setting of the throwing rate. The configuration may differ depending on the mode.

  In the third embodiment, the right special winning device 1434 does not have the specific passage and the non-specific passage as the upper special winning device 2433 (see FIG. 14). The game may be configured as a special prize device similar to the special prize device 2433, and when the game ball that has entered the right special prize device 1434 passes through a specific path in the special game state, the game may be shifted to the positive change game state after the special game state. Good.

(13) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fourth Embodiment In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 act as termination conditions for the variable time reduction function. And the number of times the small hits are established by each small hit symbol is determined according to the combination of the type of the combination of the symbols in which the condition device is activated and the game state at the time of the operation of the conditional device based on the combination of the symbols. However, the type of the combination of the symbols that will cause the condition device to operate, or the game state at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the combination of the symbols, becomes the termination condition of the variable time reduction function. The configuration may be such that the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol are determined.

  Alternatively, the number of actuations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol, which are the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, are determined by the type of symbol combination or the symbol in which the condition device is activated. The configuration may be determined irrespective of a game state or the like at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination of.

  In the fourth embodiment, the next operation of the condition device is included as one of the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function. However, the next operation of the condition device is not included in the termination condition of the variable time reduction function. It may be. In addition to the number of times the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are activated and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol, the next time the operation of the condition device is added to the end condition of the variable time shortening function, so that the variable time reducing function is performed. Can be suitably diversified.

  In the fourth embodiment, three types of small hit symbols are provided in the second special symbol. However, the number of small hit symbols in the second special symbol is not limited to three, but may be one or two. Or four or more types.

  In the fourth embodiment, the number of small hits (the number of small hits) is used as the end condition of the variable time reduction function. However, the number of times of opening the right big prize device 1434 based on the small hits ( The number of times the entry control mechanism 1454 assumes the entry allowable posture) may be used as the end condition of the variable time reduction function.

  In the fourth embodiment, after the special game state and before the activation of the variable time reduction function, the remaining period until the variable time reduction function ends is set in the remaining period counter, and the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are set. Each time is operated, the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter is decremented by one. However, it is not always necessary to store information corresponding to the remaining period by information matching the remaining period. The set value may be stored by a value set in a table or the like, or information capable of calculating the remaining period may be stored. For example, each time the special symbol display devices 471, 472 operate, the number of times the special symbol display devices 471, 472 are activated and the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol are counted by a predetermined counter, and based on the value of the counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not the end condition of the variable time reduction function is satisfied.

  In the configuration in which the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 is counted by the predetermined counter as described above every time the special symbol display devices 471, 472 operate, the main control board 920 includes the special symbol display device. Each time 471, 472 is operated, the contents of the predetermined counter (the number of times the special symbol display devices 471, 472 are activated) and the special symbol display devices 471, 472 set as the end condition of the variation time reduction function are set. A configuration may be adopted in which the remaining period until the end of the variable time reduction function is calculated from the number of operations, and the value of the calculated remaining period is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM.

  In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the game state of the high probability state and the time saving state, and the display of the display units 1711 and 1712 is performed. Although the mode and the amount of overlap of the display units 1711 and 1712 are changed in accordance with the change in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, such display is performed in the high probability state and the time saving game state. In addition to the case, the display may be performed in various game states such as a game state in a low probability state and a time saving state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the sizes of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are gradually increased as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that both display units are displayed. Although the overlap amount of 1711 and 1712 is increased, the overlap amount of both display units 1711 and 1712 is increased by increasing at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712. It is good also as composition which makes it do.

  Alternatively, by moving at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 without changing the size of each of the display units 1711 and 1712, the amount of overlap between the two display units 1711 and 1712 is increased. The configuration may be such that the movement of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 and the change in the size of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are performed. A configuration in which the amount of overlap between the two display units 1711 and 1712 may be increased by a combination.

  In the configuration in which the amount of overlap between the two display units 1711 and 1712 is increased, as shown in FIG. 26, the display units 1711 and 1712 do not need to be separated from each other at the initial position. It may be configured to overlap each other at the initial position.

  In the fourth embodiment, the overlap amount of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 increases as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that the transition time of the game state is changed. Although it is configured to expect the arrival, the distance between the display portions 1711 and 1712 does not overlap, and the distance between the display portions 171 and 1712 decreases as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. It is good also as composition which expects arrival.

  In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are displayed on the upper end side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, but the display positions of these display units 1711 and 1712 are displayed. Is not limited to the upper end of the screen, and may be any of the lower end, the left end, or the right end.

  In the fourth embodiment, the numbers corresponding to the remaining periods of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711. However, the numbers corresponding to the remaining periods of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are used. The remaining period related to the establishment of the small hit by each small hit symbol may be displayed without displaying the number corresponding to the remaining time or the number corresponding to the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472.

(14) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, the number of small wins (the number of small hits) is set as the termination condition of the probability variation function. The number of times of opening the right big winning device 1434 based on the small hit winning (the number of times the entry control mechanism 1454 becomes the entry allowable posture) may be set as a condition for shifting to another game state. A configuration in which a termination condition may be adopted, or a configuration in which the same special gaming state as a big hit winning is generated when the number of small hits established in the normal gaming state (the number of small hits winning) satisfies a predetermined condition. It may be.

(15) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 becomes shorter, the game state of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is changed. The information (character string “PERFECT RUSH”) is configured to be more recognizable. Alternatively, or in addition, as the remaining period related to the establishment of the small hit by the small hit symbol becomes shorter, the transition is made. A configuration in which the recognizability of the game state information of the rear game state display unit 1712 may be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the game state information of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is configured as a character string composed of a plurality of characters. However, the game state information includes a character string, a symbol, a picture, and the like. May be combined.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined initial state in which the game state display unit 1712 after the transition is displayed or at a time close to the initial state, all characters constituting the game state information (character string “PERFECT RUSH”) are displayed. Although the image 1713 is displayed so as to be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize, it is not always necessary that all characters constituting the game state information are unrecognizable or difficult to recognize in the initial state, and the game state information is not necessarily formed. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the characters are displayed so as to be recognizable.

  In the above embodiment, the time when all the characters constituting the game state information become recognizable is, as shown in FIG. 28 (E), after the internal game state of the probable change game state transitions to the non-time saving state. However, the time at which all characters constituting the game state information become recognizable is not limited to after the internal game state of the probable change game state transitions to the non-time saving state, but “0” is displayed in the remaining period display section 1711. The displayed time (see FIG. 28D), or the time when the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the time when “5” is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711) And so on.

  In the sixth embodiment, one or a plurality of rectangular blocks are displayed as the image 1713 in which at least a part of characters constituting the game state information is unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. The image 1713 can be adopted as long as it is an image in which at least a part of the characters constituting is unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. For example, an image of a chain wound multiple times around the game state display unit 1712 after the transition is adopted as the image 1713, and as the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 becomes shorter, the chain becomes loose and the game state You may comprise so that the character which comprises information may become recognizable gradually.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the size of the post-transition game state display section 1712 greatly changes by one step, the post-transition game state display section 1712 (the post-transition game state display section 1712A) which is larger than the post-change size is displayed. After the temporary display, the post-transition game state display section 1712 of the size after the change is configured to be displayed. However, after temporarily displaying the post-transition game state display section 1712 smaller than the post-change size, the change is performed. It is good also as a structure which displays the game state display part 1712 after transition of the magnitude | size after.

  In the sixth embodiment, the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is configured to increase stepwise according to the change in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. The configuration may be such that it becomes smaller stepwise according to the change in the remaining period. In the configuration in which the post-transition game state display section 1712 is gradually reduced, when the size of the post-transition game state display section 1712 changes by one step, the post-transition game state display section 1712, which is larger than the post-transition game state, Alternatively, the post-transition game state display unit 1712 having the changed size may be displayed after temporarily displaying the post-transition game state display unit 1712 smaller than the changed size.

  Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 is configured to increase stepwise according to the change in the remaining period according to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. The configuration may be such that it becomes smaller stepwise according to a change in the remaining period. In the configuration in which the remaining period display unit 1711 is gradually reduced, when the size of the remaining period display unit 1711 is reduced by one step, the remaining period display unit 1711 that is larger than the changed size or the changed size is changed. After temporarily displaying the remaining period display unit 1711 that is smaller than that, the remaining period display unit 1711 having the changed size may be displayed.

  In the sixth embodiment, after temporarily displaying the remaining period display portion 1711 or the post-transition game state display portion 1712 which is larger than the changed size, the remaining period display portion 1711 having the changed size or the post-transition game is displayed. Although the state display unit 1712 is configured to be displayed, the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is displayed before the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 of the changed size is displayed. May be temporarily deformed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 are provided within the period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function. Each time the predetermined time has arrived, the display is enlarged one step at a time. However, the size of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 has a special symbol display device 471, 472. May be configured not to change over the period until the number of times of the operation reaches the end condition of the fluctuation time reducing function.

  In such a configuration, only the remaining period display unit 1711 is temporarily changed (enlarged, reduced, or deformed) within the period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function. Or a combination of two or more of these) and a time when both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 temporarily change synchronously.

  In the sixth embodiment, during the period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function, the time when only the remaining period display unit 1711 is temporarily expanded, A period is provided in which both the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 are temporarily expanded in synchronization, but only the post-transition game state display section 1712 is temporarily expanded. A configuration may be provided in which both the remaining period display section 1711 and the post-transition game state display section 1712 are synchronized and temporarily expanded.

  In the sixth embodiment, only the remaining period display section 1711 is temporarily expanded during the period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function (hereinafter, referred to as a time period). This time is also referred to as “first time” for convenience, and the time when both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are temporarily expanded in synchronization (hereinafter, this time is referred to as “first time” for convenience) 2 period), but the mode of the temporary change of the remaining period display portion 1711 or the post-transition game state display portion 1712 in the first period or the second period need not necessarily be expanded. Instead, it may be enlarged, reduced, or modified, or a combination of two or more of them.

  In the second period, the mode of the temporary change of the remaining period display section 1711 and the mode of the temporary change of the post-transition game state display section 1712 are not necessarily the same, and the remaining period display section The mode of the temporary change of 1711 and the mode of the temporary change of the post-transition game state display unit 1712 may be different. In addition, the mode of the temporary change of the remaining period display unit 1711 (or the post-transition game state display unit 1712) in the first period is at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game state display unit 1712 in the second period. The configuration may be different from one of the modes of the temporary change.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, only the remaining period display section 1711 is temporarily enlarged within the period until the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function (second period). One period) and a period (second period) in which both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 are temporarily expanded in synchronization with each other, but the first period is set within the period. It is good also as composition provided with a time which is neither a time nor a 2nd time. For example, during the period, as a period other than the first period and the second period, both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 temporarily disappear in synchronization, or the post-transition game state. A configuration in which only the display unit 1712 is temporarily enlarged may be provided.

  In the sixth embodiment, the present invention (first to third features) has been described by exemplifying a gaming state in a high probability state and a time saving state. The first to third features described above may be applied to various game states, such as not limited to the low probability state and the time saving state.

(16) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471, 472 is satisfied. If the special symbol lottery to be performed does not win a big hit, the remaining period display unit 1711 displaying zero information (specifically, the number “0”) indicates the start condition of the last special symbol. Although the display is performed in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the symbol based on the establishment, the display time of the remaining period display unit 1711 in which the zero information is displayed is based on the establishment of the start condition of the last special symbol. It may be after the symbol change display is started.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the special symbol lottery performed based on the start condition of the last special symbol being satisfied in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is won, a big information is won. Is displayed so that the zero information is not visible by not displaying the remaining period display unit 1711. However, only the zero information (specifically, the number “0”) in the remaining period display unit 1711 is displayed. May be hidden or the image may be superimposed on the zero information to such an extent that the zero information cannot be recognized, thereby making the zero information invisible.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the special symbol lottery performed based on the start condition of the last special symbol being satisfied in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is established, zero information is obtained when a big hit is won. Although it is configured to be invisible, the visibility of the zero information is configured to be lower than the visibility of the zero information of the remaining period display unit 1711 displayed when the big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery. Is also good.

  For example, an image is superimposed on a part of the zero information (specifically, the number “0”) in the remaining period display unit 1711, the remaining period display unit 1711 is reduced together with the zero information, or only the zero information part is displayed. A situation in which the zero information is displayed, but the zero information is difficult to view, such as by reducing the size, bringing the color of the zero information closer to the background color, or bringing the color of the background portion for the zero information closer to the color of the zero information. May be adopted. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the visibility of the zero information in the remaining period display unit 1711 is reduced by reducing the remaining period display unit 1711.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the gaming state of the high probability state and the time saving state, when the start condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is satisfied, the special symbol is started. Although the display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 is changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the condition, the change of the display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 is a high probability state and a time reduction game state. In addition to the case, the display may be performed in various game states such as a game state in a low probability state and a time saving state.

(18) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Eighth Embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display section 2591 by operating the initialization switch 907. The operation unit for displaying the result of the error determination on the status display unit 2591 is not necessarily the initialization switch 907, and other switches such as the status return switch 2592 may be used to display the result of the base error determination on the status display unit 2591. May be configured to be a switch for displaying the result of the determination, or a configuration may be such that a dedicated operation unit for displaying the result of the base error determination on the status display unit 2591 is provided. When a display device having a screen (display) capable of inputting information is provided, an operation for displaying a result of base error determination on the status display unit 2591 is input to the screen. Is also good.

  A switch for executing a function different from the function of displaying the result of the base error determination on the status display unit 2591, such as the initialization switch 907, for displaying the result of the base error determination on the status display unit 2591. By diverting as a switch, there is no need to provide a dedicated operation unit, and the cost required to output the result of base error determination can be suppressed.

  In the eighth embodiment, base error determination is performed using the base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492, and when a base error is detected, a display indicating the result of the base error determination (“H , "L", or "A") is displayed on the status display portion 2591 composed of a 7-segment display as information that can be output using the base data. In this case, the value of the base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 (that is, the number of general winnings per predetermined number of launch balls) may be displayed on a predetermined display unit. Further, when a base error is detected, information corresponding to the nail state level calculated in S1503 or a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter calculated in S1502 by the value of the firing ball number counter (general winning number) The value of the number counter / the value of the number of fired balls counter), information corresponding to the value, or the like may be displayed on a predetermined display unit.

  In the eighth embodiment, while the initialization switch 907 is operated (pressed), the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591, and when the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed, the base error is determined. The configuration is such that the result of the judgment is hidden. Instead, when the initialization switch 907 is operated, the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the display is terminated with the end of the period. May be hidden.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed, the result of the base error determination displayed on the status display unit 2591 is hidden, but the operation of the initialization switch 907 is not performed. May be configured to continue to display the result of the base error determination even after the process is completed. In such a configuration, when a predetermined error that has been set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 occurs while the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591 after the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed. Alternatively, the error may be displayed on the status display unit 2591 instead of the result of the base error determination, and the result of the base error determination may be displayed again instead of displaying the error when the error is resolved.

  In the eighth embodiment, while the initialization switch 907 is operated, the result of the base error determination for each base data is sequentially displayed on the status display section 2591, but the latest base data ( That is, a configuration in which only the result of the base error determination for the current base data) or a configuration in which only the result of the base error determination for the base data in which the base error is detected may be displayed.

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 that is turned on when a base error is detected is provided at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 100. However, the notification unit 2491 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100. It may be configured to be provided at a position visible from the side (for example, the upper right edge 211C of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration 210). By providing the notification unit 2491 at a position visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 100, it is easy for employees of the game arcade and members of the inspection organization of the game machine to recognize that a base error has been detected.

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is connected to the main control board 920. However, the notification unit 2491 is connected to a board other than the main control board 920 (for example, the sub control board 940 or the payout control board 930). It may be configured to be connected.

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is provided as an output destination when a base error is detected. However, a display device such as the decorative design display device 479, a panel light-emitting device 490, and a frame light-emitting device 271 to 271 are provided. A light emitting device such as H.275 may be used as an output destination when a base error is detected.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the base error is detected, the notification unit 2491 is turned on. When the initialization switch 907 is operated while the notification unit 2491 is turned on, the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit. Although the configuration is displayed on the display unit 2591, the result of the base error determination may be displayed on the status display unit 2591 when the initialization switch 907 is operated without providing the notification unit 2491.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the base error is detected, the notification unit 2491 is turned on. When the initialization switch 907 is operated while the notification unit 2491 is turned on, the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit. 2591, the timing for turning on the notification unit 2491 does not necessarily have to be when a base error is detected, but every predetermined time (for example, every 8 hours) or from the launch device 330. Every time a predetermined number (for example, 50,000) of the number of game balls fired are fired, or every time a predetermined number (for example, 8000) of start winning of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is generated. Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the special game state may be a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times).

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is turned on when a base error is detected with respect to the latest base data (current base data). The present invention is not limited to the case where a base error is detected with respect to data. For example, the case where a base error is detected with respect to two or three base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492, or the case where a base error is detected. May be the case where a base error is detected with respect to the average value of two or three base data stored in the base data.

  In the eighth embodiment, after the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591, the notification unit 2491 is turned off when the status return switch 2592 is operated (pressed). The notification unit 2491 may be changed from a lighting state to a blinking state by operating the state return switch 2592. By making the notification unit 2491 blink, it is possible to identify that the contents of the base error displayed on the status display unit 2591 have been confirmed by an employee of the game arcade or a member of the inspection organization of the gaming machine.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, a configuration is provided in which a launch ball counter (that is, a second launch counter) used for determining a base error is provided separately from the launch ball counter used for calculating the nail state level. However, a configuration in which the calculation of the nail state level and the determination of the base error are performed based on the count value of the number-of-launched-balls counter 1 may be used. Similarly, in the eighth embodiment, apart from the general winning number counter used for calculating the nail state level, a general winning number counter (that is, a second general winning number counter) for use in determining a base error is provided. Although the configuration is provided, the configuration may be such that the calculation of the nail state level and the determination of the base error are performed based on the count value of one general winning number counter.

  In the eighth embodiment, the status display unit 2591 for displaying a predetermined error preset for the pachinko machine 100 is configured to be used as the output destination of the result of the base error determination. A configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated display unit for displaying the result of the above is provided.

  In the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process S1801 that the game mode has the lowest initial hit probability, the process of determining whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied (determination processes S1802 to S1804) ) Is performed, but not only the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability but also a part or all of the game modes other than the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability among a plurality of game modes that can be set in the pachinko machine 100. In the case of the game mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a determination process (determination processes S1802 to S1804) is performed to determine whether an output condition for setting suggestion information is satisfied. Since the setting suggestion information can be output also for game modes other than the game mode with the first hit probability being the lowest, the playability that the player can identify the game mode set in the pachinko machine 100 during the game is more appropriately. Can be added. In addition, since the number of selection elements for selecting the pachinko machine 100 to be played by the player increases, the playability of selecting the pachinko machine 100 to play in the pachinko machine 100 in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages is also improved.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the determination processes S1601 to S1605 are configured to be performed even when the game mode is not the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, but the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is set. When it is determined, the determination processing S1601 to S1605 may be performed.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the initial hit probability is the lowest game mode, the setting suggestion information is output when it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in any of the determination processes S1802 to S1804. However, if the initial hit probability is the lowest game mode (ie, if the first hit probability is determined to be the lowest game mode in the determination process S1801), the setting suggestion information is unconditionally transmitted. The output may be configured. In such a case, if the initial hit probability is the lowest game mode, the setting suggestion information is output unconditionally, while if the first hit probability is the predetermined game mode other than the lowest game mode, the determination process S1802 is performed. The configuration suggestion information may be output when a predetermined output condition determined in steps S1804 to S1804 or the determination processes S1601 to S1605 is satisfied.

  In the eighth embodiment, the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be satisfied when the initial hit probability is the lowest game mode. However, the probability that the setting suggestion information can be output is the initial hit probability. The probability is not necessarily required, and any probability that constitutes a game mode that can be set in a plurality of stages (a game mode related to the setting of the ball-shooting rate) is used when the probability is the lowest game mode. It is good also as composition which can satisfy the output conditions of setting suggestion information.

  For example, in each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, in each type, the probable change continuation rate of each type is subdivided into three stages smaller than the width of the probable change continuation rate between the types. In the case of the pachinko machine, the output condition of the setting suggestion information may be satisfied when the lowest probability of change probability (the probability corresponding to the first-stage probability in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment) is set for each type. It may be configured.

  In the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the predetermined operation (S1803: Y), the process proceeds to step S1606 to set the setting suggestion information as the output destination of the setting suggestion information. Has been illustrated on the display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 479) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) only over the predetermined period, but without considering the output condition of the setting suggestion information. In the pachinko machine 100 in which the setting suggestion information is displayed on a predetermined display unit at all times or at predetermined intervals (for example, every 10 seconds), a predetermined operation is performed, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information is the same. Is satisfied, non-display (non-output) of setting suggestion information is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), or a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) By increasing the display interval in the display (for example, every 2 seconds), the display probability of the setting suggestion information (for example, the time ratio in which the setting suggestion information is displayed every 10 seconds) is made lower than in other periods. It may be a configuration.

  As a result, the display probability changes during a certain period (predetermined period) after the predetermined operation is performed, as in the case where the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased as compared with other periods. It is easy for the player to recognize the set suggestion information.

  At this time, if the display probability of the setting suggestion information is reduced during a certain period after the player can perform an operation that can be performed, compared to other periods, the operation after the operation performed by the player himself is Therefore, it is easy to associate the displayed setting suggestion information with the user's own operation, and also in this respect, it is easy for the player to recognize the displayed setting suggestion information. In addition, in a certain period after an operation that can be performed by a specific person other than a player (for example, an employee of a game arcade), the display probability of the setting suggestion information is lower than in other periods. In this case, by making it easier for the player to recognize the setting suggestion information after a certain operation other than the player has performed a certain operation, the player can be prevented from having a distrust of the operation. .

(19) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, as a countermeasure for immersion in a game, only a caution display or a caution display and setting suggestion information (more specifically, a first hit probability Is configured to be able to display both the setting suggestion information corresponding to the lowest game mode in the type, but may be a configuration capable of displaying only the setting suggestion information. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of a caution display and setting suggestion information is displayed as the content to be displayed as a countermeasure for immersion in a game.

  In the ninth embodiment, the attention display or the setting suggestion information is displayed (output) on the decoration symbol display device 479 to take measures against the intrusion into the game. Instead of displaying on the device 479, or in addition to displaying the caution display or the setting suggestion information on the decorative design display device 479, a sound corresponding to the caution display (for example, "Beware of excessive gaming" Sound, etc.) or sound corresponding to the setting suggestion information (e.g., sound such as "the lowest initial probability is set" or sound that is not output in other situations). By outputting from 282, a configuration for taking measures against immersion in a game may be adopted.

  In the ninth embodiment, the attention display or the setting suggestion information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the output destination of the attention display or the setting suggestion information need not always be the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which a caution display or setting suggestion information is output to a display device different from the decorative design display device 479.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the case where the number of continuous losses in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000 times and in the case where the number of continuous losses is 1000 times or more, the continuous display of the loss variation display as the next display time of the caution display. Although the range in which the number of times can be selected is different (that is, in the former case, the range is from 200 to 400 times, in the case of the latter, the range is from 100 to 200 times), the configuration is illustrated. Regardless of the number of continuous loss in the lottery, the range that can be selected as the continuous number of loss fluctuation display as the next display time of the caution display may be the same. In addition, when the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, an attention display is displayed at a longer interval than when the number of consecutive losing is less than 1000, A configuration in which a selectable range is set as the number of continuous loss change displays as the next display time of the caution display may be set.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the case of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, when the first winning probability is set to the lowest game mode in the type, the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times. In the case described above, the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed at a predetermined probability after the display of the caution information, and 1/10 is exemplified as the probability, but the probability is necessarily 1/10. It is not necessary, and an appropriate probability may be adopted. For example, the probability that the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed after the display of the caution information is 1/1 (that is, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is always displayed after the display of the caution information). There may be.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the case of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, when the first winning probability is set to the lowest game mode in the type, the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times. In the case described above, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed at a predetermined probability after the display of the caution information. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000, the setting mode corresponds to the game mode. Although the configuration in which the setting suggestion information is not displayed is illustrated, even when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is noted similarly to the case where the number of consecutive times is 1000 times or more. The information may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100) after the information is displayed.

  In such a configuration, even if the probability that the setting suggestion information is displayed after the display of the caution information is the same between the case where the continuous number is 1000 times or more and the case where the continuous number is less than 1000 times, Alternatively, a configuration in which the probabilities are different may be used. In a configuration in which the probability of displaying the setting suggestion information after the display of the caution information is different between the case where the number of consecutive times is 1000 times or more and the case where the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times, the number of consecutive times is 1000 times. It is preferable that the probability in the above case is higher than the probability in the case where the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times. By setting the probability in the case where the number of continuations is 1000 times or more higher than the probability in the case where the number of continuations is less than 1000 times, the setting suggestion information (more detailed) In this case, the display frequency of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability in the type is increased, and the player can be appropriately encouraged to pay attention to the excessive game.

  In the ninth embodiment, when the lowest game mode in the type (top type, middle type, bottom type) with the first hit probability is set, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is set to the attention information. Although the configuration that can be displayed after the display is illustrated, any probability that constitutes a game mode that can be set in a plurality of stages (game mode related to the setting of the pitching rate) has the lowest probability. In such a case, the configuration suggestion information may be displayed after the display of the caution information.

  For example, in each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, in each type, the probable change continuation rate of each type is subdivided into three stages smaller than the width of the probable change continuation rate between the types. In the pachinko machine of, when the lowest probability of change probability (probability corresponding to the first-stage probability in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment) is set for each type, the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery is If the number of times is 1,000 or more, the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the game mode may be displayed with a predetermined probability after the display of the attention information.

  In the ninth embodiment, in each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, a game mode in which the initial hit probability is not the lowest among the types (that is, the second stage probability and the third stage probability) is set. In the case, the configuration suggestion information is not displayed irrespective of the number of consecutive losing in the special symbol lottery. However, even when the game mode is set, the first hit probability is the lowest game mode in the type. As in the case where (i.e., the first-stage probability) is set, the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the game mode may be displayed after the display of the attention information. In such a configuration, the first contact probability is set after the display of the attention information, in the case where the game mode with the lowest first hit probability is set in the type and the game mode in which the first contact probability is not the lowest in the type is set. The configurations in which the probabilities of displaying the suggestion information are the same may be the same, or the configurations in which the probabilities are different may be used.

  In the ninth embodiment, the caution display or the setting suggestion display is displayed every time the continuous number of loss variation displays reaches a predetermined number, but a relatively long time regardless of the number of continuous loss variation displays. In a pachinko machine configured to display a caution display or a setting suggestion display at intervals (for example, every hour), the caution display or the setting suggestion display is performed every time the number of consecutive loss variation displays reaches a predetermined number. May be displayed such that the display probability (for example, the time ratio at which the setting suggestion information is displayed per 10 seconds) becomes higher than before the display reaches.

  In the ninth embodiment, when a situation occurs in which the losing is repeated a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery, a caution display or a setting suggestion display (more specifically, a game mode in which the initial hit probability is the lowest in the type) Although the configuration in which the setting suggestion information corresponding to is displayed is illustrated, the condition in which the caution display or the setting suggestion display is displayed is, for example, a situation in which the loss is repeated a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery. In addition to the above, a configuration in which “a situation where a player has consumed a game value (for example, a game ball) of a predetermined amount or more”, such as the situation, may be applied.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, the configuration in which the caution display or the setting suggestion display is displayed has been exemplified. However, a display deletion operation for deleting at least one of those displays, or a display disable operation that makes at least one of those displays undisplayable. An operation or a display probability changing operation (at least one of a raising operation and a lowering operation) for changing a display probability of at least one of the displays may be operated by at least one of an employee or a player of a game arcade. Good. For example, once the attention display is displayed, the attention display is continuously displayed on the display screen in a certain mode, and thereafter, the attention display in another mode (for example, a game display such as a display using large characters or an increase in the number of warning displays) is performed. (A display that is easy for the player to visually recognize), and this display may be made erasable by the player operating the input operation device 260.

  The time at which the caution display or the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment is erased after the display is displayed is not limited to the lapse of a predetermined time, but may be performed instead of or in addition to the predetermined number of times (for example, (Two times), or after a certain game stop period has elapsed after the customer waiting effect has been executed.

  As the position where the caution display or the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment is displayed, it may be displayed at a position overlapping the symbol variation display, and the caution display or the setting suggestion display is displayed in front of the symbol variation display. At least one may be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the caution display and the setting suggestion display.

  As the caution display or the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment, at least a part of these displays may be used for a symbol used for the variable display, or may be displayed using a part of the display effect. . For example, when the first losing reach effect after the display condition of the attention display is satisfied (when a big hit symbol is constituted by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the last symbol is displayed in a variable display and the remaining symbols are displayed Stop a predetermined number of times by adding a caution display (prevention of intrusion) as the last stop symbol to the case where a part of the big hit symbol is configured and stopped, and then the variable display is stopped by a combination of lost symbols). It may be displayed. Further, a period in which at least a part of the symbols constituting the variable display is at least one of the caution display and the setting suggestion display may be set. For example, in the case of three fluctuation displays), the caution display is divided into a plurality of symbols. For example, when three symbols are stopped and displayed, the character "NOMERI" is added to the first symbol and then the operation is stopped. The character "incorporation" may be added to the symbol, and the character "prevention" may be added to the symbol that stops last, and another character is displayed as the next variable display (e.g. ) May be displayed.

  The condition for displaying at least one of the caution display and the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment is that the result of the jackpot winning is not included as a stop result of the variable display being executed and the variable display suspended for execution. Alternatively, if the jackpot winning stop result is included, the warning display or the setting suggestion display may not be displayed even if other display conditions are satisfied.

  The timing at which at least one of the warning display and the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment is displayed is after the illustrated display condition is satisfied, and the suspension of the fluctuation display becomes zero, and the fluctuation until the next start winning prize occurs. The timing may be synchronized with the timing when the condition for stopping the display is satisfied (for example, at the same time as the timing or after a lapse of a fixed time (for example, 2 seconds) thereafter), or a predetermined number of times that the number of times the variable display is suspended is small The display may be performed at a timing synchronized with the time when the condition that the time until the fluctuation display stops after the time becomes less than (for example, once or less) is satisfied, or when the storage amount of the game ball decreases. It may be displayed. The timing at which the storage amount of the game balls is reduced may be determined by providing a sensor for detecting that the storage amount of the game balls has reached a certain amount or less in the storage portion of the game balls, or the operation of renting the game balls may be performed. The timing at which a certain amount of game balls are fired into the game area after the game may be performed.

  In addition, as the "situation in which the player has consumed a game value equal to or more than a predetermined amount", in addition to the "situation in which the loss is continued a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery" illustrated in the ninth embodiment, for example, "In the situation where the number of losing in the special symbol lottery is a predetermined number in comparison with the number of winning in the special symbol lottery (for example, the number of losing is 2000 times the number of winning in the big hit) ), And “the number of game play balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10,000), A situation in which the number of differences between the number of losing in the special symbol lottery and the number of jackpot winnings exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000) and the player continues the game. " , "Beyond a predetermined given period of time (e.g., continuous game period predetermined period (e.g., 5 hours) beyond) player situation continues the game" the like can be exemplified. The “situation in which the player has consumed a game value equal to or more than a predetermined amount” may include only one situation corresponding to the situation, or may be a combination of two or more situations corresponding to the situation. May be included.

  In addition, the "game value" in the above-mentioned "situation in which the player has consumed a game value equal to or more than a predetermined amount" does not necessarily need to be a game ball, and can be used, for example, to receive a loan of a medal or a game ball. Used to borrow game balls such as balance data recorded on prepaid gaming cards (e.g., which can be inserted into a card unit) and bills and electronic money that can be used to borrow game balls. Possible cash or its equivalent.

(20) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Tenth Embodiment In the tenth embodiment, the entrance 3452A1 of the movable member 3452A is provided above the step with respect to the support surface 3452A3, but the entrance 3452A1 is provided. The support surface 3452A3 and the support surface 3452A3 do not form a step, and the periphery of the support surface 3452A3 may be the entrance 3452A1. Also in such a configuration, since a step is formed between the support surface 3452A3 and the support surface 3217A, the angle (gradient) of the downward inclination on the support surface 3452A3 can be reduced.

  In the tenth embodiment, the ball relief portion 3452A6 of the movable member 3452A is configured as a step portion in which the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3 is lower than the wall portion 3452A4 side. However, the wall surface 3452A5 side of the support surface 3452A3 on the outlet portion 3452A2 side may be configured to be inclined downward from the wall portion 3452A4 side. Also in the case where the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured to be inclined downward, similarly to the case where the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured as a stepped portion, the probability that the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is discharged to the passage portion 3218, The probability of being discharged to the passage portion 3241 can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry-prohibited position to the entry-permitted position using the four-bar linkage mechanism including the movable member 3454A, the first link portion 3454B, and the second link portion 3454C. When performing (switching), the movable member 3454A is displaced to the upstream side while the movable member 3454A is displaced so that the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface is increased, but the movable member 3454A is displaced to the upstream side. A predetermined first mechanism for displacing, and a predetermined second mechanism for increasing the descending inclination angle of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A are separately provided, and the movable member 3454A is displaced upstream using the first mechanism. While using the second mechanism, the movable member 3454A is displaced so that the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A is increased. It may be.

  In the tenth embodiment, in a configuration including a passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction and a passage portion 3217 connected to the downstream side and guiding the game ball to the right side, the front side of the passage portion 3215 The opening formed in the passage portion extending in the vertical direction is provided at a position downstream of the first passage portion extending in the vertical direction. In the configuration in which the second passage portion that guides in the horizontal direction is continuously provided, the opening formed in the first passage portion does not necessarily have to be on the front side, and the second passage portion is continuous. Any direction may be used as long as it is a predetermined direction side intersecting with a plane including the direction side and the vertical direction side and on which a winning opening is provided.

  For example, when the second passage portion is provided in the front-rear direction with respect to the first passage portion, and the winning opening of the big winning device is provided on the left side with respect to the second passage portion, An opening may be formed on the left side of the first passage portion.

  In the tenth embodiment, the game balls discharged from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 are guided to the winning opening (entrance) side of the special winning device 3434. A prize device (for example, a start prize device or a general prize device) different from the large prize device such as the large prize device 3434 is provided on the side of the guiding direction of the game ball guided by the guide portion such as The discharged game balls may be guided to the winning opening side of the winning device.

  In addition, as a winning device provided on the side of the guiding direction of the game ball guided by the opening, the probability of entry of the game ball into the winning opening changes according to the attitude of the entry restricting mechanism 3454 like the big winning device 3434. The winning device need not always be a winning device, and may be a winning device in which a winning opening is always open like a general winning device.

  In the tenth embodiment, the entry control mechanism 3452 of the right starting winning device 3432 includes the movable member 3452A that is configured to be rotatable around the vertical direction. The movable member that is configured to be rotatable around the direction side does not necessarily need to be the movable member of the entry restriction mechanism included in the start winning device such as the right start winning device 3432, and may be the movable member that is configured as the large winning device 3434. It may be a movable member of an entry control mechanism provided in the special winning device.

  In the tenth embodiment, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 in the special winning device 3434 is configured such that the support surface for supporting the lower side of the game ball is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction of travel of the game ball, and The movable member 3454A that is displaced so that the angle of the downward inclination is larger than the case of the entry-prohibited posture, and the inclination is such that the game ball supported by the support surface is guided into the winning space of the winning device. Although the movable member that can be displaced like the movable member 3454A is not necessarily the movable member of the entry control mechanism provided in the large winning device such as the large winning device 3434, the right starting winning device 3432 It may be a movable member of an entry control mechanism provided in the start winning device.

  In the tenth embodiment, the passage portion 3216 that branches to the left side and the passage portion 3217 that branches to the right side are provided downstream of the passage portion 3215, but the passage portion 3216 is not provided. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the passage portion 3215 takes either a behavior of being discharged from an opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 or a behavior of entering the passage portion 3217. You may comprise. By not providing the passage portion 3216, a space for providing the passage portion 3216 becomes unnecessary, so that other members and the like can be arranged in the space.

  In the tenth embodiment, the path through which the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 reaches the entrance (entrance) of the special winning device 3433 is the path that enters the passage 3219 via the opening 3218A of the passage 3218. (A path in the directions of arrows Q6 and Q7 in FIG. 40) or a path (a path in the direction of arrows Q11 in FIG. 51) discharged forward from an opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215. Although the configuration is such that a route other than these routes, for example, a game ball flowing down the base 401 can reach the entrance portion of the special winning device 3433 without entering the winning device unit 3200 from the left side of the entrance portion 3211. It may be.

  The path through which the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 reaches the entrance portion of the large winning device 3433 is formed on the path that enters the passage 3219 through the opening 3218A of the passage 3218, or is formed in front of the passage 3215. It is preferable that the opening is limited to any one of the opened opening and the path discharged from the upstream to the forward side in that the damage or failure of the large winning device 3434 including the movable member 3454A due to the game ball can be suppressed.

(21) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Eleventh Embodiment In the eleventh embodiment, between the start switch 466 and the movable member 3452A, the passage portion 3214 formed in the prize device unit 3200 and the passage Although the path in which the game ball reciprocates in the left-right direction is arranged as in the part 3217, the start switch 466 may be provided at a position closer to the movable member 3452A, and the start switch 466 is provided. It is preferable that the movable member 3452A be arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side where the path of the game ball is linearly continuous via the position where the start switch 466 is provided. For example, the configuration may be such that the start switch 466 is provided at a position where a game ball passing through the passage portion 3217 can be detected.

  According to this modification, after the game ball is detected by the start switch 466 (after the game ball enters the starting port of the starter 436), the game ball enters (contacts) the movable member 3452A. Time variation can be reduced. Therefore, the length of the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the normal symbol is changed to the movable member 3452A, which is in contact with the movable member 3452A that has shifted to the entry allowable posture based on the winning of the normal symbol lottery. When the length is set so as not to enter the passage portion 3241 due to the transition to the entry prohibition position, the occurrence of an error can be suppressed.

  Thereby, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied in the non-time saving state, the game ball comes into contact with the movable member 3452A in the entry allowable posture at the timing when the symbol hits the normal symbol display device 473 and the symbol is displayed as the stop symbol ( That is, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is not possible to visually recognize that the game ball that has contacted the support surface 3452A3) and that the game ball that has contacted the movable member 3452A has not entered the passage portion 3241.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the present invention has been described by exemplifying the movable member 3452A that rotates around the vertical direction side. However, the movable member to which the present invention can be applied is not necessarily the movable member 3452A. However, the present invention may be applied to various movable pieces (movable members). For example, two movable pieces included in the right approach restriction mechanism 452 are arranged so that the winning opening is narrowed when the approach is prohibited, and the interval between the leading ends is increased when the approach is allowed. Alternatively, the entry restriction mechanism 1452 includes an arrangement in which the entrance is protruded forward so as to close the winning opening when the entrance is prohibited, and an arrangement in which the entrance is immersed backward to open the winning opening when the entrance is allowed. A movable piece provided in the right entry control mechanism 2452 and a movable piece arranged to close the winning opening when in the entry prohibited position, and to guide a game ball into the winning opening when the entry allowed position is provided. The present invention may be applied to such as.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied in the non-time saving state, the length of the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the normal symbol is based on the fact that the normal symbol lottery is won. The game ball that comes into contact with the movable member 3452A that has shifted to the entry allowable position has a length that cannot enter the passage portion 3241 due to the shift of the movable member 3452A to the entry prohibition position. In the big prize winning device in which the probability of entry of the game ball into the movable member is changed according to the posture of the movable member provided at the entrance according to the game state, the maximum allowable time of the movable member depends on the game state. If the configuration is different, the configuration to which the present invention is applied may be adopted.

  That is, when the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied in the predetermined first game state, the length of the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the special symbol is allowed based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. The configuration may be such that the game ball in contact with the movable member that has shifted to the posture cannot enter a predetermined passage portion in the special winning device due to the shift of the movable member to the entry prohibition position.

(22) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Twelfth and thirteenth Embodiments In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the back setting switch 905 and the back setting switch 905 When a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode (ball pitch) by the initialization switch 907 is performed, when the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is performed after the change operation, the change operation is performed. The game mode changed is set (validated) by the user, but the operation is not limited to the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101, and a predetermined operation is performed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100. In such a case, the game mode changed by the change operation may be set.

  The "predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100" for setting the game mode changed by the operation of the switches 905 and 907 is, for example, an intermediate block for the outer frame 101 described in the twelfth embodiment. An opening operation or closing operation of the front block 103, an opening operation or closing operation of the front block 102 with respect to the outer frame 101 or the intermediate block 103, and a predetermined operation of the key cylinder 141 (see FIG. 5) (for example, a right rotation operation with an operation key). A predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261) on the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1), and a predetermined operation (for example, a rotating operation) on the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 5). Is also good. Alternatively, for example, when an employee of a game arcade uses a magnet or the like to cause a game ball to enter a predetermined prize device (for example, a general prize device 439A, 439B or an upper middle start prize device 431A). Alternatively, the game mode changed by operating the switches 905 and 907 may be set.

  Further, when two or more types of “predetermined operations on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” are performed, the game mode changed by operating the switches 905 and 907 may be set. For example, when an operation of closing the intermediate block 103 opened to the outer frame 101 is performed again after the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is performed, The game mode changed by the operations of 905 and 907 may be set.

  Alternatively, for example, after the opening operation of the front block 102 with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed, a person who has performed the opening operation (for example, an employee of a game arcade) may receive a predetermined prize device (for example, a general prize device 439A, The game mode changed by operating the switches 905 and 907 may be set when a game ball enters the 439B or the upper middle starting winning device 431A).

  In the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the nail state-related processing S1222 shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 34, the game mode is entered by causing the game ball to enter the general prize device 439A or the general prize device 439B as in the above modification. In the case where a configuration capable of setting the throwing rate is applied, when a general prize device 439A or a general prize device 439B is caused to enter a game ball in order to set a game mode, the game ball is entered. On the other hand, the general winning number counter may not be updated (that is, the processing S1403 is not executed). Similarly, in a configuration in which the number of game balls that have entered the start winning device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A is counted, the game ball is caused to enter the starting winning device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A in order to set a game mode. In this case, the configuration may be such that the entry of the game ball is excluded from the count of the game balls that have entered the start winning device.

  Further, when at least one kind of “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” is performed, a game mode changed by operating the switches 905 and 907 may be set. . For example, a predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 and a predetermined operation on a side other than the front side (for example, the back side) of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, a state return switch 2592 (see FIG. 32) ), The game mode changed by operating the switches 905 and 907 may be set.

  In the twelfth embodiment, a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode (ball pitch) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is performed with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In this case, the temporary setting notification (output of the temporary setting notification sound) started by the end of the change operation is stopped when the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is performed. The temporary setting notification may be stopped when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 without being limited to the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the frame 101.

  The “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” for stopping the provisional setting notification is, for example, the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 described in the twelfth embodiment, or the outer frame 101 or An opening operation of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, a predetermined operation with respect to the key cylinder 141 (see FIG. 5) (for example, a right rotation operation with an operation key), and a predetermined operation with respect to the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1) ( For example, the operation may be a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 or a predetermined operation (for example, a rotating operation) on the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 5).

  In addition, when two or more types of “predetermined operations on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” are performed, the provisional setting notification may be stopped. For example, when the operation of closing the intermediate block 103 opened to the outer frame 101 is performed again after the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is performed, the temporary setting is performed. The notification may be stopped.

  Further, when at least one type of “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” is performed, the provisional setting notification may be stopped. For example, a predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 and a predetermined operation on a side other than the front side (for example, the back side) of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, a state return switch 2592 (see FIG. 32) ), The provisional setting notification may be stopped when the pressing operation is performed.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode (ball pitch) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed. If the change operation is performed, the provisional setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound is output when the change operation ends (more specifically, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 using a predetermined key ends). However, when the change operation is completed, a configuration may be employed in which predetermined information is output in addition to the temporary setting notification sound and the opening / closing notification sound.

  Note that the “predetermined information” output when the game mode change operation is completed may be information based on sounds such as a temporary setting notification sound and an opening / closing notification sound, such as a panel light emitting device 490 and a frame light emitting device. The information may be information based on light output from a light emitting device such as 271 to 275, or may be information based on an image output from a display device such as the decorative design display device 479, and may be an external management device (for example, The data may be data output to a so-called “hole computer” management device), a portable terminal, or the like.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode (ball pitch) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed. If the change operation is performed, the provisional setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound is output when the change operation ends (more specifically, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 using a predetermined key ends). . Alternatively, when the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key, a provisional setting notification sound or an opening / closing notification sound may be output, and after the rear setting switch 905 is operated by the predetermined key, the initial setting sound is output. When the activation switch 907 is operated, a temporary setting notification sound or an opening / closing notification sound may be output.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode (ball pitch) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed. When the operation is performed, the provisional setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound is output. However, the present invention is not limited to the operation of each of the switches 905 and 907. The configuration may be such that when a predetermined operation is performed on the rear side of the device 100, a temporary setting notification sound or an opening / closing notification sound is output. Note that the “predetermined operation on the back side of the pachinko machine 100” refers to an operation for changing the game mode by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, and wiring for connecting the device of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, main control). A change operation to the device 370 and the wiring for electrically connecting the sub-control device 390 may be performed.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the game mode (ball pitch) by the switches 905 and 907 can be changed even when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101. A configuration in which the game mode (ball pitch) cannot be changed while the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the frame 101 may be employed.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the operation units (the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907) for changing the game mode are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. A configuration provided on the side surface or the front side may be employed.

  In the RAM clear processing S2002 of the main processing (see FIG. 53) of the main control board 920 in the twelfth embodiment, information of substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is erased. However, in the RAM clear processing S2002, all the information stored in the RAM including the setting correspondence information may be erased.

  In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53), when it is determined in the determination processing S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the ON state (S2001: Y), Each of the processes (S2002 to S2004, S3001 to S3003, S2005, and S2006) related to the setting of the gaming state is configured to be executed. In addition, even if it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), if the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, A configuration may be adopted in which each process (S2002 to S2004, S3001 to S3003, S2005, and S2006) related to the state setting is executed. Specifically, after execution of the RAM clear processing S1008, the process waits until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned on, and when it is determined that the setting signal has been switched to the on state, each of the settings relating to the setting of the game state is performed. The processing (S2002 to S2004, S3001 to S3003, S2005, S2006) may be executed.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed while the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key, the selected game mode (ball pitch) is sequentially changed. Each time a game ball enters a predetermined prize device (for example, the general prize devices 439A and 439B, the upper middle start prize device 431A, etc.) with the back setting switch 905 operated by a predetermined key. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the selected game mode (ball pitch) is sequentially changed. That is, the game mode (ball-out rate) may be set by causing a predetermined winning device to win a game ball. In the modification, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 is terminated (that is, when the operation of changing the game mode is terminated), the RAM change setting process S2005 is executed after the processes of S3001 to S3003. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the RAM change setting process S2005 is performed without performing the processes of S3001 to S3003.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, when a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is performed in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Is a game mode after the change by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, on condition that the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 after the change operation. Has been described, but instead of or in addition to this condition, a predetermined prize device may be made to win a game ball to set a game mode (ball-out rate). .

  In the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the nail state-related processing S1222 shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 34, the game mode is entered by causing the game ball to enter the general prize device 439A or the general prize device 439B as in the above modification. In the case where a configuration capable of setting the throwing rate is applied, when a general prize device 439A or a general prize device 439B is caused to enter a game ball in order to set a game mode, the game ball is entered. On the other hand, the general winning number counter may not be updated (that is, the processing S1403 is not executed). Similarly, in a configuration in which the number of game balls that have entered the start winning device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A is counted, the game ball is caused to enter the starting winning device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A in order to set a game mode. In this case, the configuration may be such that the entry of the game ball is excluded from the count of the game balls that have entered the start winning device.

  In the above-described twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, a change operation (selection operation) of the game mode (ball pitch) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is performed with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In this case, when the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is performed after the change operation, the game mode changed by the change operation is set (validated). That is, at time t23 in the timing charts of FIGS. 54B and 55, the RAM change setting process S2005 is executed, whereby the game mode in the pachinko machine 100 is selected by the change operation by the switches 905 and 907. It is configured to be set in the game mode.

  Instead, when a game mode change operation is performed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, the back setting switch 905 using a predetermined key is performed. The game mode changed by the change operation may be set when the operation is ended. That is, at time t22 in the timing charts of FIGS. 54 (B) and 55, the process of the RAM change setting process S2005 and the subsequent processes is continued while the process of the temporary setting notification by the temporary setting notification sound or the release notification sound (process S3003) is continued. It may be configured to execute. According to the modification, since the processing after the RAM change setting processing S2005 is executed at the time t22, it is possible to suppress the delay of the end of the control start processing, whereby the processing from the control start processing to each processing related to the normal game is performed. Early migration is possible.

(23) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fourteenth Embodiment In the fourteenth embodiment, the infinite loop is continued after information output command output processing S4003, but after information output command output processing S4003, A configuration in which the back setting switch 905 waits for operation by a predetermined key may be employed. That is, after the information output command output processing S4003, when the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned on, the processing of the RAM clear processing S2002 may be executed.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the right control mechanism 2452, the upper control, and the apparatus whose operation is controlled by the main control board 920 and whose operation is checked by the hardware operation check processing S4002 when the power is turned on. Although the mechanism 2453, the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454, and the distribution mechanism (not shown) in the upper prize winning device 2433 are illustrated, if the operation is controlled by the main control board 920, the device is turned on when the power is turned on. May be configured such that the operation is confirmed by the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on, the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed. Thereby, the solenoids 2462 to 2465 operate. Alternatively, when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at the time of returning from the power failure state such as when the power is turned on, the hardware operation is triggered by the establishment of the predetermined operation start condition. The configuration may be such that the operation of the solenoids 2462 to 2465 starts in the confirmation processing S4002, so that the related party on the game arcade side can start the operation confirmation at the timing intended by the user and confirm whether the operation is appropriate. It can be. The predetermined operation start conditions include, for example, a case where a game ball is inserted into one of a predetermined one or a plurality of winning ports, a case where the player touches the firing handle 252, and a case where the shooting handle is This may be the case where the rotation operation of the 252 is performed, the case where a predetermined switch such as the initialization switch 907 is operated, or the like, and a configuration where a plurality of types of operation start conditions are provided. The operation start condition is preferably an operation on an electrical component connected to the main control board 920, because the operation can be easily recognized by the main control board 920, which is preferable.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 when returning from a power failure state such as when the power is turned on, the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed. Thereby, the solenoids 2462 to 2465 operate. The condition under which the hardware operation check processing S4002 is executed is not limited to the case where the setting correspondence information is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at the time of returning from the power failure state as described above.

  For example, the condition under which the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed is that a predetermined winning switch (for example, a starting winning switch 2441, 244, a big winning switch 2443, 2444, a general winning switch 2449A, 2449B, etc.) is a main control board. 920, the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are not connected to the main control board 920, or the control start process (from execution of the program start process S1001 to execution of the random number initialization process S1019). (I.e., when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 during the process (process)) (that is, when the central panel 220 having the light-transmitting plates 222 and 223 is opened), or during the control start process. Sensors (for example, magnetic sensor 491, vibration sensor 492, radio wave sensor 4 Such as when the detection by 3, etc.) were made, it may be a case where the particular circumstances operation by arcade business against pinball machine is required occurs.

  In the above embodiment, the hardware operation check processing S4002 is executed in a power-on processing different from the processing in which the processing of S1020 to S1023 in FIG. 59 is performed and the normal game control is performed. However, instead of or in addition to this, the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 may be performed during a period in which the control of the normal game is being performed. During a normal game under control, when a vibration sensor or a radio wave sensor provided in the gaming machine detects the occurrence of an abnormality, a hardware operation confirmation process S4002 is performed, and the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are operated to operate the game. May be notified that a particular situation has occurred. It is preferable that the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 is executed in a state where the game ball is not fired. For example, a configuration in which the main control board 920 gives a firing permission that allows the game ball to be fired. It is preferable that the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 be performed in a situation in which the firing is not permitted, and thereby, a situation in which a prize is inappropriately generated other than a situation in which an advantageous state has occurred as a bonus in a game. It can be easier to avoid.

  In addition, the hardware operation confirmation processing S4002 during the normal game includes specially moving some of the movable members, such as the lower entry control mechanism 2454, which are easily visible to the parties involved in the game arcade, among the mechanisms operated by the solenoids 2462 to 2465. It may be configured to perform an operation different from the operation by the control during the normal game such as the game state (for example, a short time opening of 0.1 second is continuously performed a plurality of times). It is preferable to operate so that the ball does not win and the benefit is not given. For example, it is preferable to operate at a speed that opens the winning opening in a range where the game ball cannot enter, thereby, A notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific situation (a notification of an abnormality) can be given to the related party.

(24) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fifteenth Embodiment In the fifteenth embodiment, a connector member (for example, connector member 941A) capable of connecting input operation device 260 (261 to 263) in connector part 941 is provided. And the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are commonly used as connectable connector members, but a dedicated connector member to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 can be connected may be provided in the connector portion 941. Even in such a case, it is preferable to provide a dedicated connector member to which the solenoids 2462 to 2465 can be connected at a position closest to the main control device 370 among the connector members constituting the connector portion 941.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to one connector (for example, the connector 921A and the connector 941A), but the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are divided into a plurality of connectors. A configuration that can be connected may be used.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the infinite loop is continued after the connection request command output processing S5002. However, after the connection request command output processing S5002, the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to the corresponding connector members in the connector unit 921. It may be configured to wait for the operation to be performed. That is, after the connection request command output processing S5002, when it is determined that the solenoids 2462 to 2465 are connected to the corresponding connector members in the connector unit 921, the hardware initialization processing S1009 or the hardware initialization processing S4006 is executed. Configuration.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the right control mechanism 2452, the upper control mechanism 2453, and the lower control mechanism 2454 are devices whose operations are controlled by the main control board 920 and which can be connected to the connector portion 941. And the distribution mechanism (not shown) in the upper winning device 2433 is illustrated. However, if the operation is controlled by the main control board 920, a connector member connectable to the connector portion 941 is provided. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the operation of the device is confirmed by the sub-control board 940 when the power is turned on.

  (25) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, the pachinko machine may be configured to increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state is generated a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) once the big hit occurs. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine which enters a special game state on condition that a ball wins in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same language.

<Feature 10>
A game area (game area) in which game balls flow,
A front side member (front block 102) having a visual recognition unit for visually recognizing the game area and being provided to be able to open and close the front side of the game area;
Launching means (firing device 330) for launching a game ball toward the gaming area;
A ball entrance (a winning port of a general winning device 439A, 439B) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can enter;
A game value providing means (payout control board 930) for providing a game value when a game ball enters the entrance;
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) provided with
The number-of-entry information (general winning number) updated corresponding to the entry of the game ball excluding a part of the game ball continuously opened by opening at least the front side member among the game balls entered into the entrance. Number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing
An output unit (a nail state level display device 474) capable of outputting at least the approach number information stored in the approach number storage unit, or corresponding information (a nail state level) counted corresponding to the approach number information; When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in a game area in which a game ball flows down, a prize port to which the game ball is paid out when the game ball is won, a passage leading the game ball to the prize port, and no prize port. There are provided a number of game nails which form a passage leading to the outlet. A large number of game nails are driven into and fixed to a game board forming an outer shape of a game board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, a situation may arise in which it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the count value of the gaming balls that have won the winning opening.

  That is, for example, when performing a pre-shipment inspection on a gaming machine at a factory, the front side member provided so as to be able to open and close the front side of the gaming area is opened, and a plurality of gaming balls are continuously injected into each winning opening. Then, when inspecting whether or not the control device operates properly with respect to the insertion, game balls are continuously inserted into each winning opening with a very high probability than the probability that the game balls enter when a player plays a game. The Rukoto. If the continuous entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening is used as a value for determining whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, it is possible to appropriately determine the performance of the gaming machine. May not be possible.

  Further, for example, a cheating person who has visited a game hall (hall) in which a gaming machine is installed illegally opens a front side member provided to be able to open and close the front side of the game area, and plays a game ball to a specific winning opening. There is a possibility that the continuous input. In this case, although the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value, there is a possibility that the winning of the game ball in the winning opening is higher than the design value and it is determined that the game ball does not meet the design value. Here, in a winning opening that is not opened unless a specific gaming state such as winning a big hit is detected, the intrusion of gaming balls at an improper timing is detected by controlling the gaming machine, and control corresponding to an abnormal state is performed. It is easy to do things, but a certain game value such as a winning hole where game balls can always enter regardless of the game state, or the payout of a certain number of game balls without receiving a lottery when game balls enter It may be difficult to judge whether such an abnormal state has occurred or due to a normal game for the winning opening (general winning opening) to which the winning opening is given. Could be done.

  Further, for example, the possibility that the performance of a gaming machine may be changed to a value that deviates from a design value may include not only a fraudulent person who visits a gaming hall (hall) where a gaming machine is installed and plays a game but also a gaming arcade. There is a possibility that the parties concerned will do it themselves. For example, by modifying the game hall so that the game balls cannot enter the entrance of a specific winning opening called a general winning opening, there is a possibility that the winning of the game balls to the winning opening is suppressed below a design value. There is also.

  In a game arcade where such misconduct is performed, various countermeasures may be taken so that the improper operation is not detected by an outsider (for example, a member of a gaming machine inspection organization). For example, in a situation where there is no outsider such as after a store close, the front door is opened, and gaming balls are thrown into the corresponding winning opening illegally and continuously by the hands of employees of the amusement arcade. There is a possibility of adjusting the balance. In this case, as long as the value after adjusting the bottom of the book is checked, an outsider cannot detect the impropriety of the game hall.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 10, at least the front side member is opened among the gaming balls that have entered the entrance, and a part of the continuously entering gaming balls has been removed. The entry number information updated corresponding to the ball is stored in the entry number storage means, and the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means, or corresponding information counted in correspondence with the entry number information Is output from the output means. Therefore, at least a part of the game balls continuously inserted by opening the front side member can be excluded from the update of the entry number information. It is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine with respect to the entry of the ball is as designed. For example, even if an employee of a game hall or the like opens the front side member (front door) after closing a store, etc., and may illegally continuously throw game balls into the entrance (winning opening), Since at least a part of such illegal continuous throwing is not counted as a game ball that has entered the entrance, it is possible to make it difficult for the amusement arcade to illegally adjust the balance with the design value. As a result, fraudulent concealment by the game hall can be suppressed, and an outsider can appropriately detect fraud on the game hall side.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the "entering number information stored by the entering number storage means" is not necessarily "the front side member is opened" and the game balls excluding a part of the continuously input game balls are removed. It is not necessary to be updated in response to the entry, but a part of the game balls continuously inserted "with the front side member opened" and continuous entry "with the front side member closed" The game ball may be updated in response to the entry of the game ball excluding a part of the game ball. That is, as the description of the "entering number storage means" in the gaming machine described in the feature 10, "entering of game balls excluding at least a part of continuously entering game balls among the game balls entering the entrance" And a number-of-entry storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the number-of-entry information (general winning number) updated in response to the above. Not only does the entry number information not be updated for at least part of the game balls continuously inserted into the entrance, but also illegally and continuously entered the entrance when the front side member is closed. It is possible to prevent the entry number information from being updated for at least a part of the entry of the game ball.

  For example, a ball clogging state in which a game ball stays in a part of the game area occurs, and the ball clogging state disables the flow of the game ball in a part of the game area, so that the game ball continues to the entrance. When a situation occurs in which the game ball enters, it is possible to prevent the entry number information from being updated for at least a part of these game balls. Thereby, in the case where the player keeps firing game balls in the ball clogged state and the game balls are continuously and illegally entered into the entrance, the update of the number-of-entry information is based on those game balls. It is possible to correspond to the number of entering game balls excluding a part. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed. In addition, even if an illegal act is performed in which a game ball is continuously entered into the entrance using a magnet, the entry number information is not updated for at least a part of the entry of the game ball. And the performance of the gaming machine can be more appropriately evaluated.

  In addition, "continuous" in "continuous insertion" and "continuous entry" includes a case where a predetermined number or more of game balls continuously enter the entrance, during a predetermined time, In addition to the case where the game balls continue without any interval, the case where the game balls enter the entrance with an interval is included.

<Feature 11>
The gaming machine according to feature 10, wherein
A shooting correspondence number information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) that stores shooting correspondence number information (the number of shooting balls) corresponding to the number of shooting correspondences that increases when the number of game balls fired in the game area increases. )
The output means outputs the correspondence information corresponding to a ratio of the number of launch correspondence information stored in the number of approach storage means and the number of approach information stored in the number of approach storage means. A gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 11, the number of shots corresponding to the number of shots corresponding to an increase when the number of game balls shot in the game area increases is stored in the number of shots corresponding to firing information storage means. You. Correspondence information corresponding to the ratio of the number of firing correspondence information stored in the number of approach storage means to the number of approach information stored in the number of approach storage means is output from the output means. That is, a value that associates the game ball that has entered the entrance and the number of game balls fired in the game area is output from the output unit as the corresponding information. Therefore, the outsider can easily grasp the performance state of the gaming machine from the correspondence information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed.

<Feature 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11, wherein
Display means (a nail state level display device 474) capable of displaying symbols or predetermined information;
The gaming machine, wherein the output means displays and outputs the entry number information or the correspondence information to the display means when the front side member is opened.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 12, the entry number information or the corresponding information is displayed and output on the display means when the front member is opened. Therefore, information irrelevant to the game (that is, the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information) is not displayed on the display unit during the game of the player, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of distrust.

<Feature 13>
A gaming machine according to any of features 10 to 12,
A substantially rectangular display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying symbols;
The output unit, when the symbol is variably displayed on the display unit, displays and outputs the encrypted entry number information or the encrypted correspondence information on a corner portion of the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 13, since the number-of-entry information or the correspondence information is displayed during the display of the symbols by the output means during the variation display of the symbols, it is hardly noticeable even if it is displayed during the game. In addition, it is difficult to recognize that information irrelevant to the game (that is, the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information) is displayed on the display means. On the other hand, an outsider such as a member of the inspection machine of the gaming machine, during the game by the player (more specifically, during the fluctuation display of the symbol), the information on the number of approaches or the corresponding information displayed on the display means. You can check.

  In particular, since the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information is displayed and output on the corner side of the display means, it is necessary for the player to recognize the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information displayed on the display means as information unrelated to the game. It can be suppressed suitably. Further, since the entered number information or the corresponding information displayed and output is encrypted, it is possible to suppress the player from understanding the meaning of the information, and in that respect, the entered number information displayed on the display means is also provided. Alternatively, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from recognizing the corresponding information as information unrelated to the game.

<Feature 20>
A game area (game area) in which game balls flow,
A front side member (front block 102) having a visual recognition unit for visually recognizing the game area and being provided to be able to open and close the front side of the game area;
Launching means (firing device 330) for launching a game ball toward the gaming area;
A ball entrance (a winning port of a general winning device 439A, 439B) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can enter;
A game value providing means (payout control board 930) for providing a game value when a game ball enters the entrance;
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) provided with
Stores the number-of-entry information (general winning number) updated in response to the entry of a game ball that has entered during a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition has been satisfied among the game balls that have entered the entrance. The number-of-entries storage means (RAM of the main control board 920);
An output unit (a nail state level display device 474) capable of outputting at least the approach number information stored in the approach number storage unit, or corresponding information (a nail state level) counted corresponding to the approach number information; When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in a game area in which a game ball flows down, a prize port to which the game ball is paid out when the game ball is won, a passage leading the game ball to the prize port, and no prize port. There are provided a number of game nails which form a passage leading to the outlet. A large number of game nails are driven into and fixed to a game board forming an outer shape of a game board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, a situation may arise in which it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the count value of the gaming balls that have won the winning opening.

  That is, for example, when performing a pre-shipment inspection on a gaming machine at a factory, the front side member provided so as to be able to open and close the front side of the gaming area is opened, and a plurality of gaming balls are continuously injected into each winning opening. Then, when inspecting whether or not the control device operates properly with respect to the insertion, game balls are continuously inserted into each winning opening with a very high probability than the probability that the game balls enter when a player plays a game. The Rukoto. If the continuous entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening is used as a value for determining whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, it is possible to appropriately determine the performance of the gaming machine. May not be possible.

  Further, for example, the possibility that the performance of a gaming machine may be changed to a value that deviates from a design value may include not only a fraudulent person who visits a gaming hall (hall) where a gaming machine is installed and plays a game but also a gaming arcade. There is a possibility that the parties concerned will do it themselves. For example, by modifying the game hall so that the game balls cannot enter the entrance of a specific winning opening called a general winning opening, there is a possibility that the winning of the game balls to the winning opening is suppressed below a design value. There is also. Alternatively, the game hall side frequently remodels whether the game ball can not enter at the entrance of the winning opening at all or before the opening of the winning opening before opening, etc. There is also a possibility of adjusting the winning ratio of the game balls (that is, ease of winning).

  As a countermeasure against such fraud, an outsider (for example, a member of a gaming machine inspection organization) checks whether the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the count value of the gaming balls that have won the winning opening. It is conceivable to determine whether In order to increase the accuracy of the determination based on the count value, it is preferable to use the count value obtained by accumulating several days, instead of the count value for one day. However, when the winning ratio of game balls to the winning opening is adjusted, the winning ratio is sometimes higher than the design value at one time and the winning ratio is lower than the design value at some times. As a result, there is a possibility that an outsider cannot detect a fraud on the game arcade side as long as the determination as to whether or not the fraud is made based on the count value.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 20, it corresponds to the entry of the gaming ball that entered during a predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition was satisfied among the gaming balls that entered the entrance. The number-of-entry information that is updated is stored in the number-of-entry storage means, and the number-of-entry information stored in the number-of-entry storage means, or corresponding information counted corresponding to the number-of-entry information, is output from the output means. Is output. Therefore, using the approach number information or the correspondence information, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine with respect to the approach of the game ball to the entrance is equal to the design value. For example, a certain number of game balls that entered the entrance after the gaming machine was manufactured can be excluded from the update of the entry number information. Also, when accumulating the number-of-entry information for several days, the number-of-entry information or the number-of-correspondence information is hard to be averaged, thereby suitably reflecting the impropriety of the game hall. This allows an outsider to appropriately detect impropriety on the game arcade side.

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
The launching means is capable of launching a game ball with an intensity corresponding to an operation amount of an operation unit (a firing handle 252),
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition;
A special game state generating means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is an advantageous game state as compared to a normal game state based on a predetermined result obtained by the lottery means;
A specific ball which is provided in a game area in which a game ball can enter when the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined operation amount in the game area, and in which the game ball can enter during the occurrence of the special game state. Mouths (each winning opening of the lower large winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434),
A game state determining means (main control board 920) for determining whether the game is in the normal game state,
When it is determined that the game state is the normal game state by the game state determination means, the determination is used as the counting start condition, and the determination is made in response to the entry of the game ball entered during a predetermined period after the counting start condition is satisfied. Updating means (main control board 920) for updating the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 21, when the gaming state determining means determines that the game state is the normal gaming state, the determination is set as the counting start condition, and during a predetermined period after the counting start condition is satisfied. The entry number information stored in the entry number storage means is updated in accordance with the entry of the entered game ball. Thereby, it is possible to accurately obtain the number-of-entry information that is updated in response to the entry of the game ball that has entered the entrance into which the game ball can enter only in the normal gaming state. Becomes possible.

<Feature 22>
A gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21, wherein
A shooting correspondence number information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) that stores shooting correspondence number information (the number of shooting balls) corresponding to the number of shooting correspondences that increases when the number of game balls fired in the game area increases. )
The output means outputs the correspondence information corresponding to a ratio of the number of launch correspondence information stored in the number of approach storage means and the number of approach information stored in the number of approach storage means. A gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the characteristic 22, the number of fire correspondence information corresponding to the number of fire correspondence that increases when the number of game balls fired in the game area increases is stored in the number of fire correspondence information storage means. You. Correspondence information corresponding to the ratio of the number of firing correspondence information stored in the number of approach storage means to the number of approach information stored in the number of approach storage means is output from the output means. That is, a value that associates the game ball that has entered the entrance and the number of game balls fired in the game area is output from the output unit as the corresponding information. Therefore, the outsider can easily grasp the performance state of the gaming machine from the correspondence information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed.

<Feature 23>
A gaming machine according to any of features 20 to 22,
Display means (a nail state level display device 474) capable of displaying symbols or predetermined information;
The gaming machine, wherein the output means displays and outputs the entry number information or the correspondence information to the display means when the front side member is opened.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 23, the entry number information or the corresponding information is displayed and output on the display means when the front member is opened. Therefore, information irrelevant to the game (that is, the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information) is not displayed on the display unit during the game of the player, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of distrust.

<Feature 24>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 20 to 23,
A substantially rectangular display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying symbols;
The output unit, when the symbol is variably displayed on the display unit, displays and outputs the encrypted entry number information or the encrypted correspondence information on a corner portion of the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 24, since the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information is displayed while the display output by the output means is being displayed while the symbol is being changed, an outsider such as a member of a gaming machine inspection organization, During the game played by the player (more specifically, during the symbol change display), the number-of-entry information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means can be confirmed.

  In particular, since the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information is displayed and output on the corner side of the display means, it is inconspicuous, and the player recognizes the number-of-entry information or the corresponding information displayed on the display means as information unrelated to the game. Can be suitably suppressed. Further, since the entered number information or the corresponding information displayed and output is encrypted, it is possible to suppress the player from understanding the meaning of the information, and in that respect, the entered number information displayed on the display means is also provided. Alternatively, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from recognizing the corresponding information as information unrelated to the game.

<Feature 30>
A game area (game area) in which game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down,
A plurality of entrances (general prize devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and through which game balls can enter;
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting means (main control board) for giving a predetermined privilege according to the entrance where the game ball entered. 920)
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. RAM)
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When predetermined conditions relating to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances are satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. A game machine comprising: a setting output unit (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 30, the “predetermined conditions regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance” include, for example, one or more predetermined entrances of a plurality of entrances. That the game ball enters the entrance of the game ball; that the game ball enters the predetermined two or more entrances of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order; A predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined one or more entrances, and are updated in accordance with entry into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances. The predetermined condition is satisfied for the entry number information or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the entry number information. During a predetermined game period, a predetermined one of a plurality of entrances is determined. Or is the starting condition based on the entry of the game ball into two or more entrances satisfied? Be previously predetermined time period which is determined is passed, a new starting condition is that the status is not established to a predetermined number of occurrences of predetermined, and the like.

<Feature 40>
A game area (game area) in which game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down,
A plurality of entrances (general prize devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and through which game balls can enter;
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting means (main control board) for giving a predetermined privilege according to the entrance where the game ball entered. 920)
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. RAM)
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into the predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied; And a setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting the same.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machines described in the features 30 and 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to a probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  A plurality of entrances into which the game balls can enter are provided in a game area where the game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down, and a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances is provided. When a game ball enters the game, a predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance into which the game ball has entered is provided by the privilege providing means. When a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage is output by the setting output. Is done. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the gaming property of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during the game through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for a player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  In particular, in the gaming machine described in the feature 40, when a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances is satisfied, the setting is stored in the setting storage means. Since the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means, the player can determine in advance the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery. Can be obtained as a privilege of having a game ball enter the entrance. Therefore, the player can play a game while enjoying the game ball entering a predetermined entrance.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40,
The setting output means may include, as at least a part of the predetermined condition, a game ball entering a predetermined two or more of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order. A game machine that outputs the setting output information on condition that:

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 41, a predetermined condition (i.e., a case where the gaming ball enters at least two predetermined entrances among a plurality of entrances in a predetermined order). Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means that at least a part of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied. Is output by the setting output means. As a result, the player sets the lottery probability at which a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery as a privilege in which game balls enter the predetermined two or more entrances in a predetermined sequence. It is possible to enjoy the gaming property of obtaining information corresponding to the probability of being played. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls enter two or more predetermined entrances in a predetermined order.

<Feature 50>
Firing means (firing device 330) for firing a game ball;
A game area (game area) in which game balls fired by the firing means and entered from a predetermined entrance flow down;
A ball entrance (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can enter;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the entrance;
Setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery in a game. )When,
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
An entry number storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing entry number information (general winning number) updated according to entry of a game ball into the entry opening;
A predetermined condition including at least a condition satisfied corresponding to the number-of-entries information stored in the number-of-entries storage means or corresponding information (a nail state level) counted corresponding to the number-of-entries information is satisfied. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. .

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming ability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to information corresponding to a probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input unit.

  In the game area where the game balls that have been fired by the firing means and entered from a predetermined entrance flow down, there is provided an entrance where game balls can enter, and when the game ball enters the entrance, , A predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance is provided by the privilege providing means. When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the gaming property of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during the game through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for a player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  The entry number storage means stores entry number information updated in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the entrance. The setting corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied for the number-of-entries information stored in the number-of-entries storage means or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the number-of-entry information. The output information is output by the setting output means. Since the number-of-entry information and the correspondence information are information reflecting the state of entry of the game ball into the entrance, a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery according to the state of entry of the game ball into the entrance. It is possible to output information corresponding to the currently set probability as the lottery probability to be performed.

  Thereby, for example, when the predetermined condition is a value indicating that the performance of the gaming machine may not be as designed according to the entry number information and the corresponding information regarding the entry of the game ball into the entrance, It is possible to indicate that there is a possibility of suffering disadvantages, and to make use of the information output by the setting output means to make the player determine whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine being played. It becomes possible.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative design display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a special game state;
Among the plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means (main control unit) for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. RAM on the substrate 920),
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
During a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period has elapsed since the start condition was satisfied, a predetermined condition including a case where the new start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times has been satisfied. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. .

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery. The information can be suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add the gaming property of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during the game through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for a player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  Also, during a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period has elapsed after the start condition has been satisfied, if a situation in which the new start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times, the condition is stored in the setting storage means. The setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means. A situation in which a new starting condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period elapses after the starting condition is satisfied is an undesirable situation for a player, and is compared with a case where a player plays a game in another gaming machine. May be disadvantaged. On the other hand, in this situation, it is possible to make the player determine whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game by utilizing the information output by the setting output unit.

  It should be noted that, in place of the description of the setting output means in the gaming machine described in the feature 60, when a predetermined condition including that a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied is satisfied. And setting output means for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means.

<Feature 70>
A display unit (decorative design display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a special game state;
Among the plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means (main control unit) for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. RAM on the substrate 920),
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
At least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery is satisfied to when stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by the variation executing unit. Effect selection means (main control board 920, sub-controller 920) for selecting an effect of an effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means from among a plurality of effects with different effect times. Control board 940);
An effect display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying an effect selected by the effect selecting means on the display unit.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming ability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  Out of a plurality of types of effects with different effect times, the effect of the effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is selected by the effect selecting means, and the starting condition under which the first result is obtained in a predetermined lottery is determined. It is selected as an effect composed of at least a part of the period from the establishment to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, and the effect is displayed on the display unit by the effect display control means. You.

  Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is the predetermined probability. Of at least a part of the period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery is established to when the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by the variation executing means. Is reflected in the production time. Therefore, the player can estimate the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery from the production time of the effect. Can be added. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to pay attention to the length of the production time in order to estimate the probability information. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a lottery transition of a gaming state, the number of objects to be focused can be increased, so that the gaming performance in a gaming machine utilizing the flow of gaming balls can be improved.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
The effect selecting means selects an effect with a probability that the effect with the longest effect time among the plurality of effects is likely to be executed, with respect to the probability that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of probabilities. A gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the probabilities that are most advantageous to the player among the plurality of probable probabilities are selected based on the probabilities that the effect having the longest effect time among the plurality of effects is likely to be executed. Therefore, the player can expect that the most advantageous probability is set when the effect is performed for a long time.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player is provided,
The effect selected by the effect selecting means is such that after the start condition, in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery, is satisfied, the change execution means sets the identification information corresponding to the first result. A special effect that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at a predetermined operation time set within an executable period of an effect configured at least partially in a period until the stop display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

If it is a gaming machine described in the feature 72,
An effect composed of at least a part of a period from when a start condition in which a first result is obtained by a predetermined lottery is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by a variable execution unit. The operation time is set within the executable period of the operation. The effect selected by the effect selecting means is a special effect executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at the operation time. Therefore, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit at the operation time, and determines a lottery probability or a first lottery at which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery from the effect time of the special effect performed based on the operation. The probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be estimated.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery section. 940)
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a special game state;
Among the plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means (main control unit) for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. RAM on the substrate 920),
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Control execution means (main control board 920, sub-control, main control board 920) for executing control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when predetermined conditions including conditions that can be satisfied during the special game state are satisfied. A substrate 940).

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined condition including a condition that can be satisfied during the special game state is satisfied, control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is executed by the control execution unit. Therefore, based on the content appearing under the control of the control execution means, the player stores the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, in the lottery probability at which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or in the second lottery. It is possible to add a gaming property for estimating a probability currently set as a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined result. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is preferable that the condition that can be satisfied during the special game state include the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance during the special game state. In order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. it can. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to feature 80, as a condition that can be satisfied during the special game state, an operation unit different from an operation unit that performs a shooting operation in which a player fires a game ball in the game area during the special game state. It is preferable to set conditions that can be satisfied by the operation for. In this way, during the special game state, it is possible to add a playability in which attention is paid to an operation different from the firing operation, and it is possible to not only continue the firing operation but also add another operation to the It is possible to add new playability that enables information to be acquired.

<Feature 90>
By being driven by the predetermined driving means, an entry restriction state (entry prohibited posture) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening, and an entry permission for permitting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening. A movable member (a movable piece of the right-entry regulating mechanism 1452) that is capable of switching a state (entry-permissible posture) and that forms a descending inclined surface capable of guiding a game ball from one side to the other side in the above-described entry-regulated state. )When,
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a plurality of flow-down passage portions through which the game ball entered from the predetermined opening portion can pass is open upward to an upstream portion of the descending inclined surface. 1 downstream passage section (first downstream passage section 1532A),
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 1442A) provided downstream of the first downflow passage unit and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first downflow passage unit;
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a second downstream passage portion (second second opening portion) of the plurality of downstream passage portions that opens upward from the first downstream passage portion to a downstream portion of the downwardly inclined surface. Downflow passage 1532B),
A second detection unit (right start winning switch 1442B) provided downstream of the second downflow passage and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second downflow passage;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball entered from the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit,
The first downflow passage portion is configured to have a passage width through which game balls can enter one by one, and has a length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of a sphere.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a prize-winning device capable of changing a probability that a game ball enters the inside by changing a posture (for example, JP-A-2017-213044). Gazette). The prize winning device is configured to be capable of transitioning between an entry permitting position that allows the game ball to enter and an entry restriction position that restricts the entry of the game ball. This is realized by changing the arrangement of the movable pieces of the mechanism. Then, after the movable piece of the prize device shifts to the entry allowable posture, when the prize of the specified number of game balls is detected by the detection unit such as the detection switch, the prize device is changed from the entry allowable posture to the entry restricted posture. By performing such control, the game can be advanced, for example, during a preparation period (interval) until shifting to the next approach allowable posture, or when starting the next unit game.

  However, in such a prize winning device, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a configuration for appropriately proceeding a game.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a movable member and appropriately progressing a game. In other words, the movable member is driven by the predetermined driving means, so that the movable member is controlled to enter the predetermined opening by restricting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening, and the entrance allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. It is configured to be switchable between an allowable state and a descending inclined surface capable of guiding a game ball from one side to the other side in an entry restricted state.

  When the movable member is in the entry permitting state, the first downflow passage portion of the plurality of downflow passage portions through which the game ball that has entered through the predetermined opening can pass is located above the upstream portion of the descending inclined surface. It is open. A first detection unit capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first downstream passage portion is provided downstream of the first downstream passage portion.

  In addition, the second downflow passage portion of the plurality of downflow passage portions opens upward from the first downflow passage portion with respect to a downstream portion of the descending inclined surface. A second detector that can detect a game ball passing through the second downstream passage section is provided downstream of the second downstream passage section. When the game ball that has entered through the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision unit. Therefore, since the first downflow passage portion is configured to be opened on the upstream side of the descending inclined surface from the second downflow passage portion, the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening is the second downflow passage. It is easier to enter the first downstream passage than the passage.

  Here, the length of the first downstream passage portion from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion is substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of the game ball. That is, even if the distance from when the game ball enters the first downstream passage to when it is detected by the first detection unit is long, the diameter is reduced to about the diameter of the game ball. , The time required for detection by the first detection unit can be reduced to a short time.

  In addition, since the first downflow passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows the game balls to enter one by one, when the game balls flow down the first downflow passage portion, the game balls intersect with the downflow direction. Swaying in the direction can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls that have entered the first downflow passage can smoothly flow down the first downflow passage, and at this point, the game balls enter the first downflow passage until they are detected by the first detection unit. Can be reduced to a short time.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, the first downflow passage portion in which the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening is more likely to enter than the second downflow passage portion has the game ball. Are configured to have a passage width that can be entered one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection unit is substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Have been.

  Therefore, the time required from the time when the last number of game balls reaching the prescribed number permitted for one approach permissible attitude enters the first flow-down passage to the time when the last game balls are detected by the first detection unit is suitably suppressed. Therefore, the time required from when the last game ball having the specified number enters the first downflow passage portion to when the movable member is switched to the entry restriction state can be suitably reduced. With this, when the last game ball which reaches the prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture among the game balls flowing down from the upstream toward the predetermined opening enters the predetermined opening, Since the movable member is switched to the entry restriction state early from the entry, it is possible to suppress a situation in which game balls exceeding the specified number enter the predetermined opening and win.

  In addition, the time required from the time when the last game ball reaching the prescribed number permitted for one approach permissible posture enters the first downflow passage portion to the time when the last game ball is detected by the first detection portion is suitably reduced. Therefore, when the approach allowable posture is generated a plurality of times at short intervals, even if the interval is set to a short time, it is possible to easily detect the game ball appropriately. For this reason, for example, during the time reduction game state, it is possible to generate a game state in which it is easy to suppress the progress of a game ball to the downstream side via the upper surface of the movable member, and to reduce the size of the winning device including the movable member. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging game components such as a game area in which a game ball flows down, a prize device, a decorative component, and the like.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 90, "substantially equivalent to the diameter of the game ball" means that the length is larger than one time of the diameter of the game ball and shorter than 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Is preferable, and is preferably one time of the diameter of the game ball.

  Instead of the gaming machine described in the above-described feature 90, a gaming machine having a configuration described below may be used.

By being driven by the predetermined drive means, an entry restriction state (entry prohibited position) for restricting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening, and an entry allowance for permitting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening. A movable member capable of switching between a state (entry allowable posture) and a descending inclined surface capable of guiding a game ball from one side to the other side in the entry restricted state (moving of the right entry restriction mechanism 1452). Piece),
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a plurality of flow-down passage portions through which the game ball entered from the predetermined opening portion can pass is open upward to an upstream portion of the descending inclined surface. 1 downstream passage section (first downstream passage section 1532A),
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 1442A) provided downstream of the first downflow passage unit and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first downflow passage unit;
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a second downstream passage portion (second second opening portion) of the plurality of downstream passage portions that opens upward from the first downstream passage portion to a downstream portion of the downwardly inclined surface. Downflow passage 1532B),
A second detection unit (right start winning switch 1442B) provided downstream of the second downflow passage and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second downflow passage;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball entered from the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit;
A movable member control means for controlling switching of the movable member between the entry permitted state and the entry restricted state, wherein a game ball detected by the first detection unit when the movable member is in the entry permitted state Is a predetermined number of game balls that are allowed to enter the predetermined opening in the once-permitted state, and drives the predetermined drive unit following detection of the game balls. And a movable member control means (main control board 920) for switching the movable member to the entry permitting state.
The first downflow passage portion is configured to have a passage width through which game balls can enter one by one, and has a length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of a sphere.

<Feature 91>
A gaming machine according to feature 90,
The first descending passage portion includes a gradually changing section in which the passage width of the first descending passage portion gradually decreases so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as approaching the first detection portion, on the upstream side of the first detection portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 91, the first downstream passage section includes a gradually changing section in which the passage width of the first downstream passage section gradually decreases so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as approaching the first detection section. It is provided upstream of the first detection unit. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first downflow passage are rectified in the downflow direction as they proceed down the gradual change section, so that the game balls smoothly flow down the first detection unit located downstream of the gradual change section. This can prevent erroneous detection of a game ball by the first detection unit.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
A direction change portion (protruding portions 1537, 1538) for meandering a game ball passing over the descending inclined surface formed by the movable member in the entry restricted state in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front,
The gaming machine, wherein the first downflow passage portion is opened upward at a position upstream of a position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction changing portion.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the movable member is in the entry restriction state, the game ball passes through the descending inclined surface while meandering in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine by the direction changing unit. In addition, the stay time of the game ball on the descending slope can be increased. Therefore, the game ball passing through the descending inclined surface, while the opening width of the predetermined opening portion in the descending inclined surface in the passing direction of the game ball on the descending inclined surface is suppressed, the movable piece is switched to the next entry allowable state. The possibility of entering the predetermined opening at the timing can be increased.

  Further, since the first downflow passage portion is opened upward on the upstream side from the position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction changing portion, the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening is provided. Before the meandering in the front-rear direction by the direction changing unit is started.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 92, the “position at which the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction change portion” may be a position before the game ball reaches the direction change portion, It may be a position where the ball has been moved either forward or backward by the direction changing unit. For example, when the first downflow passage portion is opened upward on the upstream side from the position where the game ball has been moved either forward or backward by the direction change portion, the course direction of the game ball is changed by the direction change portion. The change may cause a situation where the vehicle easily enters the first downstream passage.

<Feature A0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is more advantageous than in a normal game state. In a gaming machine that generates a special game state and generates a predetermined specific game state with a predetermined probability when a lottery result by the lottery means is a second result without the generation of the special game state,
A variable prize unit (right) that at least takes an entry allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and an entry regulation state in which game balls are entered, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when a game ball enters. Grand prize winning device 1434),
Winning control in which, when the special game state or the specific game state occurs, the variable winning unit switches between the entry allowable state and the entry restriction state in a predetermined switching pattern corresponding to the occurrence of each game state. Means (main control board 920);
Among the plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means (main control unit) for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. RAM on the substrate 920),
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
The variable winning unit by the winning control unit according to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit, so that the specific game state occurs differently according to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit. A switching control setting means (main control board 920) for setting switching control.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means. When the lottery result is the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state occurs. I do. When the lottery result is the second result without the occurrence of the special game state, a predetermined specific game state occurs with a predetermined probability.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a special game state or a specific game state occurs, the winning control means switches between the entry permitted state and the entry restricted state in the variable winning section in a predetermined switching pattern corresponding to the occurrence of each game state. The switching control setting means controls the switching of the variable prize section by the prize control means according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means so that the specific game state is generated differently according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. Control is set. Therefore, based on the control of the switching of the variable winning section in the specific gaming state, the player can determine whether the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the second lottery In the above, it is possible to add a gaming property for estimating a probability currently set as a lottery probability at which a predetermined result is selected. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine according to feature A0,
The switching by the prize control means is performed after the variable prize section is switched to the entry allowable state, until a predetermined duration for maintaining the entry allowable state elapses, or a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize. Including switching the variable winning section to the entry restricted state when any of the conditions until entry into the section is satisfied,
The gaming machine, wherein the switching control setting unit sets a switching pattern in which at least the predetermined duration differs depending on the probability information stored in the setting storage unit, as the predetermined switching pattern.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature A1, the switching of the variable prize section by the prize control means is performed after the variable prize section is switched to the entry permission state and a predetermined duration for maintaining the entry permission state elapses. Alternatively, when any of the conditions until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning portion is satisfied, the variable winning portion is switched to the entry restricted state. The switching control setting means sets a different switching pattern as a predetermined switching pattern in which at least a predetermined duration is different according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. It is possible to add a playability in which the player estimates the probability information stored in the setting storage means based on the performed duration.

<Feature A2>
The gaming machine according to Feature A0 or Feature A1,
The gaming machine has a specific game high probability state in which the specific game state is likely to be generated when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied (probable change game state), and the specific game state is less likely to be generated than the specific game high probability state. A specific game low probability state (normal game state) is generated,
The setting storage means, as a lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected by the second lottery, a probability corresponding to a probability of transitioning the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state (probable change game termination probability). A gaming machine characterized by storing at least information (big hit probability at high probability and probability of continuation of probability).

  In the gaming machine according to the feature A2, a specific game high probability state in which a specific game state is likely to occur when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a specific game in which a specific game state is less likely to occur than the specific game high probability state The low probability state can be generated, and the setting storage means stores, as a lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected by the second lottery, a probability of transiting the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state. Is stored at least.

  Therefore, based on the control of the switching of the variable winning unit in the specific game state, a game ability to estimate the probability that the player is currently set as the probability of transitioning the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state is added. can do. Thereby, the player determines whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game, depending on whether or not the probability estimated as the probability of transitioning the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state is preferable to the player. Since the determination can be made, the gaming ability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature B0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is more advantageous than in a normal game state. A gaming machine that generates a special game state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific game state (small hit) when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without generation of the special game state. So,
The special game high probability state (probable change game state) in which the special game state occurs with a predetermined high probability when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the probability that the special game state occurs from the special game high probability state A control for generating a low special game low probability state (normal game state) is configured to be executable, and as the special game high probability state, a first special game high probability state (time-saving probability changing game state); It is possible to execute control for generating a second special game high probability state (non-time saving, probable change game state) in which a player can easily obtain a game value by the occurrence of the specific game state as compared with the first special game high probability state. Composed,
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special game high probability state is generated over a predetermined execution period after the end of the special game state, and the predetermined execution period When the game has ended, a game state control means (main control board 920) for terminating the first special game high probability state and transitioning to the second special game high probability state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the end of the special game state, the lottery means corresponds to a remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the obtained information or information capable of calculating the remaining period;
A display device (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying identification information for displaying a lottery result of the lottery means;
When the first special game high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state, a first display updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage unit. (Remaining period display section 1711) and a display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the second special game high probability state occurs, and updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period. A gaming machine comprising: display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a display (after-transition game state display section 1712) together with the identification information on the display device.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. Also, in this type of gaming machine, after the end of the special gaming state, a gaming ball in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the starting port than in the normal gaming state. It is also known to diversify the game by generating a predetermined advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, such as a state (see, for example, JP-A-2006-189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate different types of game states after the end of the special game state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means. When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Occurs. When the lottery result is the second predetermined result without the occurrence of the special game state, the predetermined specific game state occurs.

  A special game high probability state in which a special game state occurs with a predetermined high probability when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and a special game low probability state in which the probability of the special game state occurring is lower than the special game high probability state. Is generated, and as a special game high probability state, a first special game high probability state and a specific game state are generated by the player as compared with the first special game high probability state. A control for generating a second special game high probability state in which a value is easily obtained is configured to be executable. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special game high probability state is generated by the game state control means over a predetermined execution period after the end of the special game state. When the predetermined execution period ends, the first special game high probability state ends and the state transits to the second special game high probability state.

  In a case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the end of the special game state, a predetermined execution period in the first special game high probability state Is stored in the remaining period information storage means. A display device capable of displaying identification information for displaying a lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and when the first special game high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state, the display device stores the remaining period information. A first display updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period corresponding to information stored in the means (information corresponding to the remaining period for a predetermined execution period or information capable of calculating the remaining period), and a second special game height. A display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when a probability state has occurred and updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period is displayed together with identification information by the display control means.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that the first special game high probability state and the second special game high probability state can be continuously generated after the end of the special game state, the first display indicates the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. Since the second display corresponding to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second special game high probability state has occurred is also updated according to the change during the remaining period, The player updates the first display, recognizing that the time when the game state transitions from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state is gradually approaching, and updates the first state. By the 2 display, the game state (second special game high probability state) in which the player can easily acquire the game value by the occurrence of the specific game state as compared with the current game state (first special game high probability state) is displayed. Transits Period it is possible to be aware that coming to them. Thereby, when the first special game high probability state occurs after the special game state, the game property that the player expects the transition of the game state from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state Can be suitably improved.

<Feature B1>
The gaming machine according to Feature B0,
The gaming machine, wherein the display control means displays the first display and the second display on one side of a screen of the display device.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature B1, the first display and the second display are displayed on one side of the screen of the display device, so that the player can display the first display and the second display without greatly moving the line of sight. It becomes possible to visually recognize. Therefore, the player can recognize the update state of the first display and the update state of the second display simultaneously, so that the player changes from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. It is possible to more suitably improve the gaming ability expecting the transition of the gaming state.

<Feature B2>
The gaming machine according to Feature B0 or Feature B2,
The display control unit decreases the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display or increases the overlap between the first display and the second display as the remaining period decreases. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature B2, as the remaining period decreases, the distance between the respective display positions of the first display and the second display decreases, or the overlap between the first display and the second display increases. From the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display, and the state of overlap between the first display and the second display, the player shifts from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. It is easy to grasp the time when the game state changes. Thereby, it is possible to more suitably improve the gaming ability in which the player expects the transition of the game state from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state.

<Feature C0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is more advantageous than in a normal game state. A gaming machine that generates a special game state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific game state (small hit) when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without generation of the special game state. So,
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special game state, a predetermined advantageous game state (time saving state, probability change state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is set. A game state control means (main control means) for causing a transition from the advantageous game state to a game state different from the advantageous game state when the specific game state occurs a predetermined number of times after the start of the advantageous game state. A gaming machine comprising a substrate 920).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, a variety of games have been provided by providing a lottery result (for example, a small hit) in which a gaming ball can enter a large winning opening even if it is not a big hit as a lottery result by the lottery. Some are also known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine provided with a lottery result that allows a game ball to enter a special winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature C0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means. When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Occurs. When the lottery result is the second predetermined result without the occurrence of the special game state, the predetermined specific game state occurs.

  In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special game state, a predetermined advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is generated by the game state control means, When a predetermined number of specific game states have occurred after the start of the advantageous game state, a transition is made from the advantageous game state to a game state different from the predetermined game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine capable of generating the specific gaming state by selecting the second result as the lottery result, the specific gaming state is set as a condition for transitioning the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. By applying the number of occurrences of, it is possible to add a game property that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature C0, the gaming state control means determines that "at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special gaming state, A game state different from the advantageous game state from the advantageous game state when a predetermined advantageous game state advantageous to the player is generated and a predetermined number of the specific game state occurs after the start of the advantageous game state. Although it is described that the configuration is such that “the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special game state, the player is more advantageous than the normal game state. A predetermined advantageous game state is generated, and when the special game state occurs after the start of the advantageous game state, a predetermined state is determined for the advantageous game state. When the predetermined execution period ends, or when the specific game state occurs a predetermined number of times after the start of the special game state, the special game state is changed from the special game state to a game state different from the special game state. A transition may be made.

<Feature C1>
The gaming machine according to feature C0,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined second result, any of a plurality of types of the specific game states can be generated with a predetermined probability for each type of the specific game state,
For each of the plurality of types of specific game state, the number of times information storage means for storing the number of times information corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, the gaming state control means may store the number of times in the number information storage means after the start of the advantageous game state. When the number of the specific game states corresponding to the number information associated with one specific game state among the plurality of types of the specific game states occurs, the specific game state is different from the special game state from the special game state. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning to a gaming state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C1, the number-of-times information storage means stores, for each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states, any one of the plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times. Corresponding frequency information is stored in association with each other.

  If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates an advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, the game state control means causes the plurality of types of specific games to be stored in the number-of-times information storage means after the start of the advantageous game state. When the number of specific game states corresponding to the number information stored in association with one specific game state among the states has occurred, the state is shifted from the advantageous game state to a game state different from the advantageous game state. You. Therefore, a plurality of specific game states are provided, and the number of occurrences of the specific game state as a condition for transitioning the game state is determined according to the type of the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to suitably diversify the playability that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state.

<Feature C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
The type of the lottery result that generates the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, or the game at the time when the special game state occurs based on the result of the lottery that generates the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state For each of a plurality of types of number conditions including at least one of the state types, count information corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of counts usable as the predetermined count is associated. Storage means (ROM of the main control board 920)
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result to generate the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, and if the number condition is satisfied, the gaming state control means, Based on the number of the specific game state corresponding to the number information associated with the number condition in the number information storage unit after the start of the advantageous game state generated after the end of the special game state based on the special game state A gaming machine characterized by making a transition from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C2, the number information storage means stores the type of the lottery result for generating the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, or the lottery for generating the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Based on the result, for each of a plurality of types of number conditions including at least one of the types of gaming states at the time when the special gaming state occurred, a plurality of types of number of times that can be used as a predetermined number of times. Number information corresponding to any of the numbers is stored in association with the number information.

  If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating an advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, and if the number condition is satisfied, the special state game is performed by the game state control means based on the lottery result. After the start of the advantageous game state generated after the end of the state, when the specific game state of the number corresponding to the number information stored in association with the number condition in the number information storage means occurs after the start of the advantageous game state, A transition is made to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, since the number of occurrences of the specific game state as the condition for the transition of the game state is diversified according to the type of the number of conditions, the conditions for the transition of the game state are diversified, and the number of occurrences of the specific game state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably diversify the game characteristics that the game state can be changed.

<Feature C3>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C0 to C2,
The gaming state control means, when the special gaming state occurs after the end of the special gaming state, when the predetermined number of the specific gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, or A gaming machine characterized in that when the special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine transitions from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature C3, when the advantageous game state is generated by the gaming state control means after the end of the special gaming state, a predetermined number of specific gaming states are generated after the start of the advantageous gaming state. In this case, or when the special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state control means makes a transition from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, the game state is changed not only when the specific game state occurs a predetermined number of times, but also when the special game state occurs after the start of the advantageous game state, so that the game state occurs after the special game state. Can be diversified.

<Feature D0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is more advantageous than in a normal game state; A special gaming state (big hit), and when the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state is configured to be able to change after the end of the special gaming state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without occurrence of the special game state, one of a plurality of specific game states (small hits) is predetermined for each type of the specific game state. It is configured to be able to occur with the probability that
When the number of occurrences of at least one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states reaches a predetermined number for the specific game state, a game different from the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state A gaming machine comprising a gaming state control means (main control board 920) for transitioning to a state.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. In recent years, with this type of gaming machine, a lottery result has been provided by providing a lottery result (for example, a small hit) in which a gaming ball can enter a large winning opening even if it is not a big hit as a lottery result by the lottery. The following is also known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine provided with a lottery result that allows a game ball to enter a special winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature D0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means. When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Occurs. When the special game state occurs, the game state may change after the end of the special game state. Further, when the lottery result is a predetermined second result that does not involve the occurrence of a special game state, one of a plurality of types of specific game states is generated with a predetermined probability for each type of the specific game state. I do.

  When the number of occurrences of at least one specific game state among a plurality of types of specific game states reaches a predetermined number of times for the specific game state, the game state control means causes the predetermined game state to change from the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. Is changed to a game state different from the game state. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of generating a specific gaming state by selecting the second result as a lottery result, the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state is applied by applying the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state. Can be changed according to the game state.

  In particular, since a plurality of types of specific game states are provided, and the number of occurrences of the specific game state as a condition for transition of the game state is determined according to the type of the specific game state, the conditions for transition of the game state are various. As a result, it is possible to suitably diversify the playability that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state.

<Feature D1>
The gaming machine according to Feature D0,
The type of the lottery result that generates the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, or the game at the time when the special game state occurs based on the result of the lottery that generates the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state For each of the number of conditions of a plurality of types of number conditions including at least one of the types of states, a plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times for each of the plurality of specific game states And a count information storage means (ROM of the main control board 920) for storing count information corresponding to any of the counts.
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates the predetermined game state after the end of the special game state, and if the number condition is satisfied, the gaming state control means may determine the lottery result. After the start of the predetermined game state generated after the end of the special game state based on the number of times, the specific game state of the number corresponding to the number information associated with the number condition is generated in the number information storage means. A game machine characterized in that when the game is performed, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to a game state different from the predetermined game state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature D1, the number-of-times information storage means stores a type of a lottery result for generating an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, or a lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Based on the result, for each of the number conditions in the plurality of types of number conditions including at least one of the types of game states at the time when the special game state occurs, each of the plurality of types of specific game states is determined in advance. Number information corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of numbers that can be used as the determined number is stored in association with each other.

  If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result that generates an advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, and the number of times condition is satisfied, the game state control means sets the special game state based on the lottery result. After the start of the predetermined game state generated after the end of the above, when the specific game state of the number corresponding to the number information stored in association with the number condition in the number information storage means occurs after the start of the predetermined game state, A transition is made to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, since the number of occurrences of the specific game state as the condition for the transition of the game state is diversified according to the type of the number of conditions, the conditions for the transition of the game state are diversified, and the number of occurrences of the specific game state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably diversify the game characteristics that the game state can be changed.

<Feature E0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined game state (special game state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result. A gaming machine that generates
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined first game state (a time-saving probable game state) is generated over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. A game state control means (main control board 920) for causing a transition to a predetermined second game state (non-time saving probability changing game state) in the case of
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the predetermined first game state is generated, information corresponding to a remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing possible information;
A display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the predetermined second game state has occurred and updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period (a game state display unit after transition 1712). Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on a predetermined display device,
The specific display includes character information composed of a plurality of characters as at least a part of the predetermined game state information,
In the predetermined initial state in which the specific display is displayed, the display control means displays the specific display such that at least some of the plurality of characters constituting the character information are unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. At the same time, the specific display is updated so that the recognizability of the character information is increased according to the change in the remaining period, and all the characters constituting the character information can be recognized in a period in which the remaining period is shorter than a predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by being displayed on a display.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. Further, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known a game machine in which different types of gaming states can be continuously generated after the end of the special gaming state to thereby diversify the gaming (for example, JP-A-2005-2005). No. 074175).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate different types of game states after the end of the special game state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature E0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a predetermined game state occurs. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined first game state is generated by the game state control means over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. In this case, a transition is made to the predetermined second game state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result and the first gaming state is to be generated, information or a remaining period corresponding to a remaining period for a predetermined execution period in the first gaming state is calculated. Possible information is stored in the remaining period information storage means. On the predetermined display device, a display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state occurs and updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period is displayed by the display control means. Is displayed.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate the predetermined first game state and the predetermined second game state, the game machine corresponds to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state occurs. Since the specific display is updated according to a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period, the player can change the current gaming state (first gaming state) to the next gaming state (second gaming state) by the updated second display. (Game state), it is possible to recognize that the time when the game state transitions will come soon. Thereby, when the first gaming state occurs, it is possible to appropriately improve the gaming ability in which the player expects the transition of the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In particular, the specific display includes character information composed of a plurality of characters as at least a part of the predetermined game state information, and forms the character information in a predetermined initial state in which the specific display is displayed. At least some of the plurality of characters are displayed so as to be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. Then, the specific display is updated so that the recognizability of the character information is increased in accordance with a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first game state, and when the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, All characters constituting the character information are displayed so as to be recognizable.

  Therefore, the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first gaming state is reduced, that is, the character information is completed as the time to transition to the second gaming state approaches, and as the recognizability of the character information gradually increases, It is possible to preferably increase the player's expectation for the second game state.

<Feature F0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined game state (special game state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result. A gaming machine that generates
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined first game state (a time-saving probable game state) is generated over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. A game state control means (main control board 920) for causing a transition to a predetermined second game state (non-time saving probability changing game state) in the case of
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the predetermined first game state is generated, information corresponding to a remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing possible information;
A display corresponding to predetermined game state information that is displayed when the predetermined second game state has occurred, and at least the size of the display changes stepwise or stepwise according to a change in the remaining period. Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the specific display (the post-transition game state display portion 1712) updated on a predetermined display device,
The display control means, when increasing or decreasing the size of the specific display stepwise, temporarily maximum display larger than the size of the specific display after the change, or temporarily smaller than the size of the specific display after the change A gaming machine characterized by displaying the changed specific display after temporarily displaying a minimal display.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. Further, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known a game machine in which different types of gaming states can be continuously generated after the end of the special gaming state to thereby diversify the gaming (for example, JP-A-2005-2005). No. 074175).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate different types of game states after the end of the special game state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature F0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a predetermined game state occurs. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined first game state is generated by the game state control means over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. In this case, a transition is made to the predetermined second game state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result and the first gaming state is to be generated, information or a remaining period corresponding to a remaining period for a predetermined execution period in the first gaming state is calculated. Possible information is stored in the remaining period information storage means. The predetermined display device is a display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state occurs by the display control means, and has at least a size corresponding to a change in the remaining period. A specific display that is updated so as to change in a stepwise manner is displayed.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate the predetermined first game state and the predetermined second game state, the game machine corresponds to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state occurs. Since the specific display is updated so that at least its size changes stepwise larger or smaller in accordance with the change of the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period, the player can change the second display that changes stepwise larger or smaller. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that the time when the game state transitions from the current game state (first game state) to the next game state (second game state) will come soon. Thereby, when the first gaming state occurs, it is possible to appropriately improve the gaming ability in which the player expects the transition of the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In particular, when the size of the specific display is gradually increased or decreased, the specific display after the change is temporarily larger than the size of the specific display after the change or the specific display after the change. This is displayed after the temporary minimum display smaller than the size is temporarily displayed.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the specific display after the change is larger than the specific display before the change, so that in a process where the size of the specific display changes stepwise, In addition, it is possible to make the player feel as if the specific display is suddenly enlarged. By causing the player to feel that the specific display has suddenly become large, it is possible to give the player a sense of consciousness regarding the transition to the second game state, and thereby to perform the game for the transition to the second game state. The expectation of the person can be suitably increased.

<Feature G0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined game state (special game state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result. A gaming machine that generates
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined first game state (a time-saving probable game state) is generated over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. A game state control means (main control board 920) for causing a transition to a predetermined second game state (non-time saving probability changing game state) in the case of
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the predetermined first game state is generated, information corresponding to a remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing possible information;
A first display (remaining period display section 1711) that is updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage means when the predetermined first game state occurs; A second display (a post-transition game state display section 1712) corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the predetermined second game state occurs and updated according to a change in the remaining period. ) Is displayed on a predetermined display device.
The display control means temporarily expands one of the first display and the second display at a plurality of first times constituting a part of the plurality of times provided during the execution period. , Reduced or modified, or a combination of two or more of these, and the first display and the first display are displayed at a plurality of second display times constituting a time different from the first time among the plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by temporarily enlarging, reducing, or deforming both of the second displays, or a combination of two or more of them.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. Further, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known a game machine in which different types of gaming states can be continuously generated after the end of the special gaming state to thereby diversify the gaming (for example, JP-A-2005-2005). No. 074175).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate different types of game states after the end of the special game state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a predetermined game state occurs. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined first game state is generated by the game state control means over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. In this case, a transition is made to the predetermined second game state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result and the first gaming state is to be generated, information or a remaining period corresponding to a remaining period for a predetermined execution period in the first gaming state is calculated. Possible information is stored in the remaining period information storage means.

  When the first game state occurs in the predetermined display device, the predetermined display device displays information stored in the remaining period information storage means (information corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. (A possible information), a first display updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the remaining period, and a display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state occurs, and The second display updated according to the change is displayed by the display control means.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that the predetermined first game state and the predetermined second game state can be continuously generated, the first display is updated according to a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period, and Since the second display corresponding to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state has occurred is also updated in accordance with the change in the remaining period, the player can use the updated first display. The second display updated from the current gaming state (the first gaming state) to the next, while recognizing that the timing at which the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is gradually approaching. It is possible to recognize that the time when the game state transitions to the game state (second game state) will come soon. Thereby, when the first gaming state occurs, it is possible to appropriately improve the gaming ability in which the player expects the transition of the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In particular, at a plurality of first times constituting a part of a plurality of times provided within a predetermined execution period in the first game state, one of the first display and the second display is temporarily displayed. The first display and the second display are displayed in a plurality of second display times that are displayed as enlargement, reduction, or deformation, or a combination of two or more thereof and that are different from the first time among the plurality of times. Both of the displays are temporarily enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or a combination of two or more of them is displayed.

  Therefore, in the process in which the transition of the game state to the second game state gradually approaches, one of the first display and the second display temporarily changes, or both the first display and the second display temporarily change. Or so, the player can be prevented from feeling monotonous in the process, and thereby the player's expectation for the second game state can be appropriately increased.

<Feature G1>
The gaming machine according to Feature G0,
The gaming machine, wherein the second timing is set such that an interval between the second timings becomes shorter as the remaining period becomes shorter.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the interval of the second timing is shorter as the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period is shorter, so that as the timing of the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state approaches, The frequency at which both the first display and the second display temporarily change is increased. The player can recognize that the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state is approaching from the increase in the frequency of both the first display and the second display temporarily changing. Therefore, the player's expectation for the second game state can be appropriately increased.

<Feature H0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is more advantageous than a normal game state. A gaming machine that generates a special game state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific game state (small hit) when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without generation of the special game state. So,
The special game high probability state (probable change game state) in which the special game state occurs with a predetermined high probability when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the probability that the special game state occurs from the special game high probability state A control for generating a low special game low probability state (normal game state) is configured to be executable, and as the special game high probability state, a first special game high probability state (time-saving probability changing game state); It is possible to execute control for generating a second special game high probability state (non-time saving, probable change game state) in which a player can easily obtain a game value by the occurrence of the specific game state as compared with the first special game high probability state. Composed,
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special game high probability state is generated over a predetermined execution period after the end of the special game state, and the predetermined execution period When the game has ended, a game state control means (main control board 920) for terminating the first special game high probability state and transitioning to the second special game high probability state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the end of the special game state, the lottery means corresponds to a remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the obtained information or information capable of calculating the remaining period;
A variable display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing a variable display of the identification information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and then performing a stop display of the identification information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means;
When the first special game high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state, a specific display updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage unit ( Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the remaining period display section 1711) on a predetermined display device,
The display control means,
The lottery means obtains a lottery result without the occurrence of the special game state with respect to establishment of the last start condition in the remaining period, and the second special after completion of the variable display with respect to establishment of the start condition. When the game high probability state is generated, the specific display including at least predetermined zero information updated in response to the predetermined zero state in which the remaining period has been exhausted, and the change display of the identification information is the change control. In synchronization with the timing started by the means, or while the fluctuation display of the identification information is displayed after being started by the fluctuation control means,
The first result is obtained by the lottery means with respect to the establishment of the last start condition in the remaining period, and the second special game high probability state is not generated after the end of the fluctuation display with respect to the establishment of the start condition. In this case, the predetermined zero information is not displayed, or the visibility is reduced as compared with the case where the second special game high probability state is generated after the end of the variable display with respect to establishment of the start condition. A gaming machine characterized by displaying in a lowered state.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set, and the game ball enters a special winning port. There is known a configuration in which a large number of prizes can be won. In recent years, with this type of gaming machine, a lottery result has been provided by providing a lottery result (for example, a small hit) in which a gaming ball can enter a large winning opening even if it is not a big hit as a lottery result by the lottery. The following is also known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine provided with a lottery result that allows a game ball to enter a special winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means. When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Occurs. When the lottery result is the second predetermined result without the occurrence of the special game state, the predetermined specific game state occurs.

  A special game high probability state in which a special game state occurs with a predetermined high probability when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and a special game low probability state in which the probability of the special game state occurring is lower than the special game high probability state. Is generated, and as a special game high probability state, a first special game high probability state and a specific game state are generated by the player as compared with the first special game high probability state. A control for generating a second special game high probability state in which a value is easily obtained is configured to be executable. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special game high probability state is generated by the game state control means over a predetermined execution period after the end of the special game state. When the predetermined execution period ends, the first special game high probability state ends and the state transits to the second special game high probability state.

  In a case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the end of the special game state, a predetermined execution period in the first special game high probability state Is stored in the remaining period information storage means. When the first special game high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state, information stored in the remaining period information storage means (corresponding to the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period) is displayed on the predetermined display device by the display control means. The specific display updated according to the change in the remaining period corresponding to the information that has been changed or the information that can calculate the remaining period) is displayed.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that the first special game high probability state and the second special game high probability can be continuously generated after the end of the special game state, the first display indicates a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. The player is updated according to the first display, and the updated first display indicates that the time at which the game state transitions from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state is gradually approaching. I can recognize. Thereby, when the first special game high probability state occurs after the special game state, the game property that the player expects the transition of the game state from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state Can be suitably improved.

  In particular, a lottery result without the occurrence of a special game state is obtained for the last start condition in the remaining period, and the second special game high-probability state after the end of the variable display for the start condition is satisfied. Occurs, the specific display including at least the predetermined zero information that is updated corresponding to the predetermined zero state in which the remaining period has disappeared is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of the identification information is started by the fluctuation control means. Displayed synchronously or after the change display of the identification information is started by the change control means. Therefore, by visually recognizing the predetermined zero information included in the specific display, the changed display of the identification information started is the last changed display during the execution period of the first special game high probability state. Can be recognized, and the game can be continued while expecting the second special game high probability state to occur after the fluctuation display.

  On the other hand, if the first start condition is satisfied in the remaining period, the first result is obtained, and the second special game high probability state does not occur after the end of the fluctuation display for the satisfaction of the start condition. The predetermined zero information is not displayed, or the visibility is reduced as compared with the case where the second special game high probability state occurs after the end of the variable display with respect to establishment of the starting condition. It is displayed in the state.

  Therefore, if a lottery result in which the second special game high probability state does not occur is obtained after the end of the fluctuation display with respect to the establishment of the last start condition, the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined zero information, or , It is difficult to recognize that the execution period in the first special game high probability state has expired. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to expect the occurrence of the second special game high probability state as in the case where zero information is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the second special game high probability state after execution.

  As a result, a game state different from the situation that the player expected due to misunderstanding occurs after the end of the fluctuation display with respect to the establishment of the last start condition, and it is suppressed that the player feels that the game is not interesting based on it. it can. Therefore, in a game in which the second special game state can occur after the end of the first special game state, it is possible to more suitably realize the improvement of the game property in which the player expects the transition to the second special game state.

<Feature J0>
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. RAM)
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When the probability information changed by the setting change means is the probability information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of probabilities stored in the setting storage means, the lowest probability, or the lowest probability A game machine comprising: setting output means (main control board 920 and sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to a probability so that a player can identify it.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the feature J0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to a probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  If the probability information changed by the setting change means is the probability information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of probabilities stored in the setting storage means, the lowest probability or the lowest probability corresponds to the lowest probability. The setting output information is output by the setting output means so that the player can be identified. Thereby, the player can be identified based on the output from the setting output means that the lowest probability is set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. Therefore, the player can add a gaming property for identifying the probability information about the gaming machine being played. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature J1>
The gaming machine according to feature J0,
The setting output means, when the probability information stored in the setting storage means is the probability information corresponding to a probability different from the lowest probability, the probability information stored in the setting storage means A gaming machine which outputs corresponding setting output information so that a player can identify it.

  In the case of the gaming machine with the feature J1, if the probability information stored in the setting storage means is probability information corresponding to a probability different from the lowest probability, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is set to The output means outputs the player in an identifiable manner. Therefore, as the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery, not only the lowest probability but also information corresponding to a probability different from the lowest probability is output to the output by the setting output means. It can be suggested to the player based on this. As a result, it is possible to more suitably add a game property in which the player identifies the probability information about the gaming machine during the game.

<Feature J2>
The gaming machine according to Feature J0 or Feature J1,
A predetermined entrance (a winning opening of a general winning device 439A, 439B) provided in a game area (game area) where the game ball flows down and through which the game ball can enter;
A game value providing means (payout control board 930) for providing a game value when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance;
Entry information storage means (base data storage unit 2492) for storing entry information corresponding to the entry of game balls into the predetermined entrance, updated based on the number of game balls entering the predetermined entrance; )When,
A predetermined output unit (status display unit 2591);
Information output control means (payout control board 930) for outputting the entry information stored in the entry information means or entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information to the predetermined output unit. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the feature J2, the entry information updated based on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance provided in the game area is stored in the entry information storage means. The entry information stored in the entry information storage unit or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information is output to a predetermined output unit by the information output control unit.

  Since the entry information or the entry correspondence information is output to the output unit, the employee of the game hall (hall) or the like checks the entry information or the entry correspondence information output to the output unit, so that the game ball to the entrance can be obtained. It can be determined whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value regarding the entry of the game machine. Therefore, when it is determined that the performance of the gaming machine is not as designed, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as removing the gaming machine or not operating the gaming machine, and the performance of the gaming machine is reduced to the design value. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being on the street.

<Feature K0>
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. RAM)
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is output over a certain period of time, or Setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting the output of the setting output information over a certain period at a higher probability than in a period different from the certain period. A gaming machine characterized by:

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages. This problem is also common to the gaming machines described in the following feature K1.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the characteristic K0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to a probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation section provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means for a predetermined period of time. The setting output information is output over a certain period of time, or is output with a higher probability than a period different from the certain period.

  Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery, based on the output state of the information over a certain period, Can be suggested to the player. As a result, the player can add a gaming property for estimating probability information about the gaming machine being played. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature K1>
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. RAM)
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is not output for a certain period. Or setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting the output of the setting output information over a certain period at a lower probability than a period different from the certain period. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine having the feature K1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to a probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation section provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means for a predetermined period of time. The setting output information is not output for a certain period of time or the output of the setting output information is output for a certain period with a lower probability than in a period different from the certain period.

  Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery, based on the output state of the information over a certain period, Can be suggested to the player. As a result, the player can add a gaming property for estimating probability information about the gaming machine being played. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature K2>
The gaming machine according to feature K0 or feature K1,
A predetermined entrance (a winning opening of a general winning device 439A, 439B) provided in a game area (game area) where the game ball flows down and through which the game ball can enter;
A game value providing means (payout control board 930) for providing a game value when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance;
Entry information storage means (base data storage unit 2492) for storing entry information corresponding to the entry of game balls into the predetermined entrance, updated based on the number of game balls entering the predetermined entrance; )When,
A predetermined output unit (status display unit 2591);
Information output control means (payout control board 930) for outputting the entry information stored in the entry information means or entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information to the predetermined output unit. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the characteristic K2, the entry information updated based on the number of gaming balls entering the predetermined entrance provided in the game area is stored in the entry information storage means. The entry information stored in the entry information storage unit or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information is output to a predetermined output unit by the information output control unit.

  Since the entry information or the entry correspondence information is output to the output unit, the employee of the game hall (hall) or the like checks the entry information or the entry correspondence information output to the output unit, so that the game ball to the entrance can be obtained. It can be determined whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value regarding the entry of the game machine. Therefore, when it is determined that the performance of the gaming machine is not as designed, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as removing the gaming machine or not operating the gaming machine, and the performance of the gaming machine is reduced to the design value. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being on the street.

<Feature L0>
A predetermined entrance (a winning opening of a general winning device 439A, 439B) provided in a game area (game area) where the game ball flows down and through which the game ball can enter;
A game value providing means (payout control board 930) for providing a game value when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance;
Entry information storage means (base data storage unit 2492) for storing entry information corresponding to the entry of game balls into the predetermined entrance, updated based on the number of game balls entering the predetermined entrance; When,
Predetermined state information corresponding to a predetermined state (predetermined error) preset for the gaming machine is output without inputting predetermined operation information corresponding to a predetermined operation (operation on the initialization switch 907). An output unit (status display unit 2591);
Information output control means for outputting, when the predetermined operation information is input, the entry information stored in the entry information storage means, or entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information, to the output unit. (Payout control board 930).

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in a game area in which a game ball flows down, a prize port to which the game ball is paid out when the game ball is won, a passage leading the game ball to the prize port, and no prize port. There are provided a number of game nails which form a passage leading to the outlet. A large number of game nails are driven into and fixed to a game board forming an outer shape of a game board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machines, the performance of the gaming machine may not be as designed due to individual differences or mounting angles of the gaming machine, and a player playing the game with such a gaming machine. Could be disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature L0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably outputting information relating to the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined entrance. That is, entry information updated based on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance provided in the game area is stored in the entry information storage means. When predetermined operation information corresponding to a predetermined operation is input, the information output control means enters the entry information stored in the entry information storage means, or entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information. Is output to an output unit from which predetermined state information is output without inputting the predetermined operation information.

  Since the entry information or the entry correspondence information is output to the output unit, the employee of the game hall (hall) or the like checks the entry information or the entry correspondence information output to the output unit, so that the game ball to the entrance can be obtained. It can be determined whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value regarding the entry of the game machine. Therefore, when it is determined that the performance of the gaming machine is not as designed, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as removing the gaming machine or not operating the gaming machine, and the performance of the gaming machine is reduced to the design value. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being on the street.

  In particular, when a predetermined operation is input, entry information or entry correspondence information is output to an output unit that outputs predetermined state information without inputting the predetermined operation, so that a predetermined state is output. Since the output unit that is the output destination of the information can be diverted as the output destination of the entry information or the entry correspondence information, it is possible to output the entry information or the entry correspondence information while suppressing the cost.

<Feature L1>
The gaming machine according to Feature L0,
A notification unit (notification unit) provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine to notify that the entry information or the entry correspondence information can be output to the output unit at a predetermined time (when a base error is detected). 2491)
The game, wherein the information output control means outputs the entry information or the entry correspondence information to the output unit when the notification by the notification unit is performed and the predetermined operation is input. Machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature L1, a notification unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine is notified at a predetermined time that the entry information or the entry correspondence information can be output to the output unit. The information output control unit is configured to output the entry information or the entry correspondence information to the output unit when the notification by the notification unit is performed and a predetermined operation is input. Therefore, a person who wants to check the entry information or the entry correspondence information, such as an employee of the game arcade, can recognize the time when the entry information or the entry correspondence information is output to the output unit by the notification by the notification unit.

<Feature M0>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means;
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-display) for outputting at least setting information (setting suggestion information) corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means and a caution display (caution display) for urging the player to pay attention to excessive gaming. A control board 940).
The information output means, when a player has consumed a game value (game ball) of a predetermined amount or more in a predetermined game progress state, has the lowest winning probability of the setting information compared to before the state. A gaming machine which outputs at least one of the minimum setting information corresponding to the above and the warning display with a high probability.

  As an example of a gaming machine, a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters the starting port and generates a special game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained as a game value when a lottery is won by the lottery. It has been known. In addition, when the start switch is operated, a lottery of a hand is performed and a plurality of reels are rotated, and thereafter, when the stop switch is operated, each reel is sequentially stopped, and effective when all reels are stopped. A slot machine in which when the combination on the drawing corresponding to the winning combination on the line stops, a prize is won and a medal as a game value is paid out is also known as an example of the gaming machine. Also, in gaming machines capable of acquiring a game value in accordance with the progress of the game, when a predetermined operation is performed, a device that displays an alert image for preventing a player from being immersed in the game. (For example, JP-A-2014-8184).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a function of suppressing immersion in a game. For example, in a configuration in which a reminder image is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed, a reminder image is displayed even though the game is being performed in a favorable progress state, whereby the player can play the game. There was a possibility that you could not enjoy it. This problem is also a common problem for the gaming machines described in the following feature M1.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the feature M0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably outputting a display for calling attention to excessive gaming. That is, in a gaming machine provided with a game control means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, a predetermined value at which the player has consumed a predetermined value or more In the case of the game progress status, at least the minimum setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, or at least a caution display urging the player to pay attention to an excessive game One is output by the information output means with a higher probability than before the situation.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is in the predetermined game progress state (that is, a state in which a predetermined amount or more of game value has been consumed) to recognize the minimum setting information or the warning display. It is possible to provide an opportunity to confirm the current situation once away from the gaming machine.

  In particular, when the lowest setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means is displayed, the situation may not improve even if the game is continued. It is easy for the player to make a choice to cancel. Therefore, the display of the minimum setting information allows the player who has fallen into a situation where the game value has been consumed by a predetermined amount or more to be appropriately encouraged to suppress the game.

  The “predetermined game progress status” of the gaming machine described in the feature M0 is, for example, “a second lottery in which a gaming value is not obtained for the player as a lottery result by the lottery means compared to the first lottery result”. The lottery result may be a predetermined game progress status extracted more than a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times compared to the number of times the first lottery result is obtained, or Exceed a predetermined number (for example, if the difference between the number of game balls fired and the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number, if the number of loss fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number, the number of losses and the number of big hits in special symbol lottery And the like, or the situation where the player continues the game for more than a predetermined period (continuous game time).

<Feature M1>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means;
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-display) for outputting at least setting information (setting suggestion information) corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means and a caution display (caution display) for urging the player to pay attention to excessive gaming. A control board 940).
The information output means is configured such that, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a second lottery result in which a game value is not obtained for the player as compared with the first lottery result is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, or the first lottery result. If the predetermined game progress status is extracted more than a predetermined number of times compared to the number of times the lottery result is obtained, compared to before the situation, the lowest corresponding to the lowest winning probability of the setting information A gaming machine which outputs at least one of setting information and the warning display with high probability.

  With respect to the above-described problem, a gaming machine having the feature M1 can provide a gaming machine that can appropriately prevent sinking into a game. That is, in a gaming machine equipped with game control means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the lottery result by the lottery means is compared with the first lottery result. The second lottery result that does not provide a game value to the player is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, or is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times compared to the number of times that the first lottery result is obtained. In the case of the game progress status, at least one of the minimum setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, or a caution display urging the player to pay attention to an excessive game. Is output by the information output means with a higher probability than before the situation. Therefore, the predetermined game progress status (that is, a second lottery result that does not provide a game value to the player as compared to the first lottery result as a lottery result by the lottery means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, or (A situation in which the first lottery result is extracted a predetermined number of times or more in comparison with the number of times in which the first lottery result is obtained). Can be provided to give an opportunity to reconfirm the current situation once away from the gaming machine.

  In particular, when the lowest setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means is displayed, the situation may not improve even if the game is continued. It is easy for the player to make a choice to cancel. Therefore, by displaying the minimum setting information, the second lottery result that does not provide a game value for the player as a lottery result by the lottery means as compared with the first lottery result is more than a predetermined number of times, or Therefore, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player who has fallen into a situation where the first lottery result is extracted a predetermined number of times or more in comparison with the number of times the first lottery result is obtained, to suppress the game.

<Feature N0>
It has a ball support portion (support surface 3452A3) that supports the lower side of the game ball, is rotatable around the vertical direction side, and rotates the game ball supported by the ball support portion. A first guiding state (entry-prohibited posture) for guiding to a predetermined first direction side (passage portion 3218 side), and a second guiding state different from the first guiding state and different from the first guiding state. A movable member (movable member 3452A) that can be switched to a second guiding state (entry-permissible posture) for guiding a game ball supported by the ball supporting portion to a direction side (passage portion 3241 side);
A gaming machine, characterized in that the ball support section is provided with an upstream ball support section that supports a game ball upstream of a center of rotation of the movable member.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. A typical pachinko machine is provided with a movable member at the entrance that can transition between a closed position that closes the entrance of the winning device and an open position that opens the entrance, so that the game balls can enter the winning space. A prize-winning device configured to change the entry probability is provided (for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

  In the conventional winning device, when the number of entering game balls is set to be small, and when the movable member is temporarily shifted from the closed position to the open position, it is necessary to set a short period during which the movable member is in the open position. However, in such a case, there has been a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a state in which the movable member has shifted to the open position by shortening the period during which the movable member is in the open position.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature N0, a prize-winning device that makes it easy for a player to visually recognize the state in which the movable member has shifted to the predetermined state and that can easily set the number of game balls to enter is small. Provided gaming machine. That is, the movable member is configured to be rotatable around the vertical side, and to be switchable between the first guiding state and the second guiding state by the rotating operation. The movable member has a ball support that supports the lower side of the game ball. The game ball supported by the ball support is guided in a predetermined first direction when the movable member is in the first guidance state, and is different from the first guidance state when the movable member is in the second guidance state. Is guided to the second direction side different from the first direction side.

  Since the ball support section is provided with an upstream ball support section that supports the game ball on the upstream side of the center of rotation of the movable member, for the game ball supported by the upstream ball support section, It is possible to generate a force for moving the game ball toward the direction returning to the upstream side by the centrifugal force due to the rotation. For this reason, for example, when the movable member is temporarily shifted (switched) from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, the direction in which the game ball is guided in the second guidance state (that is, the second direction) Side), it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to advance.

  Thereby, when temporarily moving the movable member from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, the game ball is guided in the second guidance state while setting a longer transition time to the second guidance state. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to advance in the second direction side, that is, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls entering the second direction side. Therefore, by using the movable member for the winning device, the player can easily recognize the state in which the movable member has shifted to the second guidance state, and reduce the number of game balls entering the second direction. A winning device that can be easily set can be configured.

  The “vertical direction side” in the feature N0 does not necessarily need to be the vertical direction, and may be a direction slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

<Feature N1>
The gaming machine according to Feature N0,
An inlet-side ball passage portion (passage portion 3217) provided upstream of the movable member and guiding a game ball to an upstream side of the ball support portion of the movable member;
A step (a support surface 3217A and a support surface 3452A3) in which the upstream side of the sphere support portion is vertically lower than the entrance side sphere passage portion between the entrance side ball passage portion and the upstream side of the ball support portion. A game machine characterized by a step formed between the game machine and the game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature N1, an entrance-side ball passage portion that guides a game ball to an upstream side of the ball support portion of the movable member is provided upstream of the movable member. A step between the entrance-side ball passage portion and the upstream side of the ball support portion in which the support surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the ball support portion is vertically lower than the support surface of the game ball on the entrance-side ball passage portion Part is provided.

  Therefore, when the ball support portion of the movable member is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side to guide the game ball to the downstream side, the entrance side ball passage portion and the upstream side of the ball support portion. The angle of the downward inclination of the ball support portion can be reduced by the magnitude of the step at the step provided between the ball support. Since the advancing speed of the game ball by the ball support can be reduced as the angle of the downward inclination in the ball support decreases, the second direction guided in the second guidance state or the second guidance guided in the first guidance state It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to advance in one direction. Therefore, by using the movable member for the winning device, the player can easily see the state in which the movable member is transitioning to the second guidance state or the first guidance state, and the second direction side or the first direction. It is possible to configure a winning device in which the number of game balls approaching to the side can be easily set to be small.

  Also, by providing a step between the entrance-side ball passage and the upstream side of the ball support, game balls that have entered the ball support from the entrance-side ball passage are prevented from returning to the entrance-side ball passage again. it can. In particular, in the case where the movable member is configured to be switchable between the first guidance state and the second guidance state by a rotation operation centered on the vertical direction side, the rotation operation causes the upstream sphere support section to be switched. It is possible to preferably suppress the game ball supported by the return to the entrance-side ball passage portion due to the centrifugal force due to the rotation.

<Feature N2>
The gaming machine according to feature N0 or feature N1,
The movable member is provided on the downstream side of the rotation center, and when the movable member is in the first guiding state, a game ball is formed in a first passage portion (passage portion) formed in the first direction side. 3218) and a ball outlet capable of discharging a game ball to a second passage portion (passage portion 3241) formed on the second direction side when the movable member is in the second guiding state. (Exit portion 3452A2),
On the ball outlet side of the ball support, the ball outlet is vertically lower on the side opposite to the rotation direction when the movable member is switched from the first guiding state to the second guiding state. Or a ball escape portion (ball escape portion 3452A6) configured to include a step or a downward inclination toward the ball exit side.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature N2, since the ball outlet is provided on the downstream side of the rotation center of the movable member, when the movable member is in the first guidance state, the ball outlet is provided. The game ball can be discharged to the first passage portion formed in the first direction side, and when the movable member is in the second guiding state, the game ball is formed in the second direction side from the ball exit portion. It can be discharged to the second passage.

  On the ball exit side of the ball support, a ball escape is provided on the side opposite to the turning direction when the movable member is switched from the first guiding state to the second guiding state. When the movable member is rotated to temporarily transition (switch) from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, the game ball supported by the ball support unit is moved relative to the rotation direction of the movable member. Since it is easy to move in the opposite direction, it is easy to reach the ball escape portion provided in the opposite direction.

  Since the ball escape portion is configured to include a step in which the ball exit portion side is vertically downward or a downward slope toward the ball exit portion side, when the game ball reaches the ball escape portion, the game ball Can be discharged from the ball outlet. Thereby, when temporarily moving the movable member from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, during the transition, the game ball supported by the ball support is positioned on the ball exit in the opposite direction side. It can be easily discharged to the first passage portion on the first direction side.

<Feature N3>
The gaming machine according to any of features N0 to N2,
The movable member,
It is provided downstream from the rotation center, and when the movable member is in the first guiding state, the game ball can be discharged to a first passage portion (passage portion 3218) formed in the first direction side. And a ball exit portion (exit portion 3452A2) capable of discharging a game ball to a second passage portion (passage portion 3241) formed on the second direction side when the movable member is in the second guiding state. When,
A first wall portion that stands on the outer edge side of the ball support portion and that restricts the entry of a game ball into the second passage portion when the movable member is in the first guidance state ( Wall portion 3452A4),
A wall portion in which the ball exit portion is formed between the first wall portion and the outer wall side of the ball support portion, wherein the movable member is in the second guiding state; A second wall portion (wall portion 3452A5) for restricting a game ball from entering the one passage portion;
In the second wall portion, the sphere outlet portion side when the second wall portion is viewed from the front is smaller than the shape of the sphere outlet portion side of the first wall portion when the first wall portion is viewed from the front. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a large cutout.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature N3, a ball outlet is provided downstream of the center of rotation of the movable member. When the movable member is in the first guiding state, the game ball can be discharged from the ball exit to the first passage formed in the first direction, and when the movable member is in the second guiding state. Can discharge a game ball from a ball exit portion to a second passage portion formed on the second direction side. On the outer edge side of the ball support portion, a first wall portion that regulates the entry of the game ball into the second passage portion when the movable member is in the first guidance state, and when the movable member is in the second guidance state. A second wall for restricting entry of the game ball into the first passage is provided upright. The ball discharge part is formed between the first wall part and the second wall part.

  The second wall has a notch that is larger at the ball exit side when the second wall is viewed from the front than at the ball exit side of the first wall when the first wall is viewed from the front. Since the movable member shifts from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, the restriction of the entry of the game ball into the second passage by the first wall is difficult to be released, In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first passage by the second wall is difficult to be restricted. Therefore, during the transition when the movable member transitions from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, the game ball supported by the ball support can easily enter the first passage.

  Further, when the movable member shifts from the second guiding state to the first guiding state, the entry of the game ball into the second passage by the first wall is easily restricted, and the first wall by the second wall. Restrictions on the entry of game balls into the passage are easily released. Therefore, even when the movable member shifts from the first guide state to the second guide state, the game ball supported by the ball support can easily enter the first passage during the shift.

<Feature P0>
It has a support surface (upper surface of the movable member 3454A) for supporting the game ball, and is provided below the support surface while being inclined downward in a predetermined direction in a predetermined approach restricted state (entry prohibited posture). While restricting the entry of the game ball into the winning space (passage portion 3221), the prize space is shifted to the approach permitting state (the entry permitting posture) in which the support surface is displaced with respect to the entry restricting state. A winning device (large winning device 3434) configured to allow a game ball to enter the inside,
When the support surface is displaced from the entry restricted state to the entry permitted state, the support surface is displaced in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the angle of the descending inclination is in the entry restricted state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the gaming machine is displaced so as to have a steeper slope than in the case and to guide the game ball supported by the support surface into the winning space.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. As a conventional pachinko machine, a large winning opening formed to open upward to an inclined passage extending so as to incline downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and provided at an entrance portion of the large winning opening. A large winning prize opening door (movable piece) which is provided along the upstream side of the large winning prize opening and which is centered on a rotation axis pointing in the front-rear direction and closing the inclined winning prize opening and an inclined passage. A large state configured to be switchable between a closed state (entry restricted state) that constitutes a part of the above and an open state (enterable state) in which the downstream side of the inclined passage is moved downward to open the special winning opening. There is a pachinko machine provided with a winning opening door (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14630).

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine provided with a variable winning device in which the movable piece becomes a part of the inclined passage in the restricted access state. For example, there is a problem in that the support surface of the game ball in the movable piece that is a part of the inclined passage in the entry restricted state is easily loaded by the game ball passing over the support surface and is easily painful.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature P0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily maintain the support surface for supporting the gaming ball in the winning device in a suitable state. That is, the prize winning device has a support surface for supporting the game ball, and in a predetermined approach restricted state, the support surface descends and inclines in a predetermined direction into a prize space provided below the support surface. While the configuration is such that the entry of the game ball is restricted, the transition of the support surface to the entry permitted state in which the support surface is displaced from the entry restricted state allows the game ball to enter the winning space.

  When the support surface is displaced from the entry restriction state to the entry permission state, the support surface is displaced in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the angle of the downward inclination is steeper than in the case of the entry restriction state. The game ball is displaced so as to be inclined and incline for guiding the game ball supported by the support surface to the winning space.

  Thus, when the support surface is displaced from the entry restricted state to the entry permitted state, a part of the support surface displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction on the side opposite to the predetermined direction, It can be housed below another member provided on the opposite side with respect to the support surface. If a part of the support surface on the opposite side is stored below another member, the position of the load applied to the support surface is dispersed because the game ball cannot pass over the part (cannot contact). Can be. Therefore, the progress of the aging on the support surface is suppressed, whereby the support surface can be easily maintained in a suitable state.

<Feature P1>
The gaming machine according to feature P0,
A first link portion (a movable member 3454A) including a support surface, a second link portion (a first link portion 3454B) and a third link portion (a second link portion) connected to the first link portion, respectively. 3454C), wherein when one of the second link portion and the third link portion is operated, the support surface is displaced in the opposite direction. The other link portion of the second link portion or the third link portion is displaced in such a manner that the angle of the descending inclination is displaced in a direction of a steep inclination compared to before the operation of the one link portion. A gaming machine comprising a link mechanism for operating a first link unit.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature P1, a link mechanism including a first link portion including a support surface, and a second link portion and a third link portion respectively connected to the first link portion is provided. By operating one of the second link portion and the third link portion, the support surface can be displaced in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the angle of the descending inclination is set to the one link. It can be displaced in a direction where the inclination becomes steeper than before the operation of the section. Therefore, by using the link mechanism, it is possible to realize switching between the entry restricted state and the entry permitted state in the winning device. Therefore, since the support surface can be mechanically displaced using the link mechanism, the support surface can be appropriately displaced while suppressing the control load.

<Feature Q0>
A predetermined passage portion (passage portion 3215) continuous to the vertical side;
A guide support portion (support surface 3217A) provided below the predetermined passage portion to guide the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion by contacting the lower side of the game ball to the horizontal direction (leftward side); In a gaming machine with
The upper game balls stacked on the upper side to the game balls supported on the lower side by the guidance support portion, intersect with the vertical direction side, or include the direction side and the vertical direction side where the guidance support portion is continuous. It is provided with a guiding portion (an opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215) for guiding to a side where a winning opening is provided in a predetermined direction side (front side) crossing the plane. Gaming machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a structure in which a path of a game ball is formed may be disposed in a game area. For example, a steep portion, which is a passage through which a game ball flows down at a steep angle with respect to a predetermined horizontal direction such as a right direction, and is provided continuously downstream of the steep portion to advance the game ball to a predetermined horizontal direction. There is a pachinko machine provided with a special winning device in which a traveling section, which is a passage to be formed, is formed inside (for example, JP-A-2017-192528).

  However, in a gaming machine having an upstream passage that is continuous with the vertical direction, and a downstream passage that is connected to the downstream of the upstream passage and guides game balls in a predetermined horizontal direction, There was still room for improvement. For example, there has been a possibility that ball clogging may occur due to stacking of game balls that flow down in the vertical direction along the upstream passage on the upper side of game balls whose lower side is supported by the downstream passage.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature Q0, a ball formed by a game ball whose lower side is supported by a passage for guiding the game ball to a predetermined horizontal direction and a game ball stacked on the upper side of the game ball. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing occurrence of clogging (so-called ball biting). That is, a game ball flowing down a predetermined passage portion continuous to the vertical side has its lower side in contact with a guide support portion provided below the predetermined passage portion, and is guided to the horizontal direction by the guide support portion. Is done. When another game ball is stacked on the upper side with respect to the game ball supported on the lower side by the guidance support portion, the upper game ball among the game balls stacked on the top and bottom is guided by the guide portion to the vertical side. The game ball whose lower side is supported by the guide support section, because the guide support section is guided in a predetermined direction crossing the plane including the continuous direction side and the vertical direction side, Ball clogging (ball biting) due to game balls stacked on top of the ball can be suppressed.

  The predetermined direction side on which the upper game ball is guided by the guiding section is also the side on which the winning opening is provided. Therefore, since the game ball guided by the guide unit may enter the winning opening, the player can enjoy the situation where the game ball is guided in the predetermined direction by the guide unit. .

<Feature Q1>
The gaming machine according to feature Q0,
A wall that guides the game ball having a lower side contacting the guide support portion in the horizontal direction while restricting the game ball from being guided to the predetermined direction side and the side where the winning opening is provided. -Shaped regulating portion (wall portion 3217B),
The gaming machine, wherein the guiding portion is an opening formed above the regulating portion and facing the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature Q1, the gaming ball having the lower side in contact with the guiding support portion is guided not only horizontally by the wall-shaped regulating portion but also in the predetermined direction side (vertical direction side). Or the direction in which the guide support portion intersects with a plane including the continuous direction side and the vertical direction side) and is guided to the side where the winning opening is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls whose lower side is supported by the guidance support portion from being guided in the predetermined direction side, and selectively select the game balls stacked on the upper side of the game ball whose lower side is supported by the guide support portion. It can be guided in a predetermined direction.

  Further, since the guiding portion is formed as an opening facing the predetermined direction above the restricting portion, the upper end of the restricting portion for guiding the game ball whose lower side contacts the guiding support portion in the horizontal direction is guided. Can be diverted as the lower end of the part. Therefore, it is possible to realize the occurrence of ball clogging with a simple configuration by a game ball whose lower side is supported by the guidance support portion and a game ball stacked on the upper side of the game ball.

<Feature R0>
A display unit (normal symbol display device 473) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined starting entrance (starting device 436) as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
An entry restriction state (entry prohibited position) for restricting entry of a game ball to a predetermined entry portion (passage portion 3241) provided on the downstream side with respect to the starting ball entry port, and a game ball entering the predetermined entry portion; A movable member (movable member 3452A) capable of switching between an entry permitting state (entry permitting posture) permitting entry of
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined first gaming state, the change execution means stops displaying the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result. And a first operation control unit (main control board 920) for shifting the movable member in the entry restricted state to the entry permitted state for a predetermined period,
The variation execution means is configured to determine the first operation control means as a variation time from when the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state and when the variation display is started to when the first result is stopped and displayed. When the game ball contacts the movable member in a state in which the game device is in the entry allowable state, a change in the length of the game ball contacting the movable member cannot enter the predetermined approach portion due to the transition to the entry restricted state. A gaming machine comprising: an inaccessible change execution means (main control board 920) for stopping and displaying the identification information at a time.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. A typical pachinko machine is provided with a movable member at the entrance that can transition between a closed position (entry-restricted state) for closing the entrance of the prize device and an open position (entry-permitted state) for opening the entrance. There is provided a prize winning device which is configured to be capable of changing the probability of a game ball entering a prize space (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). In such a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the period during which the movable member takes the open position in the non-time saving state is set shorter than the period during which the movable member takes the open position in the time reduction state.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine in which the period during which the movable member is in the entry allowable state varies depending on the gaming state. For example, in the non-time saving state, there is a problem in that the period during which the movable member is in the entry allowable state is too short, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the state in which the movable member has shifted to the entry allowable state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature R0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily recognize the situation in which the movable member has shifted to the entry allowable state. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the predetermined starting ball entrance, after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the fluctuation executing means, the starting is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the identification display corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. On the downstream side with respect to the starting ball entrance, switching between an entry restriction state for restricting the entry of game balls to a predetermined entry section and an entry permission state for permitting the entry of game balls to the predetermined entry section Possible movable members are provided.

  When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined first gaming state, the identification information corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the first operation control means, and the entry restriction state is set. The movable member is moved to the approach permission state for a predetermined period.

  When the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state and the first result is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is started, the state where the fluctuation time is in the state where the movable member is allowed to enter is displayed. In this case, the game ball in contact with the movable member has such a length that it cannot enter a predetermined approach portion due to the transition of the movable member to the entry restricted state.

  Thereby, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state, the game ball is moved to the movable member in the entry allowable state at the timing when the first result is displayed as the stop display on the display unit. It can be visually recognized that the contact has been made and that the game ball has not been able to enter the predetermined entry section. Therefore, even when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state, the player can easily visually recognize the state in which the movable member has shifted to the entry allowable state.

<Feature R1>
The gaming machine according to feature R0,
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined second game state, the change execution means stops and displays the identification information (a stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result. And a second operation control means (main control board 920) for shifting the movable member in the entry restricted state to the entry permitted state for a period longer than the predetermined period,
In the predetermined second game state, the change execution means is the inaccessible change execution means as a change time from when the start condition is satisfied and the change display is started to when the first result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the identification information is stopped and displayed for a fluctuation time having substantially the same length as that of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature R1, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result in a predetermined second gaming state, the second operation control means responds to the first result. Is stopped and the movable member in the entry restriction state is shifted to the entry permission state for a period longer than the predetermined period. In the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined second game state and the first result is stopped and displayed after the change display is started, the change time is set to be substantially the same length as the inaccessible change execution means. Is done.

  Thereby, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined second game state, similarly to the case where the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state, the player displays the stop display on the display unit as a stop display. 1 At the timing when the result is displayed, it can be visually recognized that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member in the entry allowable state. Therefore, even when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied in the predetermined second game state, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the movable member has shifted to the entry allowable state.

  Further, in both the case where the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state and the case where the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined second game state, the player displays a stop display on the display unit as a stop display. 1 When the result is displayed, it is possible to visually recognize that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member in the entry-permitted state, so that the player can identify a difference according to the game state during the period in which the movable member shifts to the entry-permitted state. This makes it easy to identify whether the gaming state is the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

<Feature R2>
The gaming machine according to any of the features R1 or R2,
The movable member is disposed on the downstream side where the path of the game ball is linearly continuous from a position upstream of the position where the starting ball entrance is provided and via a position where the starting ball entrance is provided. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature R2, the path of the game ball is movable from the upstream side to the downstream side where the path of the game ball is linearly continuous from the position where the starting entrance is provided through the position where the starting entrance is provided. Since the members are arranged, it is possible to reduce the variation in the period from when the game ball enters the starting entrance (that is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and when the game ball contacts the movable member). Can be.

  Therefore, the length of the variable display displayed on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition is set such that the game ball in contact with the movable member in a state where the movable member is allowed to enter is restricted from entering the movable member. In the case where the length is set so that it cannot enter the predetermined entry section due to the transition to the state, the occurrence of an error can be suppressed. Thus, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state, the game ball may contact the movable member in the entry allowable state at the timing when the first result is displayed as the stop display on the display unit. In addition, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player cannot visually recognize that the game ball has not entered the predetermined approach portion.

<Feature S0>
Opening / closing means (intermediate block 103) provided to be openable / closable with respect to the support portion (outer frame 101), and it is possible to detect whether or not the open / close means is in a predetermined open state with respect to the support portion. Game machine equipped with a simple open detecting means (open / close detecting switch 108),
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the predetermined setting information;
An input means (a back setting switch) for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting one of the plurality of pieces of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities which can be set as a lottery probability by the lottery means; 905, initialization switch 907),
When the operation information is input by the input unit in a state in which the predetermined state is not detected by the opening detection unit, the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information is extracted by the lottery unit. Information setting means (main control board 920) that can be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940, etc.) for outputting predetermined information when the operation information is input by the input means in a state where it is detected that the predetermined open state is not established by the open detection means; Sound devices 281, 282),
The information output means stops outputting the predetermined information when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine when the predetermined information is output. Gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine in which a lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages. For example, in a gaming machine capable of changing the lottery probability in a situation where the opening / closing means such as a door is closed, even if the operation of changing the lottery probability is performed in that situation, the operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine. , There is a possibility that the lottery probability may be changed illegally.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the feature S0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately execute a setting operation for the gaming machine. That is, the operation information corresponding to the operation of selecting one setting information among the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability by the lottery means is opened and closed by the opening / closing means with respect to the support unit. When the input is input by the input unit in a state where the opening detection unit detects that the opening state is not the predetermined opening state, the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is selected by the information setting unit and the lottery by the lottery unit. In a configuration that can be set as setting information corresponding to the probability, in a case where operation information is input by the input unit in a state where it is detected that the opening state is not the predetermined open state by the opening detection unit, the predetermined information is output by the information output unit. Is output. When the predetermined information is output, the output of the predetermined information is stopped when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine.

  For this reason, the worker of the manufacturing factory or the employee of the game hall inputs the operation information by the input means in a situation where the opening / closing means is not detected to be in the predetermined open state, and opens and sets the opening / closing means after the input. You can make changes. Therefore, after performing a setting change operation from the back side of the gaming machine in a situation where many gaming machines are arranged, the gaming machine that has performed the setting change operation is easily recognized by outputting predetermined information, and the setting change is performed. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game is fixed or the setting of another gaming machine is changed by mistake.

  Further, when predetermined information is output by inputting operation information in a situation where the opening / closing means is not detected to be in the predetermined open state, the front side of the gaming machine is stopped in order to stop the output. Since it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to preferably suppress an illegal change in the lottery probability in the situation.

  In the feature S0, “can be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means” means that the input operation information is changed by the lottery means It may be set as setting information corresponding to the probability, and after the input of the operation information by the input means is completed, at the timing when a predetermined operation is performed, the input operation information is determined by the lottery means by the lottery means. It may be set as setting information corresponding to the probability.

<Feature S1>
The gaming machine according to feature S0,
When the predetermined information is output, the information output unit performs the predetermined operation, including at least an opening operation of the opening / closing unit that is detected by the opening detection unit to be in the predetermined open state. A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined notification is stopped when the game is touched.

  In the gaming machine having the feature S1, when predetermined information is output, a predetermined operation including at least an opening operation of the opening / closing unit detected by the opening detection unit to be in the predetermined open state is performed. In this case, the predetermined notification is stopped by the information output means. Therefore, when predetermined information is output by inputting the operation information in a situation where the opening / closing means is not detected to be in the predetermined open state, in order to stop the output, the predetermined open state is determined. Since at least the opening operation of the detected opening / closing means is required, it is possible to preferably suppress the illegal change of the lottery probability in the situation.

<Feature S2>
The gaming machine according to feature S0 or feature S1,
The information setting means, when the operation information is input by the input means in a state where the opening detection means detects that the predetermined open state is not, after that, in the predetermined open state by the open detection means A gaming machine, wherein the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information is set as the setting information corresponding to a lottery probability by the lottery means, on condition that the setting information is detected.

  In the gaming machine of the feature S2, when operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the opening detection unit detects that the predetermined opening state is not set, the opening detection unit then detects the predetermined opening state. The setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is set by the information setting means as setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, on condition that it is detected that the operation information is present. Therefore, in order for the operation information input in a situation where the opening / closing means is not detected to be in the predetermined open state to be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, the employee of the game hall needs to open / close the opening / closing means. It is necessary to perform an opening operation for, so that an illegal change in the lottery probability in this situation can be suitably suppressed.

<Feature T0>
Opening / closing means (intermediate block 103) provided to be openable / closable with respect to the support portion (outer frame 101), and it is possible to detect whether or not the open / close means is in a predetermined open state with respect to the support portion. Game machine equipped with a simple open detecting means (open / close detecting switch 108),
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940, sound devices 281 and 282) for outputting predetermined information when the predetermined open state is detected by the open detection means;
The information output means, when a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the predetermined state is not the predetermined open state by the open detection means, the open detection means A game machine that outputs the predetermined information that is output when the open state is detected.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine capable of executing a setting operation of a winning probability in a game state transition lottery by an operation on the back side of the gaming machine. For example, a loud warning sound (error information) may be output by a setting change operation legally performed by an employee of a game arcade or the like. In such a case, there is a possibility that a player who does not fall off may be disturbed by the output error information. Further, when the conditions for outputting the error information increase in the succeeding model, it is necessary to prepare the error information each time.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the feature T0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a change operation on the back side of the gaming machine. In other words, when a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the opening / closing means is not in a predetermined open state in which the opening / closing means is opened with respect to the support portion, the information output is performed. The predetermined information is output by the means. The predetermined information is the same as the information that is output when the predetermined state is detected by the release detection unit.

  The information that is output when the predetermined open state is detected by the open detection means is information that has a relatively large number of opportunities to be output, and therefore the information is hardly noticed by the player. Therefore, when the predetermined change operation performed on the back side of the gaming machine is an operation properly performed by an employee of the game arcade, etc., it is possible to make the player who has no fault feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by using the same information that is output when the predetermined open state is detected by the open detection means, the opening / closing means is opened to the support portion if the open / close means is not in the predetermined open state. There is no need to prepare dedicated information as information to be output when a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the detection is performed by the detection means.

  In addition, a worker at a manufacturing factory or an employee at a game arcade inputs operation information by input means in a situation where the opening / closing means is not detected to be in a predetermined open state, and after the input, opens the opening / closing means to change the setting. Can be performed. Therefore, after performing a predetermined change operation from the back side of the gaming machine in a situation where many gaming machines are arranged, the gaming machine that has performed the change operation is easily recognized by outputting predetermined information, and the change operation is performed. Can be easily determined, or a situation in which the setting of another gaming machine is erroneously changed can be easily avoided.

<Feature T1>
The gaming machine according to Feature T0,
The information output means, when the predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the predetermined state is not detected as the predetermined open state by the release detection means, thereafter, A gaming machine that stops output of the predetermined information when the open detection means detects that the predetermined open state is not detected after the detection of the predetermined open state by the detection means. .

If it is a gaming machine with feature T1,
If a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the opening detection means detects that the predetermined opening state is not established, then, the opening detection means performs the predetermined opening state in the predetermined opening state. After detecting that there is, the information output means stops outputting the predetermined information when the open detection means detects that the predetermined open state is not established.

  Therefore, when the predetermined information is output by performing a predetermined change operation on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the opening / closing means is not detected as the predetermined open state, the output is stopped. Therefore, an opening operation of the opening / closing means that is detected as being in the predetermined open state and a closing operation of the opening / closing means that is detected as not being in the predetermined open state are required. Unauthorized change operations can be prevented from being performed.

<Feature U0>
A gaming machine comprising: main control means (main control board 920) for performing main control of a game; and sub-control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means.
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
A storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the lottery probability of the lottery by the lottery means;
An input means (a back setting switch) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting one of the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities which can be set as a lottery probability by the lottery means; 905, initialization switch 907),
When the operation information is input by the input unit, the storage control stores the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information in the storage unit as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery unit. Means (main control board 920);
Main electrical components (right entry control mechanism 2452, upper entry control mechanism 2453, lower entry control mechanism 2454, distribution mechanism) that operate under the control of the main control means,
The main control unit is configured to operate the main-side electric component when a predetermined normal control non-execution condition in which normal control including at least the predetermined lottery control is not performed is satisfied. A gaming machine comprising a substrate 920).

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a winning device capable of changing a probability of a game ball entering a winning opening by changing a posture of a movable member (for example, JP-A-2005-2005). -074175).

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, if the condition that the winning device changes the entry probability of the game ball is not satisfied, the control for changing the posture of the movable member is not performed, and the operation of the winning device can be confirmed. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature U0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing the operation check of the electric component operated by the control of the main control unit.

  In the description of the feature U0, the case where the predetermined normal control non-execution condition in which the normal control is not executed is satisfied when the power supply is turned on, the setting information is not stored in the storage unit, The case where the connection of the main-side electric component connected to the control means cannot be confirmed (for example, disconnection of the connector or disconnection). In addition, the normal control may include a control for firing game balls and a control for paying out game balls, in addition to the control for performing a predetermined lottery.

<Feature U1>
A gaming machine comprising: main control means (main control board 920) for performing main control of a game; and sub-control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means.
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
A storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the lottery probability of the lottery by the lottery means;
An input means (a back setting switch) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting one of the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities which can be set as a lottery probability by the lottery means; 905, initialization switch 907),
When the operation information is input by the input unit, the storage control stores the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information in the storage unit as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery unit. Means (main control board 920);
Main electrical components (right entry control mechanism 2452, upper entry control mechanism 2453, lower entry control mechanism 2454, distribution mechanism) that operate under the control of the main control means,
The main control unit includes an operation check unit (main control board 920) for operating the main-side electric component when the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when power is turned on. A gaming machine.

  With the gaming machine described in the feature U1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming the operation of an electric component that operates under the control of the main control unit when the power is turned on. That is, when the operation information corresponding to the operation of selecting one setting information among the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability by the lottery means, In a configuration in which the storage control unit stores setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information as setting information corresponding to a lottery probability by the lottery unit in a storage unit configured to at least store the setting information. If the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on, the main-side electric components operated by the control of the main control unit are operated by the operation check unit of the main control unit. When the power is turned on, the operation of the main electrical components is confirmed by erasing the setting information from the storage unit by clearing the RAM when turning on the power. It becomes possible. In the case of a game machine in a shipping state, setting information is not normally stored in the storage unit. Therefore, when a game machine in a shipping state is delivered to a game hall (hall), the power supply is turned on and the main side is turned on. The operation of the electric component can be checked.

<Feature U2>
The gaming machine according to Feature U0 or Feature U1,
When the power is turned on, when the setting information is not stored in the storage unit, the game device further includes information output means for outputting information for prompting input of the operation information by the input means. Machine.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature U2, if the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on, the information output unit outputs information for prompting input of operation information by the input unit. Is done. Therefore, when the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on, the operation information can be input by the input unit, and the game can be performed with the setting information stored in the storage unit.

<Feature U3>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features U0 to U2,
When the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on, the process is executed after the power is turned on. A gaming machine characterized by restrictions.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature U3, if the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on, the process is executed after the power is turned on, and the process related to the normal game is executed. Since the progress of the control start process executed before is limited, it is possible to prevent the process related to the normal game from being executed in a state where the setting information is not stored in the storage unit.

<Feature V0>
A main control means for performing main control of the game, and a main control means (main control board 920) for executing a process relating to a normal game executed at predetermined time intervals after executing a control start process when power is turned on. And a sub-control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means,
A predetermined number of main-side electrical components (right entry control mechanism 2452, upper entry control mechanism 2453, lower entry control mechanism 2454, distribution mechanism) and at least one sub-side electrical component (input operation device 260, decoration) An electrical component including a symbol display device 479);
A main-side connection that is provided in the main control unit and connects the electric component and the main control unit when the electric component is connected to enable operation of the electric component under the control of the main control unit; A main-side connection portion (connector portion 921) configured to be connectable to the main-side electrical component;
A sub-side connection that is provided in the sub-control unit and connects the electric component and the sub-control unit when the electric component is connected to enable the operation of the electric component under the control of the sub-control unit; A sub-side connection portion (connector portion 941), wherein the sub-side electric component is connectable and at least a part of the main side electric component is connectable.
The sub-control means,
Operation confirmation means (sub-control board 940) for operating the electric component connected to the sub-side connection portion when power is turned on;
The main control means includes:
A gaming machine, wherein when the power is turned on, if the predetermined number of the main-side electrical components are not connected to the main-side connection unit, the progress of the control start process is limited.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a winning device capable of changing a probability of a game ball entering a winning opening by changing a posture of a movable member (for example, JP-A-2005-2005). -074175).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the power is turned on, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm the operation of an electric component operated by control of the main control device, such as a movable member in the winning device.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature V0, when the power is turned on, there is provided a gaming machine capable of confirming the operation of electric components operated by the control of the main controller during the game. can do. In other words, the main control means for performing main control of the game connects the electric component to the main control means when the electric component is connected, and enables the main control means to operate the electric component under the control of the main control means. A connection is provided. On the other hand, when an electric component is connected to the sub-control unit that performs control based on the control signal from the main control unit, the electric component is connected to the sub-control unit, and the electric component is controlled by the sub-control unit. A secondary connection is provided to enable operation.

  An electrical component including a predetermined number of main electrical components and at least one secondary electrical component is provided, and a primary electrical component can be connected to the primary connection portion. The control unit can be connected to the sub-side electric component and can be connected to at least a part of the main-side electric component.

  When the power is turned on, the electric components connected to the sub-side connection unit can be operated by the operation check unit provided in the sub-control unit, so that the main-side electric components are connected to the sub-side control unit. By turning on the power, it is possible to check the operation of the main-side electric components when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined number of main-side electrical components are not connected to the main-side connection portion when the power is turned on, the control start process that is performed before the process related to the normal game is performed. Is limited by the main control means, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a process related to a normal game is executed in a state where the main-side electric component is connected to the sub-side connection portion for operation confirmation.

<Feature V1>
The gaming machine according to Feature V0, wherein the main control unit includes:
If the predetermined number of the main-side electrical components are not connected to the main-side connection portion when the power is turned on, information for prompting connection of the main-side electrical component to the main-side connection portion is output. A gaming machine comprising information output means (main control board 920).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature V1, if the predetermined number of main-side electrical components are not connected to the main-side connection portion when the power is turned on, the main control unit outputs the main control unit by the information output unit. Information for prompting connection of the main electrical component to the side connection portion is output. Therefore, when the power is turned on in a state where the main electrical component is connected to the sub connection portion for operation confirmation, it is possible to prompt the user to connect the main electrical component to the main connection portion.

<Feature W0>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
A ball entrance (a winning opening of the right starting winning device 2432, a winning opening of the upper winning device 2433, a winning opening of the lower winning device 2434) through which a game ball can enter;
Detecting means (a right start winning switch 2442, an upper winning switch 2443, a lower winning switch 2444) for detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detecting means;
A movable member (right-entry restriction mechanism) that is switchably operated between an entry permitting state in which a game ball enters the entrance and an entry restriction state in which the game ball enters the entrance. 2452, an upper entry control mechanism 2453, a lower entry control mechanism 2454),
Winning control means (main control board 920) for switching the movable member between the entry permitted state and the entry restricted state when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery means;
When a predetermined state notification condition is satisfied (for example, when the power is turned on, when the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability is not appropriately stored in the storage unit), the operation checking unit that operates the movable member (Main control board 920).

  As the predetermined state notification condition described in the feature W0, when the power is turned on, the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability may not be appropriately stored in the storage unit. In addition, when the power is turned on, it may be determined that the electrical components to be connected to the main control board are not properly connected (unconnected or disconnected connectors). The vibration sensor or the radio wave sensor provided may detect the occurrence of an abnormality.

<Feature W1>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
A storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the lottery probability of the lottery by the lottery means;
An input means (a back setting switch) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting one of the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities which can be set as a lottery probability by the lottery means; 905, initialization switch 907),
When the operation information is input by the input unit, the storage control stores the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information in the storage unit as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery unit. Means (main control board 920);
A ball entrance (a winning opening of the right starting winning device 2432, a winning opening of the upper winning device 2433, a winning opening of the lower winning device 2434) through which a game ball can enter;
Detecting means (a right start winning switch 2442, an upper winning switch 2443, a lower winning switch 2444) for detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detecting means;
A movable member (right-entry restriction mechanism) that is switchably operated between an entry permitting state in which a game ball enters the entrance and an entry restriction state in which the game ball enters the entrance. 2452, an upper entry control mechanism 2453, a lower entry control mechanism 2454),
When a predetermined state notification condition in which normal control including at least the predetermined lottery control is not performed is satisfied (for example, when the power is turned on, the setting information is not stored in the storage unit), A game machine comprising: an operation check unit (main control board 920) for operating the movable member.

  As a conventional gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of the gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In this special game state, the posture of the movable member is changed to increase the probability of the game balls entering the winning opening, so that a large number of gaming balls can enter the winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2005-074175).

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, if there is a specific situation where there is a possibility that game control cannot proceed properly as a gaming machine, such as a situation where the setting of the gaming machine is not properly performed, the situation is changed. However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration that can be recognized by a game arcade manager or the like.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machines described in the features W0 and W1, a gaming machine capable of appropriately recognizing a specific situation occurring in the gaming machine by a game arcade manager or the like can be provided. For example, when the electric components operated under the control of the main control unit operate at power-on, the setting information is not stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on. Can be recognized.

  Note that at least one feature described in Features 10 to W1 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of features. Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on operation of the launch operation means, a passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a game area; wherein a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Spindle-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

  100: gaming machine, 102: front block, 252: firing handle, 330: firing device, 433: lower winning device, 434: upper winning device, 474: nail state level display device, 479: decorative design display device, 439A 439B: General winning device, 920: Main control board, 930: Payout control board, 940: Sub-control board, 2439A, 2439B: General winning device, 905: Back setting switch, 907: Initialization switch, 261: Press operation device , 1434: right large winning device, 1442A, 1442B: right start winning switch, 1452: right entry restriction mechanism, 1532A: first downflow passage, 1532B: second downflow passage, 1537, 1538: protrusion, 1711, 1711A ... Remaining period display section, 1712, 1712A ... Game state display section after transition, 2491 ... Notification section, 249 ... Base data storage section, 2591 ... Status display section, 3215 ... Pass section, 3217 ... Pass section, 3217A ... Support surface, 3217B ... Wall section, 3218 ... Pass section, 3221 ... Pass section, 3432 ... Right starting prize device, 3241 ... passage portion, 3252 ... entry control mechanism, 3452A ... movable member, 3452A2 ... ball outlet portion, 3452A3 ... support surface, 3452A4 ... wall portion, 3452A5 ... wall portion, 3452A6 ... ball escape portion, 3434 ... large winning device, 3254 ... Entry restriction mechanism, 3454A: movable member, 3454B: first link portion, 3454C: second link portion, 281, 282: acoustic device, 921: connector member, 941: connector member

Claims (2)

Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery,
A storage unit capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the lottery probability of the lottery by the lottery means,
Input means capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting one of the setting information, among a plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability by the lottery means,
When the operation information is input by the input unit, the storage control stores the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information in the storage unit as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery unit. Means,
An entrance where game balls can enter,
Detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detecting means,
A movable member operable to be switchable between an entry permitting state in which the game ball enters the entrance and an entry regulation state in which the game ball enters the entrance;
A gaming machine comprising: an operation checking unit that operates the movable member when a predetermined state notification condition that does not execute the normal control including at least the control for performing the predetermined lottery is satisfied.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.